draft st martin island cmp040906

Coastal and Wetland Biodiversity Management Project BGD/99/G31 St Martin’s Island ECA Draft Conservation Management Plan

05/10/2006 1

St Martin’s Island ECA Conservation Management Plan

- DRAFT -

Coastal and Wetland Biodiversity Management Project, Cox’s Bazar

Lee-Anne Molony, UNV Conservation Management Planner &

National Project Professional Personnel, Cox’s Bazar

August 2006


05/10/2006 2

ACRONYMS AWC Asian Waterfowl Count BECA Bangladesh Environment Conservation Act BPC Bangladesh Parjatan Corporation BWC Bangladesh Waterfowl Census CARINAM Centre for Advanced Research in Natural Resources and Management CBD Convention on Biological Diversity CBO Community Based Organisation CEGIS Centre for Environmental and Geographic Information Services CITES Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora CMP Conservation Management Plan CNRS Centre for Natural Resource Studies CWBMP Coastal and Wetland Biodiversity Management Project CZPo Coastal Zone Policy DAE Department of Agriculture Extension DoE Department of Environment DoF Department of Fisheries ECA Ecologically Critical Area ECAMO ECA Management Officer ECAMU ECA Management Unit ECFCP Empowerment of Coastal Fishing Communities for Livelihood Security Project ECR Environment Conservation Rules EIA Environmental Impact Assessment FAO Food and Agricultural Organisation of the United Nations FD Forest Department GEF Global Environment Facility GIS Geographic Information Systems GoB Government of the People’s Republic of Bangladesh GO Government Organisations GPS Global Positioning System GREP Global Rinderpest Eradication Program IPM Integrated Pest Management IRS Indian Remote Sensing IUCN The World Conservation Union LGED Local Government Engineering Department MCAT Ministry of Civil Aviation and Tourism MoEF Ministry of Environment and Forest MOU Memorandum of Understanding MoWR Ministry of Water Resources NBSAP National Biodiversity Strategy and Action Plan NCC Nature Conservation Committee NCS National Conservation Strategy NCSIP-1 National Conservation Strategy Implementation Project-1 NEMAP National Environment Management Action Plan NEP National Environment Policy NFP National Forestry Policy NGO Non Government Organisation NPPP National Project Professional Personnel


05/10/2006 3

NWP National Water Policy PA Protected Area PMU Project Management Unit POPs Persistent Organic Pollutants SEMP Sustainable Environment Management Programme TED Turtle Excluder Device UNDP United Nations Development Programme UNFCCC UN Framework Convention on Climate Change VCG Village Conservation Group VDC Village Development Committees VO Village Organisation WRDB Water Resources Development Board WTO World Trade Organisation


05/10/2006 4

TABLE OF CONTENTS Acronyms .............................................................................................................................................. 2 Table of Contents ................................ ................................ ................................ ................................ ... 4 Preparation and Structure of the Conservation Management Plan................................ ..............................10 1. Vision Statement/Executive Summary.................................................................................................12

1.1 Vision Statement ................................ ................................ ................................ ..........................12 1.2 Executive Summary .....................................................................................................................12

2. Policy Statements...............................................................................................................................15

2.1 Policy................................ ................................ ................................ ................................ ..........15 2.2 Legislation...................................................................................................................................21

3. General Description ...........................................................................................................................23

3.1 General Description .....................................................................................................................23 3.1.1 Location and Site Boundaries .................................................................................................... 23 3.1.2 Tenure..................................................................................................................................... 24 3.1.3 Management/organisational infrastructure.................................................................................. 24 3.1.4 Site Infrastructure..................................................................................................................... 25 3.1.5 Map coverage .......................................................................................................................... 26 3.1.6 Photographic coverage.............................................................................................................. 27 3.2 Zones ................................ ................................ ................................ ................................ ..........27 3.3.1 Physical................................................................................................................................... 33 3.3.2 Biological ................................................................................................................................ 34 3.4 Cultural.......................................................................................................................................39 3.4.1 Archaeology ............................................................................................................................ 39 3.4.2 Past land use ............................................................................................................................ 39 3.4.3 Present land use........................................................................................................................ 39 3.4.4 Past management for biodiversity conservation .......................................................................... 41 3.4.5 Past status of St Martin’s Island................................................................................................. 43 3.4.6 Present legal status of St Martin’s Island .................................................................................... 43 3.5 People – stakeholders, local communities etc .................................................................................44 3.5.1 Local community and stakeholders ............................................................................................ 44 3.5.2 Tourism ................................................................................................................................... 47 3.5.3 Interpretation provisions ........................................................................................................... 49 3.5.4 Educational use ........................................................................................................................ 49 3.5.5 Research use and facilities ........................................................................................................ 49 3.6 Landscape ...................................................................................................................................50 3.7 Bibliography ................................................................................................................................51

4. Biodiversity Conservation Features .....................................................................................................53

4.1 Identification and Confirmation of Conservation Features...............................................................53 4.2 Objectives ...................................................................................................................................54 4.2.1.1 Screw pine (Pandanus odoratissimus) ..................................................................................... 54 4.2.1.2 Management Objective .......................................................................................................... 54


05/10/2006 5

4.2.1.3 Performance Indicators .......................................................................................................... 54 4.2.2.1 Mangrove.............................................................................................................................. 55 4.2.2.2 Management Objective .......................................................................................................... 55 4.2.2.3 Performance Indicators .......................................................................................................... 55 4.2.3.1 Indigenous onion ................................................................................................................... 56 4.2.3.2 Management Objective .......................................................................................................... 56 4.2.3.3 Performance Indicators .......................................................................................................... 56 4.2.4.1 Marine algae ......................................................................................................................... 57 4.2.4.2 Management Objective .......................................................................................................... 57 4.2.4.3 Performance Indicators .......................................................................................................... 57 4.2.5.1 Cetaceans.............................................................................................................................. 58 4.2.5.2 Management Objective .......................................................................................................... 58 4.2.5.3 Performance Indicators .......................................................................................................... 58 4.2.6.1 Marine turtles ........................................................................................................................ 59 4.2.6.2 Management Objective .......................................................................................................... 59 4.2.6.3 Performance Indicators .......................................................................................................... 60 4.2.7.1 Birds ..................................................................................................................................... 61 4.2.7.2 Management Objective .......................................................................................................... 61 4.2.7.3 Performance Indicators .......................................................................................................... 62 4.2.8.1 Coral-associated fishes ........................................................................................................... 63 4.2.8.2 Management Objective .......................................................................................................... 63 4.2.8.3 Performance Indicators .......................................................................................................... 63 4.2.9.1 Coral .................................................................................................................................... 63 4.2.9.2 Management Objective .......................................................................................................... 64 4.2.9.3 Performance Indicators .......................................................................................................... 64 4.2.10.1 Crustaceans ......................................................................................................................... 65 4.2.10.2 Management Objective ........................................................................................................ 65 4.2.10.3 Performance Indicators ........................................................................................................ 65 4.2.11.1 Molluscs ............................................................................................................................. 66 4.2.11.2 Management Objective ........................................................................................................ 66 4.2.11.3 Performance Indicators ........................................................................................................ 66 4.2.12.1 Echinoderms ....................................................................................................................... 67 4.2.12.2 Management Objective ........................................................................................................ 67 4.2.12.3 Performance Indicators ........................................................................................................ 67 4.2.13.1 Rocky intertidal habitat ........................................................................................................ 67 4.2.13.2 Management Objective ........................................................................................................ 68 4.2.13.3 Performance Indicators ........................................................................................................ 68 4.2.14.1 Sand dunes and beaches ....................................................................................................... 68 4.2.14.2 Management Objective ........................................................................................................ 69


05/10/2006 6

4.2.14.3 Performance Indicators ........................................................................................................ 69 4.2.15.1 Rocky land habitat ............................................................................................................... 70 4.2.15.2 Management Objective ........................................................................................................ 70 4.2.15.3 Performance Indicators ........................................................................................................ 70 4.2.16.1 Marine habitat ..................................................................................................................... 71 4.2.16.2 Management Objective ........................................................................................................ 71 4.2.16.3 Performance Indicators ........................................................................................................ 71 4.2.17.1 Mudflat habitat .................................................................................................................... 72 4.2.17.2 Management Objective ........................................................................................................ 72 4.2.17.3 Performance Indicators ........................................................................................................ 72 4.2.18.1 Lagoons .............................................................................................................................. 73 4.2.18.2 Management Objective ........................................................................................................ 73 4.2.18.3 Performance Indicators ........................................................................................................ 73 4.2.19.1 Insects................................................................................................................................. 73 4.2.19.2 Management Objective ........................................................................................................ 73 4.2.19.3 Performance Indicators ........................................................................................................ 73 4.3 Conservation Status and Rationale ................................................................................................75 4.3.1.1 Assessment of screw pine conservation status.......................................................................... 75 4.3.1.2 Rationale ............................................................................................................................... 75 4.3.1.3 Management actions .............................................................................................................. 75 4.3.1.4 Risks .................................................................................................................................... 76 4.3.2.1 Assessment of mangrove conservation status ........................................................................... 76 4.3.2.2 Rationale ............................................................................................................................... 76 4.3.2.3 Management actions .............................................................................................................. 76 4.3.2.4 Risks .................................................................................................................................... 77 4.3.3.1 Assessment of indigenous onion conservation status ................................................................ 77 4.3.3.2 Rationale ............................................................................................................................... 77 4.3.3.3 Management actions .............................................................................................................. 77 4.3.3.4 Risks .................................................................................................................................... 77 4.3.4.1 Assessment of marine algae conservation status ....................................................................... 77 4.3.4.2 Rationale ............................................................................................................................... 77 4.3.4.3 Management actions .............................................................................................................. 78 4.3.4.4 Risks .................................................................................................................................... 78 4.3.5.1 Assessment of cetacean conservation status ............................................................................. 78 4.3.5.2 Rationale ............................................................................................................................... 79 4.3.5.3 Management actions .............................................................................................................. 79 4.3.5.4 Risks .................................................................................................................................... 80 4.3.6.1 Assessment of marine turtle conservation status ....................................................................... 80 4.3.6.2 Rationale ............................................................................................................................... 80 4.3.6.3 Management actions .............................................................................................................. 83 4.3.6.4 Risks .................................................................................................................................... 84


05/10/2006 7

4.3.7.1 Assessment of bird conservation status .................................................................................... 84 4.3.7.2 Rationale ............................................................................................................................... 84 4.3.7.3 Management actions .............................................................................................................. 85 4.3.7.4 Risks .................................................................................................................................... 85 4.3.8.1 Assessment of coral-associated fish conservation status ........................................................... 85 4.3.8.2 Rationale ............................................................................................................................... 85 4.3.8.3 Management actions .............................................................................................................. 86 4.3.8.4 Risks .................................................................................................................................... 86 4.3.9.1 Assessment of coral conservation status .................................................................................. 86 4.3.9.2 Rationale ............................................................................................................................... 87 4.3.9.3 Management actions .............................................................................................................. 88 4.3.9.4 Risks .................................................................................................................................... 88 4.3.10.1 Assessment of crustacean conservation status ........................................................................ 88 4.3.10.2 Rationale ............................................................................................................................. 88 4.3.10.3 Management actions ............................................................................................................ 89 4.3.10.4 Risks ................................................................................................................................... 89 4.3.11.1 Assessment of mollusc conservation status ............................................................................ 89 4.3.11.2 Rationale ............................................................................................................................. 89 4.3.11.3 Management actions ............................................................................................................ 90 4.3.11.4 Risks ................................................................................................................................... 90 4.3.12.1 Assessment of echinoderm conservation status ...................................................................... 90 4.3.12.2 Rationale ............................................................................................................................. 90 4.3.12.3 Management actions ............................................................................................................ 91 4.3.12.4 Risks ................................................................................................................................... 91 4.3.13.1 Assessment of rocky intertidal habitat conservation status ...................................................... 91 4.3.13.2 Rationale ............................................................................................................................. 91 4.3.13.3 Management actions ............................................................................................................ 92 4.3.13.4 Risks ................................................................................................................................... 92 4.3.14.1 Assessment of sand dune and beach conservation status ......................................................... 92 4.3.14.2 Rationale ............................................................................................................................. 92 4.3.14.3 Management actions ............................................................................................................ 93 4.3.14.4 Risks ................................................................................................................................... 94 4.3.15.1 Assessment of rocky land habitat conservation status ............................................................. 94 4.3.15.2 Rationale ............................................................................................................................. 94 4.3.15.3 Management actions ............................................................................................................ 94 4.3.15.4 Risks ................................................................................................................................... 94 4.3.16.1 Assessment of marine habitat conservation status................................................................... 94 4.3.16.2 Rationale ............................................................................................................................. 95 4.3.16.3 Management actions ............................................................................................................ 95 4.3.16.4 Risks ................................................................................................................................... 95 4.3.17.1 Assessment of mudflat habitat conservation status ................................................................. 96


05/10/2006 8

4.3.17.2 Rationale ............................................................................................................................. 96 4.3.17.3 Management actions ............................................................................................................ 96 4.3.17.4 Risks ................................................................................................................................... 96 4.3.18.1 Assessment of lagoon conservation status.............................................................................. 96 4.3.18.2 Rationale ............................................................................................................................. 96 4.3.18.3 Management Actions ........................................................................................................... 96 4.3.18.4 Risks ................................................................................................................................... 96 4.3.19.1 Assessment of insect conservation status ............................................................................... 96 4.3.19.2 Rationale ............................................................................................................................. 96 4.3.19.3 Management Actions ........................................................................................................... 96 4.3.19.4 Risks ................................................................................................................................... 96

5. Stakeholders ................................ ................................ ................................ ................................ ..97

5.1 Evaluation...................................................................................................................................97 5.2 Objectives ...................................................................................................................................98

5.2.1 Management objectives .................................................................................................... 98 5.2.2 Performance indicators and monitoring.............................................................................. 98

5.3 Status and Rationale .....................................................................................................................99 5.3.1 Status .............................................................................................................................. 99 5.3.2 Rationale ......................................................................................................................... 99 5.3.3 Management actions ....................................................................................................... 100 5.3.4 Risks ............................................................................................................................. 102

6. Tourism........................................................................................................................................... 103

6.1 Evaluation.................................................................................................................................103 6.2 Objective for access and tourism .................................................................................................105

6.2.1 Management objective.................................................................................................... 105 6.2.2 Performance indicators and monitoring............................................................................ 105

6.3 Status and Rationale ................................................................................................................... 106 6.3.1 Status ............................................................................................................................ 106 6.3.2 Rationale ....................................................................................................................... 106 6.3.3 Management actions ....................................................................................................... 108 6.3.4 Risks ............................................................................................................................. 109

7. Interpretation ................................................................................................................................... 110

7.1 Evaluation.................................................................................................................................110 7.2 Site Specific Interpretation Policy ............................................................................................... 110 7.3 Performance Indicators and Monitoring ....................................................................................... 110

8. Operational Objectives................................................................................................................. 111

8.1 Operational Objectives ............................................................................................................... 111 8.2 Rationale ................................................................................................................................... 111 8.3 Management Actions .................................................................................................................. 112 8.4 Risks ........................................................................................................................................ 114

9. Management Action Plan ................................................................................................................. 115 10. Management Action Recording ....................................................................................................... 125 11. CMP Review & ECA Audit ................................ ................................ ................................ ............ 126

11.1 Annual Review ................................ ................................ ................................ ........................ 126 11.2 Long-term Review ................................................................................................................... 126 11.3 Audit ....................................................................................................................................... 126


05/10/2006 9

Annex 1: Marine algae recorded at St Martin’s Island....................................................................... 128 Annex 2: Angiospermic plant species recorded at St Martin’s Island .................................................. 133 Annex 3: Cryptogamic plant species (other than marine algae) recorded at St Martin’s Island .............. 138 Annex 4: Mammals recorded at St Martin’s Island............................................................................ 139 Annex 5: Birds recorded at St Martin’s Island .................................................................................. 140 Annex 6: Reptiles recorded at St Martin’s Island .............................................................................. 144 Annex 7: List of fish recorded at St Martin’s Island .......................................................................... 145 Annex 8: Reef-building corals recorded at St Martin’s Island and their relative abundance .................. 152 Annex 9: Molluscs recorded at St Martin’s Island ............................................................................. 154 Annex 10: Other invertebrates recorded at St Martin’s Island ............................................................ 159 Annex 11: Stakeholder Analysis ...................................................................................................... 160 Annex 12: Compilation of new rules identified for St Martin’s Island ECA ........................................ 162 Annex 13: Awareness Raising ......................................................................................................... 164 Annex 14: Ecotourism Development Plan (DRAFT)......................................................................... 166


05/10/2006 10

PREPARATION AND STRUCTURE OF THE CONSERVATION MANAGEMENT PLAN

This conservation management plan was prepared during the tenure of the UNV Conservation Management Planner at the CWBMP Cox’s Bazar Field Office from September 2005 – August 2006. Information for the plan was obtained from both primary and secondary sources. Primary sources include field surveys conducted by National Project Professional Personnel, or NPPPs, based in the Cox’s Bazar Field Office and Teknaf Sub-office, and information from the local community either directly or via the sub-contracted NGO POUSH. Secondary sources include several publications relevant to the site, all of which are included in the bibliography. This draft was shared with the local community of St Martin’s Island via meetings arranged by the NPPPs on 14-15 August. Feedback as a result of those meetings has not yet been incorporated into plan. Those who were directly involved in the preparation of the plan include the following CWBMP staff:

1. Dr S.M.A Rashid, National Project Coordinator, PMU, Dhaka 2. A.K.M. Rafiqul Islam, ECA Management Officer, Cox’s Bazar 3. Late Nurul Haque, ECA Management Officer, Cox’s Bazar

National Project Professional Personnel (NPPPs) (in alphabetical order) Mid-Level NPPPs 1. Md. Shafiqul Islam, Marine Fisheries Biodiversity Specialist, Cox’s Bazar 2. M. Zahirul Islam, Wildlife Biodiversity Management Specialist, Cox’s Bazar 3. Dr M.A Mannan, Plant Biodiversity Management Specialist, Cox’s Bazar Grassroots Level NPPPs 1. Abdullah Z. Ahmad, Ecotourism Development Officer, Teknaf 2. Kaniz Fatema, Horticulture Extension Officer, Cox’s Bazar 3. Mohammed Abdul Hannan, Wildlife Biodiversity Conservation Officer, Cox’s Bazar 4. Mohammad Eusuf Hasan, Fisheries Biodiversity Officer, Cox’s Bazar 5. Mohammed Aowlad Hossain, Horticulture Extension Officer, Teknaf 6. Md. Faruk Hossain, Agriculture Extension Officer, Teknaf 7. Md. Shahid Hossain, Agriculture Extension Officer, Cox’s Bazar 8. Mohammed Muzammel Hoque, Ecotourism Development Officer, Cox’s Bazar

The plan, based on the structure of Alexander (2005), is divided into 11 sections. Section 1 includes the vision statement and executive summary. The vision statement provides readers with a simple overview of conditions that management is intended to achieve at the site, i.e. it is what the site will look like after we have met our objectives. Section 2 identifies all the policies relevant to the site, including any legal or other obligations. It is one of the most important sections of the plan as the plan must be written to reflect the policies of the agency responsible for the management of the site.


05/10/2006 11

Section 3 provides a general description of the site, collating relevant data from all available sources and identifying any shortfalls in data. It includes site location and boundaries; site tenure; management/organisational infrastructure; site infrastructure; map and photographic coverage; core protection, buffer and general use zones; physical and biological information including habitats, communities and species; cultural information including past and present land use and the legal status of the site; and stakeholders including local communities, tourism, educational and research use. Section 4 is divided into three parts. Part 1 provides a list of the important biodiversity features (habitats/communities/species) of the site and confirms their status. Part 2 provides a short description of, and a management objective for, each feature. Feature -specific management objectives allow us to recognise whether management actions are effective or not; an all-encompassing objective for the entire site would make it difficult to both recognise and manage the detail. Part 2 also identifies the factors affecting each feature and provides indicators for monitoring the state of the features. Part 3 makes an assessment of the current status of each feature with respect to the feature’s management objective and provides a rationale for the management actions which follow. Section 5 evaluates the extent to which stakeholder relationships need to be developed and maintained, based on the extent to which people interact with the site. Management objectives for stakeholder relationships and indicators for monitoring those relationships are also provided. The status of stakeholder relationships (i.e. the difference between the current state and what we need for effective ECA management) is covered, along with a rationale for stakeholder management and management actions to meet the stakeholder management objectives. Section 6 covers tourism at the site, including an evaluation of the appropriate degree of tourism at the site according to our objectives for biodiversity conservation. Objectives for tourism are provided, as well as indicators for monitoring those. The current status of tourism, our rationale for tourism management and management actions to meet tourism objectives are also provided. Related to tourism, Section 7 covers interpretation at the site, i.e. the extent to which information should be provided to enhance visitor experience and help them understand, appreciate and enjoy the site and its conservation features. Section 8 outlines operational objectives, i.e. operational actions that need to be carried out at the site in order that all other objectives are met. Section 9 summarises all management actions included in the CMP into a work plan with defined timelines. Section 10 covers activity reporting and Section 11 covers CMP review - both annual and longer term. A number of annexes are included.


05/10/2006 12

1. VISION STATEMENT/EXECUTIVE SUMMARY 1.1 Vision Statement An example – to be revised with stakeholder groups: Managed with the full support and involvement of local communities and based on best-practice principles for co-managed areas, St Martin’s Island ECA is a dynamic and healthy ecosystem that protects globally, nationally and locally significant biodiversity. It supports important wildlife and fisheries resources and sustainable livelihoods; there are neither threats to biodiversity nor any unsustainable use of natural resources. The Island supports low -key tourism based on ecotourism best-practices and sustainable agriculture that meets the needs of the local community. Extensive sandy beaches, intertidal rocky shore and coral communities occur at the site, providing important habitat for marine life and birds. A wide variety of migratory and resident birds are seen feeding, nesting and resting on the beaches, sand bars, rocky land and mudflat. The sandy beaches are covered in a multitude of mollusc shells and during winter turtle crawl marks are visible between the shore and the dunes. The sand dunes are covered in Pandanus and other sand-binding vegetation and support a variety of nesting birds and turtles. Turtle hatchlings are observed making their way to the shore from the ir nests. The marine habitat supports flourishing communities of marine algae, fish, coral and coral-associated species. A multitude of marine invertebrates are found in the rocky intertidal pools. Dolphins are observed enjoying the near -shore marine habitat surrounding the site. 1.2 Executive Summary In 1999 several areas of Bangladesh were declared ‘ecologically critical areas’ (ECAs). In 2002, the GoB/UNDP/GEF Coastal and Wetland Biodiversity Management Project (CWBMP) started working with the Bangladesh Government Department of Environment (DoE) - the Department mandated with the management of ECAs in Bangladesh - to institutionalise a model of management to ensure the conservation and sustainable use of globally significant biodiversity within ECAs. One output of the CWBMP is the preparation of conservation management plans for each of the four ECA sites covered by the CWBMP, one of which is the St Martin’s Island ECA. The most important section of a conservation management plan (CMP) is the policy statement, as CMPs must be written according to the policies of the organisation responsible for the management of the site. While there is no specific policy for ECA management in Bangladesh, the policies of government agencies covering a broad range of sectors are relevant to the management of the site. One component of the CWBMP is to assess ECA-relevant policy and prepare ECA-specific policy that minimises conflicts between existing policies. Located in south eastern Bangladesh off the southern tip of the Teknaf Peninsula, the St Martin’s Island ECA includes the Island in its entirety. Around 590 ha in area, the land is mostly privately -owned. Six zones have been identified for the site to assist the management of core habitats and species at the site. Several biodiversity conservation initiatives have been implemented at the site since 1996 - mostly turtle conservation activities – and there have been some efforts to reduce the reliance of fishing communities on marine resources. The local community of almost 6000 people are reasonably dependent on the natural resources (mainly marine resources) of the site. There are


05/10/2006 13

very high levels of tourism at the site, and a reasonable amount of research and educational interest in the site’s marine environment, turtles, coral and marine algae. Site infrastructure includes, among others, many household dwellings, a few concrete paths, hotels and restaurants, cyclone shelters, schools, government buildings and mosques. Site records include a range of maps and a decent collection of photographs. A Project Management Unit in Dhaka, a field office in Cox’s Bazar and a sub-office in Teknaf – all established under the CWBMP - form the current organisational arrangement for the management of the site. The site is significant for its coral communities and sandy beach habitats. The site is one of the few areas in the world where coral-algal communities dominate rocky reefs. This unique set of environmental conditions, biotic and abiotic, has no parallel in Bangladesh and perhaps not worldwide. Other important habitats and communities include the rocky intertidal shore, rocky land habitat, marine habitat, lagoons, mudflat and mangrove. The site is also significant for several globally significant species. The site lies on the East Australasian Flyway and Central Asian Flyway and provides a stepping stone for several globally threatened migratory waders. The sandy beaches and sand dunes support significant breeding grounds for at least three globally threatened marine turtle species. Other important species include several dolphin, crustacean and echinoderm species, coral fishes, Pandanus, molluscs, marine algae and an indigenous onion variety. The main threats to biodiversity at the site include the cutting of sand dune vegetation for fuelwood and hotel establishment, the degradation of sand dune habitat due to hotel establishment, the harvesting of turtle eggs, indiscriminate and uncontrolled exploitation of coral resources, the conversion of lagoons and rocky land habitat to agriculture, siltation of marine waters, deforestation, unplanned and unregulated tourism, destructive fishing methods, hunting of shorebirds, coastal erosion and coral damage due to shell collection and boulder removal, and pollution and land degradation from domestic sources, agricultural practices, fish processing practices and boat discharges. This pressure is further exacerbated by a lack of legally instituted protection measures for ECAs, field-level management that is only in the initial stages, limited meaningful participation by local communities in resource-use decision making, limited information on the status and functioning of critical ecosystems, no integrated management planning for ECAs, limited opportunities for alternative sustainable livelihoods, a lack of alternative sources of fuelwood, limited public awareness of environmental issues, a lack of technical knowledge and capacity, poor enforcement of fisheries and wildlife protection acts and a lack of integrated coastal zone management. The main management actions required to stem threats to biodiversity conservation within the site include, simultaneously, the control of adverse activities through law enforcement and awareness raising, the in -situ and ex-situ conservation of species, the rehabilitation of habitats and the provision of alternative livelihoods and incomes for the poorest and most highly dependent resources users. Specific requirements include legislating and enforcing existing and new ECA regulations, sand dune stabilisation, fishing controls, stray dog control, tourism management, infrastructure development management, mangrove regeneration, mudflat protection, the use of zoning to protect core habitat and species and the provision of alternative livelihoods/incomes via ecotourism, diversified agriculture and handicrafts. A model of co-management between the government and the local community is necessary for effective biodiversity conservation. The local community is dependent on the resources of the site and if assisted can manage day-to-day resource exploitation, but only the government can manage the major abuses of resources at the site. Current tourism at the site is high; this and tourism’s related infrastructure needs are having an adverse impact on the Island. Managed tourism and ecotourism development is recommended for


05/10/2006 14

the site as an important component of the strategy for biodiversity conservation. Ecotourism activities around turtle observation, bird watching, coral appreciation, trail walking, scuba diving and snorkelling, dolphin watching, fishing and cultural programs are tentatively recommended. Interpretation to enhance visitor experience and help them understand, appreciate and enjoy the site and its conservation features will need to be developed in line with ecotourism development requirements. Operational objectives, or actions that need to be carried out at the site in order that all other objectives are met, include ensuring the sustainability of the current ECA management structure; the formulation of policy and legislation to meet ECA management requirements; the institutionalisation of ECA management with respect to intersectoral coordination and collaboration at the local and national levels; and capacity building within the DoE for ECA management.


05/10/2006 15

2. POLICY STATEMENTS 2.1 Policy The Ministry of Environment and Forest (MoEF) is the focal point for the Convention on Biological Diversity (CBD) in Bangladesh and is hence responsible for the conservation and management of biodiversity in Bangladesh. The MoEF Department of Environment (DoE) is mandated to actually manage the St Martin’s Island ECA site. The conservation and management of Bangladesh’s natural resources however is the responsibility of many different government bodies, thus site management is guided not only by the policies of the MoEF/DoE but also those of other relevant ministries. Institutional analysis during preparation of Bangladesh’s National Biodiversity Strategy and Action Plan (NBSAP) showed that the responsibilities, communication channels and coordination mechanisms among the many different ministries and departments remain poorly defined and unclear. A review of mandates and policy showed that responsibility for the management of natural resources, and therefore for the conservation and sustainable management of biodiversity, is fragmented, and there is no coordination at either national or institutional levels (MoEF, 2005b). While there is currently no specific policy regarding the establishment and management of ECAs in Bangladesh, the GoB/GEF/UNDP Coastal and Wetland Biodiversity Management Project (CWBMP) is supporting efforts by the DoE to institutionalise the concept of ECA management through the development of such policies. In particular, the CWBMP will focus on the further development of criteria and plans for selection of ECAs, including replication of the ECA concept, ways of ensuring sustainable funding for ECAs, and means of addressing actual or potential conflict with other sectoral-based legislation. It is essential that CWBMP assesses not only conflicting legislation but conflicting policy and policy coordination regarding the conservation and management of natural resources and biodiversity, as identified in the NBSAP preparation process. It is essential that conservation management plans be written according to the policy of the implementing agency; management plans cannot be implemented effectively if the policies they are guided by are in conflict with the policies of other agencies that are also stakeholders in the management of a site. Policies developed under the policy component of the CWBMP should be included in this section of the CMP. All management objectives and actions (Sections 4-8) will need to be reviewed in light of any policy developed. The following policies are relevant to the site: Ministry of Environment and Forest a) National Environment Policy (NEP) (1992) The NEP provides for the protection, conservation and development of the environment and the maintenance of environmental quality in all development activities. The objectives of the NEP are to:

• maintain ecological balance and overall development through protection and improvement of the environment;

• protect the country against natural disasters; • identify and regulate activities which pollute and degrade the environment;


05/10/2006 16

• ensure environmentally-sound development in all sectors; • ensure sustainable, long-term and environmentally sound use of all national resources; and • actively remain associated with all international environmental initiatives to the maximum

possible extent. NEP declarations related to the coastal and marine environment include:

• sustainable use of coastal & marine resources and preservation of coastal ecosystems; • prevention of national and international activitie s causing pollution in coastal and marine

environment; • strengthening research in the protection and development of coastal and marine resources

and environment; and • exploitation of coastal and marine fisheries to a maximum sustainable limit.

Specifically the NEP includes, inter alia, the following aspects:

• rivers, canals, ponds, lakes, haors, beels, baors, and all other water bodies and resources should be kept free from pollution;

• wetlands should be conserved for the protection of migratory birds; • activities which diminish the wetlands/natural habitats of fish should be prevented and

rehabilitative measures encouraged; • existing projects on water resources development, flood control and irrigation should be

examined to determine their adverse impact on fisheries, and; • environmental impact assessment (EIA) should be conducted before undertaking new

projects for water resources development and management. b) National Forestry Policy (NFP) (1979; revised 1994) The overall objective of the NFP is to meet t he basic needs of the present and future generations and to ensure greater contribution of the forestry sector in economic development. The overall NFP goal is that approximately 20% of the area of Bangladesh will be afforested. The NFP realises the need for large scale planning for tree plantation, maintenance and preservation in the coastal areas to reduce the velocity and intensity of cyclones, tornados and tidal bores. Ecotourism related to forest and wildlife is recognised as a forestry-related activity, which will be promoted taking into consideration the carrying capacity of nature. The policy also recognises the international commitments Bangladesh has made on global warming, desertification and the international trade in endangered species. In addition to both the NEP and NFP, the MoEF has also prepared several strategy documents and actions plans related to biodiversity conservation and natural resource management including the National Conservation Strategy (NCS), the National Environment Management Action Plan (NEMAP) and the National Biodiversity Strategy Action Plan (NBSAP). i) National Conservation Strategy (NCS) (1991 ) The NCS was prepared in recognition of Bangladesh’s natural resource conservation commitments under several international treaties, conventions and its own constitution. It provides specific strategies and actions for conservation and sustainable development in 18 areas including human resources, land resources, water resources, forests, biodiversity, fisheries resources, livestock, crop agriculture, urbanisation, health and sanitation, industry, energy and minerals, rural development, transport and communications, disasters and disaster management, environmental awareness and education, gender issues, and environment and interna tional obligations. By adopting the NCS, the government hopes not only to reinforce its national and international commitments for conservation


05/10/2006 17

of resources and sustainable development but also to strengthen the economy for today and the future. While the NCS provides for coordinated conservation of natural resources, it does not explicitly address issues of biodiversity conservation. The National Biodiversity Strategy and Action Plan (below) aims to address these gaps whilst being fully consistent with the measures identified in the NCS. ii) National Environment Management Action Plan (NEMAP) (1995) The NEMAP identifies priority environmental issues that require immediate attention, including coastal and marine resources management, and advocates an inte grated and inter-sectoral approach. A total of 26 activities from five focus areas identified under NEMAP (including Policy and Institutions; Participatory Ecosystem Management; Community–based Environmental Sanitation; Advocacy and Awareness; and Training and Education) are being implemented under the Sustainable Environment Management Project (SEMP), which has been in operation since 1998. iii) National Biodiversity Strategy and Action Plan (NBSAP) (1995) Prepared as a commitment under the CBD, the NBSAP proposes a National Biodiversity Policy for Bangladesh based on the principles of the CBD. It forms a national framework for both initiating and executing activities leading to the conservation and sustainable use of biodiversity, and establishing mechanisms to ensure equitable sharing of the benefits derived from such activities. It outlines 16 strategies and subsequent actions to be implemented under the proposed biodiversity policy, including a prioritisation of those actions. The main objectives of the NBSAP/National Biodiversity Policy are to:

• conserve and restore the biodiversity of the country for the well being of the present and future generations;

• ensure that long-term food, water, health and nutritional securities of the people are met through the conservation of biological diversity;

• maintain and improve environmental stability for ecosystems; • ensure preservation of the unique biological heritage of the nation for the benefit of the

present and future generations; • guarantee the safe passage and conservation of globally endangered migratory species,

especially birds and mammals in the country; and • stop the introduction of invasive alien species, genetically modified organisms and living

modified organisms. The MoEF/DoE is also responsible for international liaison for all environmental matters, including serving as a focal point for relevant international conventions. Bangladesh has ratified (*or is in the process of ratifying) several international conventions on environment, the following of which have most relevance to the management of ECAs:

• International Plant Protection Convention (1951) – an international treaty to secure action to prevent the spread and introduction of pests of plants and plant products and to promote appropriate measures for their control. It is governed by the Commission on Phytosanitary Measures which adopts international standards for phytosanitary measures.

• Plant Protection Agreement for the South East Asia and Pacific Region (1956) – aims to

prevent the introduc tion into, and spread within the region of, destructive plant diseases and pests.


05/10/2006 18

• Convention on Biological Diversity (1992) – sets out commitments for maintaining the world’s ecological underpinnings as we go about the business of economic development. Under the Convention governments undertake to conserve and sustainably use biodiversity. They are required to develop national biodiversity strategies and action plans, and to integrate these into broader national plans for environment and development. The Cartagena Protocol on Biosafety to the Convention on Biological Diversity (2000)* seeks to protect biological diversity from the potential risks posed by living modified organisms resulting from modern biotechnology. It establishes an advance informed agree ment procedure for ensuring that countries are provided with the information necessary to make informed decisions before agreeing to the import of such organisms into their territory.

• UN Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC) (1992) – attempts to address

global warming occurring as a result of human-induced climate change. Its ultimate objective is to stabilise greenhouse gas concentrations in the atmosphere at a level that would prevent dangerous anthropogenic interference with the climate system. Countries ratifying the Kyoto Protocol to the UNFCCC (1997) commit to reducing their emissions of carbon dioxide and five other greenhouse gases, or engage in emissions trading if they maintain or increase emissions of these gases. Parties under UNFCCC should also adopt national climate change mitigation programmes and adaptation strategies. In recognition of the vulnerability of Bangladesh to climate change, a Climate Change Cell was established within the DoE as part of the government’s Comprehensive Disaster Management Program. Its objective is to enable the management of long term climate risks and uncertainties as an integral part of national development planning. Where possible the management of ECAs should be in accordance with any policy developed as part of the work of the Climate Change Cell. The National Adaptation Program of Action addresses immediate climate change adaptation needs.

• Convention on International Trade of Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora

(CITES) (1973) – provides for international cooperation for the protection of certain species of wild fauna and flora against over-exploitation through international trade.

• Ramsar Convention (Convention on Wetlands of International Importance especially as

Waterfowl Habitat) (1971) – provides for the conservation and wise use of all wetlands through local, regional and national actions and international cooperation. The Convention includes marine wetlands (wetlands up to a depth of six metres at low tide), islands, lakes and rivers. Sig natories make a commitment to reverse the loss and degradation of wetland habitat. Globally significant migratory and resident waterfowl are supported by St Martin’s Island’s wetland areas.

• UN Convention on the Law of the Sea (1982) – establishes a legal order for the seas and

oceans to facilitate international communication, and promote the peaceful uses of the seas and oceans, the equitable and efficient utilization of their resources, the conservation of their living resources, and the study, protection and preservation of the marine environment.

• Convention on Persistent Organic Pollutants (2001)* - a global treaty to protect human

health and the environment from persistent organic pollutants (POPs). In implementing the Convention, Governments will take measures to eliminate or reduce the release of POPs into the environment.


05/10/2006 19

• Memorandum of Understanding on the Conservation and Management of Marine Turtles and their Habitats of the Indian Ocean and South-East Asia (2001) – aims to protect, conserve, replenish and recover marine turtles and their habitats, based on the best scientific evidence, taking into account the environmental, socio-economic and cultural characteristics of the signatory States. The St Martin’s Island ECA site includes at least three of the six species of marine turtle identified in the MOU, and another two species are supported by its surrounding waters.

Ministry of Fisheries and Livestock The National Fisheries Policy (1998) aims to develop and increase fish production through optimum utilisation of resources; meet the demand for animal protein; promote economic growth and earn foreign currency through the export of fish and fishery products; alleviate poverty by creating opportunities for self-employment and improving the socio-economic conditions of fisher folk; and preserve environmental balance and biodiversity, and improve public health. The policy extends to all government organisations involved in fisheries and to all water bodies used for fisheries.

Relevant to the St Martin’s Island ECA is the separate policy component for the exploitation, conservation and management of marine fisheries resources. Provisions for the conservation of marine biological resources includes strict decisions against increases in mechanised or non-mechanised boats engaged in fish harvest in the marine zones to keep the fish harvest at its maximum sustainable level; the identification of the extent of destruction to fry and juveniles of shrimp due to the use of set bag nets, and subsequent implementation of conservation measures; the conservation of spawning grounds ensure natural breeding in the sea; the imposition of bans on harvesting of bagda , chaka and harina shrimps from their breeding grounds and migration routes during the breeding season; the extension of practical approaches to harvesting, collecting and utilising trash fish; and appropriate preventive measures against dumping of hazardous chemicals and atomic wastes into the sea. Ministry of Agriculture The Agricultural Extension Policy (1996) promotes sustainable technologies for improved crop production systems and addresses environmental concerns through the promotion of integrated pest management (IPM) and an increased use of composted fertilisers. The National Integrated Pest Management Policy (2002) was formulated in recognition of the growing importance of IPM in increasing sustainable food production in Bangladesh. The objective of the IPM policy is to enable farmers to grow an increasing amount of healthy crops and thereby increase their income on a sustainable basis while improving the environment and community health. The policy intends to expand IPM on a sustainable basis by establishing a national IPM programme and facilitate coordination of all IPM activities in Bangladesh. Maintaining ecological balance and executing appropriate actions on pesticides are key components of the policy. Ministry of Water Resources The National Water Policy (1999) recognises that poor water quality results in watershed degradation and deforestation, reduction of biodiversity, wetland loss and coastal zone habitat loss. Relevant policy includes ensuring adequate upland flow in water channels to preserve the coastal estuary ecosystem threatened by the intrusion of salinity from the sea; and stopping unplanned construction on riverbanks and indiscriminate clearance of vegetation on newly accreted lands.


05/10/2006 20

The MoWR’s Water Resources Planning Organisation (WARPO) explicitly refers to ECAs in its National Water Management Plan (2001). The ECAs and Integra ted Wetland Management program of the broader Environment and Aquatic Resources program cluster outlines a progressive refinement of ECA water requirements and measures to ensure minimum water requirements for ecological function are maintained. The Coastal Zone Policy (CZPo) (2005) is a policy of integrated management of the coastal zone via agreement of different Ministries, Departments and Agencies to harmonise and coordinate their activities in the coastal zone. A Coastal Development Strategy based on the CZPo to harmonise the sectoral policies of relevant Ministries and provide an integrated coastal zone management framework for all development work in the coastal zone, was approved in February 2006. Ministry of Civil Aviation and Tourism The main objectives of the National Tourism Policy (1992) are to create interest in tourism among the people; preserve, protect, develop and maintain tourism resources; take steps for poverty-alleviation through creation of employment; build a positive image of the country abroad; open up a recognised sector for private capital investment; arrange entertainment and recreation; and strengthen national solidarity and integrity. A strategic Master Plan for Tourism Development was prepared in 1990 by UNDP/World Trade Orga nisation (WTO); it is understood this is being updated and revised by WTO. Coastal beaches and islands are identified as attractions in the policy, with several principles of the policy relating directly to these including the allocation of certain islands only for foreign tourist use; and the delineation of special areas or islands for foreign tourists and their development through private sector involvement. Despite St Martin’s Island not being included among the seven different areas identified for tourism development in the policy, the government decided at an inter-ministerial meeting on 16 January 2005 that the Island will be an “exclusive tourist zone” (New Age National, 17/01/2005). The definition of an exclusive tourist zone is unclear, and there is no policy for the management or development of exclusive tourist zones, however a decision was made at the same inter -ministerial meeting to prepare a master plan for transforming the Island into a tourist zone equipped with world-class amenities and for the Local Government Engineering Department (LGED) to implement that plan (ibid, 17/01/2005). Ministry of Land Given the decreasing per capita land availability in Bangladesh, the National Land Use Policy (2001) was prepared to support trends of accelerated urbanisation, industrialisation and diversification of development activities. The objectives of the policy are to: (i) arrest the continued decrease of agricultural land to ensure food production for the increasing population; (ii) prevent indiscriminate use and misuse of land; (iii) determine which land would be used for what purpose, and develop guidelines for the most appropriate use of land; (iv) exercise utmost economy in the acquisition of land for implementation of development projects, urbanisation and other uses of land; (v) determine which land would be needed in future for development purposes and earmark and protect those lands (especially Khas land); (vi) ensure that the use of land is environmentally friendly; and (vii) ensure the best possible use of land to support poverty alleviation and enhanced employment opportunities, thus contributing to arresting the growth of landless households. The policy states that for a balanced eco-environment and human health, 25% of the total land should be under forest coverage and that this can be largely achieved by afforestation of char lands and other suitable lands.


05/10/2006 21

2.2 Legislation The following legal obligations are relevant to the site: a) Bangladesh Environment Conservation Act, 1995 (Amended 2000, 2002) The BECA articulates and expands upon the environmental management and sustainable development goals of the NEP, defining the environmental regulatory regime and DoE’s mandate with respect thereto. It provides for conservation of the environment, improvement of environmental standards and control and mitigation of environmental pollution. BECA includes provisions for the declaration of ECAs, restrictions on vehicle emissions, restrictions on the manufacture and sale of articles injurious to the environment, remedial measures (including compensation and/or corrective measures), environmental pollution discharges, environmental clearances and formulation of environmental guidelines. The BECA has an overriding effect in that notwithstanding anything contained to the contrary in any other law for the time being in force, the provisions of the Act, and rules and directions issued under the Act shall have effect. b) Environment Conservation Rules, 1997 The BECA is implemented by the Environment Conserva tion Rules (ECR). Under the ECR, it is mandatory for industries to carry out an EIA, install waste/pollutant treatment plants, conform to the environmental quality standards, report accidents or unforeseen discharges of pollutants, and take remedial measures as warranted. The DoE issues Environmental Clearance Certificates in favour of those industrial units that conform to the above ECR standards. c) Environment Court Act, 2000 (Amended 2002) The Act provides for the establishment of one or more Environment Courts, initially in every Division of the country, with specific terms of reference to deal with environmental offences (offences under the Environment Conservation Act, or any other law specified in the Official Gazette and the rules made under those laws). d) Wildlife (Preservation) Order, 1973 & Wildlife (Preservation) (Amendment) Act, 1974 The Order provides for the protection of wildlife as well as their habitat. It defines various protected areas in the form of game reserves, national parks and wildlife sanctuaries and aims to preserve wildlife in those protected areas. The wildlife sanctuary regime also requires undisturbed breeding ground for the protection of wildlife as well as all natural resources contained in the sanctuary. The Act classifies wild animals as either game or protected animals - game animals can be killed or hunted with a permit, whereas protected animals are fully protected except for saving life, crops or livestock. The schedules of the Act are revisited and modified regularly as the status of threats to different species changes. The Act does not cover marine turtles but may once current revisions are enacted. e) Forest Act, 1927 (Amended 1990, 2000) The Act empowers the Government to declare any area of forest as Reserved and by doing that it may take measures for in -situ conservation of biological diversity. The Government may also establish some control over private forests through the Private Forest Ordinance. With the introduction and expansion of Community Forestry, the government is gradually trying to introduce community oriented co-management. Any act or omission detrimental to the natural resources of reserve and protected forests is prohibited including clearing forest lands, removing timber, setting fires, felling or otherwise damaging trees, clearing or breaking up any land for cultivation or any other purpose, hunting and the poisoning of water.


05/10/2006 22

f) Marine Fisheries Ordinance (1983) & Marine Fisheries Rules (1983) The Ordinance makes provisions for the manageme nt, conservation and development of the marine fisheries of Bangladesh. It includes provisions for the specification of types, classes and numbers of fishing vessels that can be deployed in Bangladesh fisheries waters; licensing (specifying the areas and periods for which fishing is authorised; species, size, sex, age and quantities of fish that can be taken; and the fishing methods and types, size and amount of fishing gear that may be used); prohibition of fishing methods; and declaration of marine reserves. A marine park was established under the Act in 2000. The Act does not provide for specific preventive or precautionary measures for protection and conservation of aquatic life. g) Protection and Conservation of Fish Act, 1950 (Amended 1963, 1970, 1982, 1995, 2000) & Protection and Conservation of Fish Rules, 1985 (Amended 1987) The Act provides various measures for the protection and conservation of fish including specifying waters in which the catching of certain fish species is prohibited without a valid licence, and specifying fish species of which the catching or sale in certain periods is prohibited; prohibiting the erection of fixed engines in rivers and canals; prohibiting the destruction of fish through the use of poison or explosives; and licensing and regulations around frogs. In recognition that fish fry collection from nature may result in long term ecological destruction the government, in 2000, prohibited the collection of fry or post larvae of fish, shrimp and prawns of any kind, in any form and in any way, in estuary and coastal waters of Bangladesh. The Rules contain a provision for conservation by empowering the government to build any marine reserve in which fishing and any other detrimental activities can be prohibited. h) Agricultural Pesticide Ordinance, 1971 Under the Ordinance the Government can impose a ban on registering any pesticides detrimental to vegetation, human or animal health, but not pesticides harmful to fisheries or aquatic organisms. i) Fertilizer Regulation Order, 1995 The Order provides for environmental assessment of the impact of new fertilizers and bio -fertilizers and subsequent recommendations to the government regarding their production, importation, marketing and use. No provisions exist for the harmful chemical fertilizers that could adversely affect biodiversity resources that are already imported or produced.


05/10/2006 23

3. GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3.1 General Description 3.1.1 Location and Site Boundaries Located in the far south-eastern corner of Bangladesh at 24oN and 92oE, St Martin’s Island lies in the Bay of Bengal some 10 kilometres south of the tip of the Teknaf Peninsula. The Island, which is 590 ha in area, has been declared an ECA in its entirety. It falls under the jurisdiction of St Martin’s Island Union, Teknaf Upazilla. The site’s northern section is known as Uttar Para, which is connected to the southern part of the Island by a narrow neck of land called Golachipa. The area directly south of Golachipa is termed Madhya Para, followed by Dakhin Para. The southernmost tip of the Island, Cheradia, is separated from Dakhin Para during high tide. The Island is accessible only by boat, from the town of Teknaf. It is recommended the ECA area be extended to include a two km radius of marine waters surrounding the site, except for at Cheradia where a five km radius is recommended in line with a proposed core coral protection zone. Figure 1 shows a map of St Martin’s Island.

Figure 1: St Martin’s Island Map


05/10/2006 24

3.1.2 Tenure All land at the site is privately-owned, with the exception of 18.7 hectares at Cheradia which was recently purchased by MoEF. The original settlers in the 1880s purchased the Island and according to the Islanders in 1997 the government didn’t own any land (Tomascik, 1997). Government land identified in 1997 included the BDR station, a police station, a power plant (not functioning), a Government guesthouse, a lighthouse, cyclone shelters cum primary schools, the Union council building and the Health office ( ibid, 1997). Tomascik noted in 1997 that land ownership was a very sensitive issue that needed immediate attention and suggested a review of land ownership to determine if changes have occurred. Since then there has been a large scale transfer of land ownership to outsiders, particularly since 2002, thus a review remains particularly important. 3.1.3 Management/organisational infrastructure The management of ECAs falls under the jurisdiction of the Ministry of Environment and Forest (MoEF). The MoEF incorporates the Forest Department (FD), the Department of Environment (DoE) and several other agencies, with the management of ECAs mandated to DoE. The DoE is currently managing St Martin’s Island ECA via the GoB/UNDP/GEF Coastal & Wetland Biodiversity Management Project (CWBMP). The project, which will run from 2002-2009, has as its overall objective the establishment of an innovative system for the management of ECAs in Bangladesh that will have a significant and positive impact on the long term viability of the country’s important biodiversity resources. As such there is currently only a temporary management structure in place (i.e. CWBMP) however one of the project’s objectives is to support DoE efforts to institutionalise the management of ECAs. This is currently being initiated through the development of a permanent ECA Cell within the DoE. The Cell, formed 31 July 2006, consist s of several DoE staff including one Director (Technical) as convenor, the Director of DoE Chittagong Divisional Office, the Director of DoE Khulna Divisional Office, the Deputy Director of DoE Sylhet Divisional Office, the Deputy Director of Natural Resource Management, DoE, two ECA Management Officers (from the ECAMU of Cox’s Bazar and Kulaura) and several DoE Assistant Director-leve l Officers. The Cell will serve as a GoB focal point for the management of ECAs both now and beyond the life of the project, and will be an important institutional arrangement under the CWBMP exit strategy. The CWBMP PMU will be Secretariat of the Cell for the duration on CWBMP. The Cell, which will operate under the direction of the Director General, DoE, will coordinate the management of all ECAs in Bangladesh, facilitate the replication of the ECA management model in all ECAs in Bangladesh, represent the Cell on the National ECA Committee, ensure the promulgation of ECA rules and regulations under BECA (1995) in line with field requirements, ensure the enforcement of relevant legislation in ECAs and monitor the progress of management actions as outlined in the site -specific conservation management plans. Current management arrangements for the St Martin’s Island ECA site under CWBMP include a Project Management Unit (PMU) located within the DoE Headquarters in Dhaka, and an ECA Management Unit (ECAMU) loc ated in Cox’s Bazar (a satellite office of the DoE Chittagong regional office) (Box 1). A project sub-office has also been established in Teknaf, the town closest to St Martin’s Island on the mainland. Staff responsible for the management of the site inclu des:


05/10/2006 25

Project Management Unit (DoE HQ, Dhaka): 1. National Project Director (and currently Director General, DoE) 2. National Project Coordinator 3. Monitoring and Evaluation Specialist 4. Biodiversity Database Management Specialist 5. Support staff ECA Management Unit (Cox’s Bazar Field Office): 1. ECA Management Officer (and currently Assistant Director, DoE) 2. Wildlife Biodiversity Management Specialist 3. Marine Fisheries Biodiversity Specialist 4. Plant Biodiversity Management Specialist 5. Wildlife Biodiversity Officer 6. Fisheries Biodiversity Officer 7. Ecotourism Development Officer 8. Agricultural Extension Officer 9. Horticultural Extension officer 10. Support staff Sub-office (Teknaf Field Office): 1. Ecotourism Development Officer 2. Agricultural Extension Officer 3. Horticultural Extension officer 4. Support staff In addition to the PMU and site office, National and Local ECA Committees provide an operational structure for ECA management. The National ECA Committee (formed in 2005, yet to convene) was established to create an inter -sectoral channel of communications between MoEF and other Government Ministries with potentially overlapping interests within the ECA. The Committee will provide MoEF with a vehicle for communicating ECA-related policies to line ministries. A Local (district-level) ECA Committee, which facilitates dialogue among the full range of District-level Government Departments concerning issues of common interest related to management of the ECA, will be established in August 2006. 3.1.4 Site Infrastructure St Martin’s Island consists of around 818 household dwellings (POUSH, 2006a), plus structures associated with servicing both the permanent population and the large seasonal influx of tourists. This includes 17 hotels, 12 restaurants, a government office, two main mosques, three primary schools (including one that doubles as a cyclone shelter) and one high school, a second cyclone shelter, a large new hospital, lighthouse, naval base and two ECFCP Village Resource Centres. There are also three concrete paths wide enough to accommodate rickshaw vans - one extends approximately 1.5 km from the main town to the Abakash Hotel at Khaler Mukh, cutting through the centre of the lagoon in Uttar Para; another leads off from the Abakash Hotel path to Kona Para village (about 500m) but is due to be extended all the way to the beach; and the third extends 300m from the town centre south to Purba Para. The land use/habitat map in Figure 3 (Section 3.3.2) also shows the location of inf rastructure at the site.


05/10/2006 26

Box 1: Organisation of St Martin’s Island ECA Management 3.1.5 Map coverage GIS and cartographic maps: Digitised versions of thematic maps hand drawn by Tomas Tomascik in 1992 for the National Conservation Strategy Implementation Project-1 (NCSIP-1) are available in the GIS and Cartographic Services – Final Report (DoE, 1999), a copy of which is available at both the PMU (DoE HQ, Dhaka) and ECAMU (Cox’s Bazar). The thematic maps (no scale provided) include:

1) General distribution of algal and seagrass beds 2) General distribution of coral-algal communities 3) General distribution of soft-coral communities 4) Main inshore fishing areas 5) Proposed zoning plan for National Marine Park 6) Main coral collecting areas 7) Main shell collecting areas

In addition, a GIS cartographic map combining all three Cox’s Bazar ECAs (scale 1:105,000) was procured from LGED (Image date: 2003; Image type: Landsat ETM+; Ground resolution: 30m). This is available in hard copy at both the PMU (DoE HQ, Dhaka) and ECAMU (Cox’s Bazar). Other maps: A land use/resource map produced by POUSH NGO in 2006 for the site is also available in hard copy at PMU and ECAMU, Cox’s Bazar, but is of poor quality and is inaccurate. Future map needs: A satellite image of the site would be useful as it would enable management to prepare an accurate land use map for the site based on the satellite image. An administrative Union/mouza map, prepared as recently as possible, would also be very useful.

Ministry of Environment and Forest

Department of Environment

Forestry Department

ECA Management Unit

CWBMP Project Management Unit

Sub-office

VCGs


05/10/2006 27

3.1.6 Photographic coverage The site records contain around 100 digital and film photos of varying quality showing the Island’s habitats and depicting threats to biodiversity. The collection of digital photographs is stored on several computers at the Cox’s Bazar ECAMU and some are with PMU. It is essential, given the need to maintain a photographic record of conditions and changes at the site, and also to improve materials for awareness raising and displays etc., that the collection is improved. The following steps need to be undertaken to improve the collection:

• Take photographs of all important habitats throughout the site, including the remaining mangrove patch and of species where possible.

• Take photographs of all degradation and threats not already included in the collection, and of infrastructure.

• Establish a good collection of underwater photographs, particularly of coral, algae, seaweed, sea grass beds and coral fish.

• Ensure photographs of any changes to the site, whether the result of management actions or not, are taken.

• Save all existing and future digital photo files with a description of the photo, including location and name of photographer (date of photo can be seen by moving curser over photo).

• Make office copies of good quality and relevant printed film photographs taken by CWBMP staff to date, and record the description, location, date and name of photographer.

• Develop a database of all digital and print photographs for the site, and maintain the database

3.2 Zones Tomascik (1997) prepared a management plan for the development of the site as a National Marine Park as part of the NCSIP -1, including identification of general use zones, a coral appreciation zone, buffer zones and a coral sanctuary zone. The MoEF Conservation of Biodiversity, Marine Park Establishment and Ecotourism Development Project at St Martin’s Island (the St Martin’s Island Project in short), which was initiated to implement the management plan prepared by Tomascik, describe on their website a general use zone, a buffer zone, a coral extension zone, a coral conservation zone, a turtle breeding zone and a coral sanctuary (www.stmartinsbd.org, Conservation of Biodiversity, Marine Park Establishment and Ecotourism Development Project at St Martin’s Island, MoEF, 5 July 2006). Whether these are modifications to those zones proposed by Tomascik, or simply the same zones worded differently, is unclear. The CWBMP has also identified zones for the management of the site, including three core protection zones; two buffer zones and one general use zone. Core zones require maximum protection and minimal human intrusion and thus have more restrictions. They are managed primarily for habitat and/or species protection and conservation and are managed with the aim of removing/minimising all threats to the species or habitat for which the zone is created. Buffer zones shield the core zones and are managed to minimise adverse impacts spilling into the core zone. They provide a buffer between those zones that are highly managed (core zones) and those that are generally unmanaged (general use zones). General use zones recognise the need for zones within protected areas that are reserved for human acitivties and are subject to fewer restrictions. The delineation, description, justification and function of the CWBMP -identified zones are outlined in Table 1, which are numbered 1-6 for the purposes of this management plan but may be renamed as desired. The table also lists restrictions specific for each zone in addition to the general ECA


05/10/2006 28

regulations that apply to the whole site. Table 2 shows a comparison between the zones proposed by CWBMP and those proposed by Tomascik/the St Martin’s Island Project. A major consideration for the effective management of the site will be coordination between MoEF and DoE in determining and agreeing which zones are the most appropriate for management purposes and ensuring that, for the remaining duration of both projects, the MoEF and DoE are implementing activities according to those zones. A map of the zones is provided in Figure 2. All zones need to be clearly identifiable on the ground. If physical boundaries do not exist (river, wall, road etc.) then markers must be used. For all zones, physically mark the boundary of the zone and provide interpretive signage explaining the delineation, justification, function and restrictions of the zone.


05/10/2006 29

Table 1: Core protection, buffer and multiple use zones identified for St Martin’s Island ECA Zone Delineation Description Justification Function Restrictions

1 Cheradia and surrounding waters (5 km radius from land), including the mangrove patch at the south western corner of the mainland and seaweed meadow off the south eastern coast of the mainland

Coral-algal communities and coral-associated fishes; rocky intertidal zone; small mangrove patch; sea weed meadow (Sargassum sp.); Green Turtle breeding area

Fragile area with significant concentration of biodiversity that is heavily touristed. Unless strictly protected, species and habitats will disappear. Includes last remaining mangrove patch on Island. Globally significant coral-algal communities, turtle species.

Core protection zone – Coral sanctuary; mangrove protection; green turtle nesting site; algae protection

1. No human movement except that required for management and restricted research 2. No fishing in waters within 5 km radius of shore 3. Boat anchoring for management and research only – to permanent buoy 4. No infrastructure development

2 Section of Western beach south of Golachipa to mangrove area in south western corner of Island, just north of Cheradia

Relatively undisturbed long stretch of beach and sand dunes; intertidal rocky shore.

An important breeding area for several species of globally endangered marine turtles that is thus far relatively undisturbed - to keep the area as pristine as possible for continued use as a breeding ground for nesting marine turtles. Also shorebird habitat.

Core protection zone – Turtle breeding sanctuary (turtle conservation and turtle habitat conservation); shore bird habitat protection; ecotourism

1. No fishing within 5 km radius of shore, except with hand line 2. No infrastructure development except for small-scale low-impact ecotourism facility 3. Restricted human movement (managed access – to be determined) 4. Guided, managed tourism only 5. No use of lighting during nesting season

3 Section of Western beach north of Golachipa to turtle nesting area near Hotel Abakash, including

Beach and sand dunes, Pandanus.

Turtle breeding habitat Buffer zone – Turtle breeding zone; turtle habitat conservation; independent (managed) tourism; ecotourism (coral appreciation)

1. No lighting during nesting season 2. Restricted human movement (managed access – to be determined) 3. No further infrastructure development except small-scale low-impact ecotourism facility


05/10/2006 30

Zone Delineation Description Justification Function Restrictions offshore rocky barrier in north western corner (coral lagoon)

4 Northern section of Island including all areas north of zones 3 & 5

Boat harbour; concentration of hotels, restaurants and shops; sandy beaches; coral area

Most heavily developed part of Island; most day visitors stay within this area

General use zone – Independent tourism

1. Responsible tourism following ecotourism guidelines 2. Building restrictions

5 Eastern side of Island south of Golachipa to coral core protection zone (Zone 1)

Seaweed meadow (Sargassum sp.); rocky intertidal zone; coral; sandy beach

A buffer between general use zone and core protection zone;

Buffer zone - independent (managed) tourism

1. Restricted human movement (managed access – to be determined) 2. No infrastructure development 3. Boat harbouring limited to permanent buoys

6 Inland area south of Golachipa to Cheradia, between eastern and western sand dunes

Rocky wild land and mangrove habitat

Rocky land habitat on the Island is coming under increasing pressure for conversion to agriculture – this is the last remaining area of rocky land habitat on the Island and supports a number of terrestrial species

Core protection zone - Habitat protection

1. No infrastructure development 2. Limited (managed) tourism 3. No further conversion of land to agriculture


05/10/2006 31

Table 2: Comparison of zones proposed for St Martin’s Island by different initiatives

CWBMP Tomascik/St Martin’s Island Project Comment 1. Core coral protection zone Corresponds mostly to Tomascik’s proposed

coral sanctuary (Tomascik zone 4)

2. Core turtle breeding zone Corresponds mostly to Tomascik’s proposed western buffer zone (Tomascik zone 5) and a third of Tomascik’s western general use zone (Tomascik zone 6)

CWBMP prefers to keep this a core turtle protection zone

3. Western buffer zone Smaller than Tomascik’s proposed western general use zone (zone 6) but incorporates some of Tomascik’s coral appreciation zone (Tomascik zone 7)

As turtles also breed in this area, CWBMP would prefer this to be the buffer zone between the core turtle area and the general use area

4. General use zone Corresponds exactly to Tomascik’s northern general use zone (zone 1); mostly to Tomascik’s eastern general use zone (Tomascik zone 2), and part of Tomascik’s coral appreciation zone (Tomascik zone 7)

5. Eastern buffer zone Corresponds mostly to Tomascik’s proposed eastern buffer zone (Tomascik zone 3)


05/10/2006 32

Figure 2: A map of zones identified for St Martin’s Island ECA

Insert map of zones here (to be prepared)


05/10/2006 33

3.3 Environmental Information 3.3.1 Physical Climate While within the tropical belt, the weather of the site is heavily influenced by the subtropical monsoonal climate that prevails over Bangladesh. From October to February the weather is mild with low rainfall, however heavy rainfall occurs with the south –west monsoon from June -July, and August is a transition month with rainfall declining again. The nearest weather station of Cox’s Bazar provides a good proxy for climatic conditions at the site. According to MoEF (2001b), average annual rainfall for Cox’s Bazar from 1987-1996 varied between 2,867 mm to 4,684 mm. The temperature remains high year-round with small seasonal differences – the mean annual maximum and minimum temperatures recorded at Cox’s Bazar between 1987-1996 were 30.3ºC – 33.0ºC and 19.3ºC-22.4ºC respectively. However, as a result of both being further south than Cox’s Bazar and the influence of the sea, St Martin’s Island experiences higher minimum temperatures and lower maximum temperatures than that of Cox’s Bazar (Tomascik, 1997). Humidity remains relatively high throughout the year - it averaged 79.7% at Cox’s Bazar from 1987-1996 (MoEF, 2001b). From November-February the prevailing winds are from the north west, from March-May from the south west and from June-September from the south east. Access to the Island is quite limited during the rainy season due to very rough seas and is an important consideration for management planning. The site is particularly susceptible to cyclones. Cyclonic storms develop in the Bay, generally in April-May and October -November, occasionally coming to shore and causing severe damage to human settlements and vegetation. As a result of climate change, sea level rises of up to 43 cm are expected by 2050 and more frequent and extensive cyclones and tidal effects are expected (Alam, 2003). Historical tidal data for the 22 years to 2005 at the Cox’s Bazar coastal station has shown a sea level rise of 7.8 mm/annum, which is many times more than the mean rate of global sea level rises over the past 100 years (MoEF, 2005a). The effect of sea level rises may be reversed somewhat by uplifting; calculations from the presence of dead coral and microatolls in the intertidal zone suggest that the Island has uplifted 15 cm in the last 150 years and apparently continues to do so (Tomascik, 1997). Hydrology A shallow lagoon in the north of the Island, which has been largely converted to agriculture, is connected to the sea at high tide by a narrow tidal channel on the west coast. There are three small lagoons in Cheradia. In 1996 attention was drawn to the lack of hydrological studies of the island (Hassan and Ahmed, 1996 in Tomascik, 1997) – it is unknown whether this is still the case. Geology/geomorphology Tomascik (1997) provides a description of the geology of the Island. The site is a sedimentary continental island consisting of continental base rocks which coral communities have colonised. The base rock is Girujan Clay shale (Pliocene), and grey to bluish grey interbedded with subordinate sandstone. Above this is a layer of St Martin Limestone (Pleistocene), which is coquinoid, dirty white, coarse grained, bedded and partly consolidated along with cream coloured coral clusters. Surficial deposits (Holocene) of beach sand, which is medium to coarse grained, light grey to grey with recent shell fragments, lie above the limestone. From Dakhin Para, an intertidal rocky reef extends about 1.8 km south, supporting three vegetated sand islands know locally as Cheradia. Cheradia is connected to the southern part of the Island


05/10/2006 34

during low tide by a narrow sand belt consisting of alluvial sands and littoral carbonates that has accumulated on top of the rocky intertidal reef. Almost the entire coastline of the Island is fringed by a rocky intertidal habitat consisting of small and large boulders, and varying between 100-500 m wide. Coral boulders are also present but are relatively rare. The presence of relatively well preserved dead coral colonies in the upper and middle intertidal zones suggests that the Island has been uplifted in relatively recent times. A coastal embankment has been constructed by piling loose boulders along a considerable length of the east and west coast. Soils The Island consists mainly of alluvial sands mixed with marine calcareous deposits. Golachipa consists of dry sand and has a dune environment. Madhya Para has an alluvial top soil mixed with molluscan shells. Dakhin Para has two dead lagoons and is marshy. The soil in Cheradia is confined to a small area and consists of loose sand mixed with large quantities of molluscan shells. A 2006 study of the soil status and sedimentation of St Martin’s Island conducted by Dr. S.M. Kabir will be available shortly from the MoEF’s Conservation of Biodiversity, Marine Park Establishment and Ecotourism Development Project at St Martin’s Island. Topography MoEF (2001a) describes the topography of the site. Lying in a north-south direction, the Island has a wider northern section and a narrower elongated southern section with a constriction between where the sand dunes of the western and eastern shores have almost joined. This narrow neck is gradually being eroded from both sides. Erosion from tides is also evident on the northern coast of Uttar Para where erosion of dunes up to 2 metres was reported in the late 1990s. The average altitude is 2.5 metres with a high point of six metres in Dakhin Para. 3.3.2 Biological 3.3.2.1 Habitats/communities The site’s habita ts/communities include sand dunes and beaches, a small mangrove patch, marine habitat including, among others, coral communities and a rocky intertidal zone, and lagoons/wetlands, rocky land and a small mudflat area. The map in Figure 3 shows the location and extent of habitats at the site, and includes land use/site infrastructure as well. Sand dunes and beaches: The main shoreline habitats are sandy beaches and dunes, with the main sediments being alluvial sands. Beaches and dunes on the southern part of the island have a higher carbonate content compared to the northern Uttar Para beaches. Most carbonates are molluscan shell fragments. The sandy beach in the north and north east stretches over 300-400 m into the sea. The western beach is sandy but the sub-tidal area consists of a bed of boulders. The site’s sandy beaches are reputedly the best nesting sites in Bangladesh for globally threatened marine turtles (Islam, 2001). Mangrove: The original mangrove formation at the site was considered quite different from any other mangrove in the country in that it was a pure Lumnitzera racemosa formation (GoB/GEF/UNDP, 1999). There is a very small remaining mangrove patch at the site nowadays consisting of Sonneratia apetala, Acanthus ilicifolius, Avicennia marina and Hibiscus tiliceous, among others. Marine habitats: MoEF (2001b) describes the diverse marine habitat. The shallow water marine habitats include rocky and sandy intertidal habitats, offshore lagoons, rocky sub-tidal habitats, coral


05/10/2006 35

aggregations, seagrass beds, soft coral habitats and offshore soft-bottom habitats. Due to the differences in exposure, benthic communities along the east and west coasts of the island support different benthic communities. However the upper and middle intertidal habitats along both coasts generally support similar communities. A generalised zonation of east coast benthic communities along an inshore-to-offshore gradient starting from the lower intertidal is as follows: intertidal gastropod-algal community, coral-algal community, mixed seagrass-algal community, soft-coral community and soft-bottom (mud) community. The zonation on the west coast is as follows: gastropod-algal community, coral-algal community, algal community and soft-bottom community. With the exception of the north eastern corner, the Island’s entire intertidal zone is fringed with numerous boulders that extend from a few metres to a few hundred metres to the sub-tidal zone. These boulders of all shapes and sizes originate from the bedrock and provide a diverse microhabitat for numerous marine species sheltering from tidal influences. The upper portion of the rocky habitat is mostly dry during low tide and contains dead coral colonies. The lower intertidal area consists of diversified marine life, including coral, molluscs, echinoderms, reef fishes, barnacles, crabs, algae etc. It also provides a huge number of rock pools of various sizes where small reef fish forage for the duration of the ebb tide. Depending on the tide, the intertidal zone rocky habitat covers 150-250 ha. The rocky subtidal habitat from the seaward margin to about 1000m offshore support a diverse coral community which can be classified as a veneering coral community. Of the 15 reef-building scleractinian coral families, 10 are present on the Island, represented by approximately 22 genera and 66 species. Of these, 39 have been identified as living corals and 14 as soft coral, growing up to a depth of 7 metres. Corals are found around most of the Island, but their abundance and cover is generally low. The density estimate of corals in the Cheradia area is 1.3 colonies/m2, with a corresponding coral cover of around 7.5%. Small coral aggregations are also found in a number of small intertidal pools of the lower rocky intertidal zone. The coral community also supports associated fish and invertebrate fauna. Sea grass meadows and algal flora associated with extensive coral reefs were discovered in 1997 by Tomascik and Paiker (MoEF, 2001a). The extensive algal and seagrass beds in the Island’s coastal waters are highly productive and diverse and may be important spawning and/or nursery grounds for a number of economically important fish and shell fish species. There are only a few examples worldwide where coral communities dominate rock reefs; St Martin’s Island provides a unique set of environmental conditions (biotic and abiotic) not found elsewhere in Bangladesh and perhaps not in the world (Tomascik, 1997, in GoB/GEF/UNDP, 1999). The co-occurrence of corals, seagrasses and mangroves in the Is land represents little known succession of corals in the tropical areas (Welch, 1962, and McCoy & Heck, 1976, in GoB/GEF/UNDP, 1999). Lagoons/wetlands: Several lagoons/wetlands associated with mangrove and floodplain areas occur at the site, providing habitat for birds. There is a lagoon at Uttar Para, a freshwater wetland at Dakhin Para and sizeable floodplain areas scattered throughout the Island. A 40 ha internal lagoon lies at the south of the main island and within the three small islands comprising C heradia. Rocky land habitat: A small area of rocky land exists at Shil Bania, south of Dakhin Para Morong (lake), and west of the Coast Guard base. The majority of the area is covered with giant boulders similar to that of the intertidal zone, with some lowland pools. The rocky land area covers about 100 ha and is the last remaining habitat for rare species such as the water monitor (Varanus salvator), Bengal cobra (Naja kaouthia), bush birds, water birds and garden lizards, and native


05/10/2006 36

herbs, shrubs and climbers. The rocky ground and shallow water pools provide an excellent terrestrial microhabitat, especially during winter. Mudflat: There is a small mudflat area (Gaitta Banya) located at the southern end of the western beach. It provides numerous food sources for shorebirds and a habitat for amphibious sea snakes and crabs.

Figure 3: A map of habitats at St Martin’s Island ECA

(to be prepared – one supplied insufficient)


05/10/2006 37

3.3.2.2 Flora The most significant floral survey for the site was undertaken by t he NCSIP-1 from 1995-1997, the report of which details the records of both the NCSIP -1 surveys and other significant surveys (MoEF, 2001a). A total of 151 species of benthic and drifted algae, 18 species of bryophytes and 157 species of angiosperms have been recorded at the site. Reports on studies in 2006 of floral diversity and angiosperm flora including medicinal plants (Dr. M. Zaman) and of marine algae (Dr A.H. Chowdury) will be available shortly from the MoEF’s Conservation of Biodiversity, Marine Park Establishment and Ecotourism Development Project at St Martin’s Island. One hundred and fifty one species of marine algae were identified from specimens collected under the NSCIP-1 in 1996, mainly from the Island’s intertidal/littoral zone but some from the sublittoral zone and some as drifted forms (Annex 1). Many of the collected specimens remain unidentified. Ten species were identified by Islam, 1988 (in MoEF, 2001a) as economically important. The mangrove includes the following associated mangrove species: Acanthus ilicifolius, Hibiscus tiliceous, Excoecaria agallocha , Avicennia marina and Clerodendrum inerme. Aegialitis rotundifolia , an early coloniser, has disappeared from the Island (MoEF, 2001a). Pandanus odoratissimus and Ipomea pescaprae, in association with grasses Panicum repens, Passpalum vaginatum and sedges Cyperus spp. and Fimbristylis spp., constitute the vegetation of the sand dunes. Streblus asper and Vitex trifoliata are also found among the crevices formed by rocks, adjacent to a swamp supporting the young mangrove formation. Annex 2 lists the angiosperm species identified at the Island. A number of liverworts and mosses and one fern species (Adiantum philippense) have also been recorded at the Island (Annex 3). Limited information on invasive alien plant species has been collected at the site. Lantana camara is the main alien plant species on the Island – it is distributed throughout and is utilised by nesting birds. It does not appear to be displacing other plant species. 3.3.2.3 Fauna The most significant faunal survey for the site was undertaken by the NCSIP-1 from 1995-1997, the report of which details the records of both the NCSIP -1 surveys and other significant surveys (MoEF, 2001b). Significant surveys in addition to those mentioned in NCSIP-1 document are mentioned under the relevant fauna group below. The Island is particularly important as a wintering area for a wide variety of migratory shorebirds, gulls and terns, and as a nesting area for marine turtles. Mammals – A total of 19 species of mammals were recorded from the Island during the NCSIP-1 survey, of which none of the land-based mammals are carnivorous (MoEF, 2001b) (Annex 4). In addition to the cetaceans recorded by NCSIP -1, a pod of spinner dolphins (Stenella sp.) were observed in 1999 crossing the northern channel (Islam, 2001). Cetacean surveys conducted in Myanmar waters close to the site also recorded an additional species (Stenella attenuta ) that may occur around the site (M.Z. Islam, pers. comm., 16 July 2006). Six marine mammals from the area surrounding the Island are listed in the 2006 IUCN Red Data Book of Threatened Species. Pest species include dogs, domestic cats and field rats. Birds – The site lies on the East Australasian Flyway and Central Asian Flyway and provides a stepping stone for several globally threatened migratory waders. A total of 120 species of birds have


05/10/2006 38

been recorded from the Island (77 resident species and 43 migratory species) of which 18 species may be classified as locally threatened (MoEF, 2001b) (Annex 5). However, Islam (2001) suggests that this number is doubtful. Two species, the grey-headed lapwing (Vanellus cinereus) and Black-bellied Tern (Sterna acuticauda), are listed in the 2006 IUCN Red Data Book of Threatened Species. The Nature Conservation Committee (NCC) conducts a waterfowl census annually in mid -winter along the flyways in Bangladesh, including at St Martin’s Island. The 2005 count, which covered the whole site, found 12 species for a total count of 216 individuals (Sorder, 2005).

Reptiles – The Island supports a total of 27 reptile species, of which 11 are locally threatened (MoEF, 2001b) (Annex 6). All five species of marine turtle known to occur in Bangladesh have been reported in the area including Lepidochelys olivacea (Olive Ridley Turtle), Eretmochelys imbricate (Hawksbill Turtle), Chelonia mydas (Green Turtle), Dermochelys coriacea, Caretta caretta (Loggerhead Turtle) and Dermochelys coriacae (Leatherback Turtle). Three species – the Olive Ridley, Hawks bill and Green turtles – are known to nest at the site (Rashid, 1986, in GoB/GEF/UNDP, 1999). Of these, the Olive Ridley and Green turtles are listed in the 2006 IUCN Red Data Book of Threatened Species as Endangered, and the Hawksbill as Critically Endangered. Other reptiles include, among others, monitors, five species of terrestrial snakes and six species of sea snakes, lizards and four species of freshwater turtle. Amphibians – The Island supports four amphibian species, including a toad (Bufo melanostictus) and three frog species – Skipper Frog (Euphlyctis cyanophylctis/Rana cyanophylctis), the Bull Frog (Hoplobatrachus tigerinus/Rana tigerina ) and Tree Frog (Polypedates maculatus/Rhacophorus maculatus). The bull frog is listed in CITES (Appendix II) (MoEF, 2001b). Fish – A total of 234 species of fish have been identified from the site, 89 of which are coral-associated fish species and only 16 of which are freshwater fish (MoEF, 2001b) (Annex 7). Though coral reefs have not developed, the coral community supports fish fauna characteristic of coral reef environments. The most abundant coral or reef-associated herbivores are the Pomacwentridae (damsel fish), Scaridae (parrot fish) and Acanthuridae (surgeon fish). Important coral or reef-associated predators are Serranidae (groupers), Lutjanidae (snappers) and Lethrinidae (emporers). Five species of the common butterfly fish (Chaetodontidae) were recorded on the Island, as was one species of angel fish (Pomocanthidae). Croakers (Sciaenidae) are also present. These records are from a cursory survey and it is expected that at least 100 additional species are present. Considering the relative isolation of the Island, endemic fish species may also be present. A full fish survey by an experienced fish taxonomist is strongly recommended. Invertebrates - Apart from the NSCIP-1, significant surveys of coral and molluscs were also undertaken by Tomascik in 1997 (MoEF, 2001b). Of the 68 species of living corals identified from the Island (ibid , 2001b), the Porites, Favites, Goniopora, Cyphastrea and Goniastrea genera are the most abundant. The soft corals include Sinularia sp., Lobophyton sp., Anthelia Dendronephthya, Palythoa, Nemanthus, Telemectius and Discsorna sp. (Annex 8). The taxonomy of a good portion of corals occurring around the island remains unknown. Reports on studies in 2006 of molluscs (Dr. M. Nazrul Islam), crabs (M. Nurul Islam) and marine invertebrates (M.S.M.Chowdury) will be available shortly from the MoEF’s Conservation of Biodiversity, Marine Park Establishment and Ecotourism Development Project at St Martin’s Island. A significant survey of molluscs at the site was also undertaken by Ahmed (1990, in ibid , 2001b) and by the University of Dhaka (1990). A total of 187 species of molluscs have been recorded at the Island (MoEF, 2001b) (Annex 9). Of these, 44 species are gastropods and the rest are bivalves. Some important gastropods are abundant, e.g. Conus striatus, Conus textile and Conus geogrphes, and two economically important gastropods that are heavily depleted worldwide - Trochus niloticus and Turbo marmoratus - are also present at the Island (MoEF, 2001b). Four species of sea urchin, one species of sea star, a number


05/10/2006 39

of brittle stars and one species of sea cucumber have been recorded. A num ber of colourful nudibranchs have been recorded in the shallow subtidal rocky reefs. Seven species of crab have been recorded from the Island and six species of butterfly. Other (non-mollusc) invertebrates are listed in Annex 10.

3.4 Cultural 3.4.1 Archaeology There are no known sites of archaeological or historical importance at the site. If any archaeological or historical remains are recorded at the site, the description and location of the remains and any implications for management should be noted here in order that management actions do not threaten their existence. 3.4.2 Past land use Tomascik (1997) describes the past land use of the site. When the Island was first settled in the 1880s it was covered with what has been described as rainforest with an abundance of teak. The community was dependent on the extraction of teak timber, with the first wave of deforestation of the original forest occurring in the 1920s for sale to Burma for house construction and boat building. Later, fishing and agriculture became common professions. A further wave of deforestation began in the 1940s for conversion of land to paddy, including the gradual conversion of the Island’s Uttar Para lagoon to paddy fields. Another wave of deforestation of the original forest occurred in the 1980s. The large scale deforestation over the past 150 years eliminated most of the original wildlife and probably significantly affected the shallow-water benthic communities, including the coral (ibid, 1997). 3.4.3 Present land use Deforestation The use of wood for cooking and timber for constructing houses contributes most to the ongoing deforestation of the Island. The daily requirement of fuelwood for a large population (around 5700, POUSH, 2006a) is large – while many purchase wood imported from Teknaf, poorer families cannot afford to do so. In most cases small bushy plants are used (MoEF, 2001b). Another major cause of recent deforestation is the clearing of vegetation including mangrove to make claims on land. Deforestation has led to increased water turbidity and sedimentation, both of which affect coral development. Agriculture Agriculture accounts for 116 ha of land use on the Island and homestead gardens for a further 7.4 ha, representing 37% of land use in total (POUSH, 2006a). Farming mainly occurs in the north of the Island (Uttar Para) with the main crops being chilli and watermelon. An indigenous small-bulbed onion variety is also cultivated and a small amount of maize is intercropped with chilli. A small amount of transplanted Aman rice is cultivated in the rainy season. Planted trees, particularly coconut, have replaced the original vegetation. Homestead coconut gardening is an important source of income. Some timber yielding species are also found. Livestock are also raised – 360 cows and 329 goats were recorded in 1996 (Tomascik, 1997), while only 182 cows and buffalos and 219 goats were recorded in 2000 (Islam, 2001). In 2005, 33% of households were reported to own livestock (POUSH, 2006b). Agriculture is causing the ongoing destruction of habitat, especially the


05/10/2006 40

clearing of rocky land for cultivation and the filling in of lagoons. Additional problems are the cultivation of exotic and hybrid species and the use of chemical pesticides and fertilisers. The impact of agricultural runoff on the coral resources during the rainy season as a result of increased water turbidity and sedimentation may be considerable (Tomascik, 1997). Tourism Thousands of visitors come to the Island, mainly during the good weather season between December and March, and number more than the carrying capacity of the site given the current level of management (see Section 3.5.2). Infrastructure facilities are being developed for tourism but in an unplanned way and without any EIA. A major problem resulting from tourism is uncontrolled and inadequate waste management. Untreated sewage is piped directly into the sea, or stored in open ponds, adversely affecting marine and ground water quality. Tourists purchase or collect large quantities of coral and shells, which has resulted in the severe depletion of these species. Tourism impacts are covered in more detail in Sections 3.5.2 and 6. Water extraction Deforestation and large scale expansion of agriculture has impacted on the ground water lens of the Island (Tomascik, 1997). During Tomascik’s 1996 survey, one well went dry and some became saline. Freshwater on the Island is available at shallow depths (10 feet) (Islam, 2001) but the needs of the local population and the large annual influx of tourists corresponding with the dry season has created a great demand for freshwater, leading to a drop in the water table. This demand is only going to increase in the near future. Motorised pumps are now used during the peak tourist season to cope with the demand, further reducing the water table level to the extent that the local community have trouble accessing water via tube wells (M.Z. Islam, pers. comm., 16 July 2006). Marine invertebrate collection The large scale removal of keystone species from intertidal and subtidal habitats, including mollusc and sea cucumbers is a problem. Shells are extracted from the beach and lower intertidal zone for sale as curios. Of 332 family heads engaged in natural resource exploitation in 2000, almost one-fifth were shell collectors (Islam, 2001). Earlier only larger shells were collected but now small shell species are also collected. As the shell resource has become overexploited, live molluscs are now being collected. Sea cucumber is also heavily exploited. Seaweed harvesting One species of seaweed is reported to be harvested in large quantities by the local community and traded to Myanmar. Seaweed is normally collected from the beach between February and April and is traded in its dry form, measured by weight. Of 332 family heads engaged in natural resource exploitation in 2000, 32 (10%) were engaged in seaweed collection, and in 2001 20 boatloads of 2-3 metric tons each were traded (Islam, 2001). Seaweed is important for initiating the formation of sand dunes. Coral extraction Commercial coral collection began in the 1960s and is now the professional activity of a few families. Of 332 family heads engaged in natural resource exploitation in 2000, almost one -fifth were coral collectors (Islam, 2001). Coral is collected between October and April when the sea is calm, water is clear and the tides are favourable. The NCSIP-1 survey between 1995-1997 found that at least 11 small non-mechanised boats were being used up to depths of 5 metres, while others that did not have boats walke d out up to depths of about 2 metres. A hammer and chisel is used to break the coral. Acropora, Favia and Goniastra spp. were the main types collected with Acropora spp. the most highly sought after. The estimated weight of coral harvested ranged from 40-100kg/day/boat or about 20-40 kg/day/person. Tomascik (1997, in MoEF, 2001b) estimated that


05/10/2006 41

24% of the existing coral population is removed annually. Most is smuggled to Cox’s Bazar to supply the curio businesses there. Fishing/fish drying Fishing has a long history at the Island and is the main activity of the inhabitants, with about 600 professional fishermen and 170 fishing boats recorded on the Island in 2000-01 (Islam, 2001). The main fishing season is September to April, during which each boat average s a total catch of about 11 metric tons (MoEF, 2001b). The main fishing gears are drifting, fixed and plain gill nets and the seine net. The fish are caught offshore as well as from coral beds. Fishing in inshore waters over boulder reefs is done with rock-weighted gill nets which has an adverse impact on coral. Most of the fish are sun-dried locally at both the five large fish drying farms existing on the Island and at individual households, and then supplied to merchants in Cox’s Bazar and Chittagong. The type and amount of chemicals used during fish processing and the impact of their use on the beach habitat is yet to be determined. Shrimp fry collection is also undertaken at the Island and the fry supplied to the Cox’s Bazar shrimp farms’ shrimp fry suppliers. Of 332 family heads engaged in natural resource exploitation in 2000, almost 50% were shrimp fry collectors (Islam, 2001). Shrimp fry collection causes the large-scale loss of many other aquatic organisms. 3.4.4 Past management for biodiversity conservation Several NGOs and organisations have implemented activities related to biodiversity conservation on the Island, contributing greatly to increasing awareness among the local community about the need to conserve resources on the Island, particularly turtle conservation. The following are listed roughly in order of their appearance on the Island. Centre for Advanced Research in Natural Resources and Management (CARINAM) In October 1996 CARINAM established a turtle hatchery on the Island as part of their marine turtle conservation and study program. Over an 18 month period 17,852 eggs were collected from 132 Olive Ridley turtle nests and four Green turtle nests and 15,120 hatchlings released into the sea with a hatchling success rate of 84.7 per cent (Rashid & Islam, 1999, Islam et.al., 1999, in Rashid & Islam, 2005). Centre for Natural Resource Studies (CNRS) Since 1999 CNRS has been conserving turtles via the annual establishment of hatcheries. Further information on CNRS activities has not become available during the preparation of this plan. National Conservation Strategy Implementation Project-1 and St Martin’s Pilot Project (MoEF) The NCSIP-1 (1995-1999) conducted a survey of flora and fauna at the Island between 1995-1997, assessing the status of resources, identifying the threats to those resources, and recommending measures for the conservation of key resources including, importantly, assessing the feasibility of declaring the island a Marine Protected Area and establishing sustainable touris m and local community development. A management plan was prepared under the NCSIP-1 by Tomascik (1997) and sea turtle conservation activities implemented. The St Martin’s Pilot Project started under the NCSIP-1 as a test program before initiation of the Conservation of Biodiversity, Marine Park Establishment and Ecotourism Development Project at St Martin’s Island (see below). The 18-month Pilot Project (2000-2001) determined the Marine Park zoning under the management plan, conducted biodiversity and socioeconomic surveys, identified the sources of impact on habitats and species, identified community members directly involved in the exploitation of resources, formed community groups to participate in project


05/10/2006 42

activities, implemented sea turtle conservation activities and protected natural resources through awareness raising of different stakeholder groups and local administration involvement. The Pilot Project also planted over 12,000 saplings of 14 different native plant species in an area covering 4.6 acres in Dakhin Para. Turtle conservation activities implemented under the Pilot Project included monitoring of nesting and dead turtles along the Island’s coastline, protection of nesting females from predation by dogs, ex-situ conservation of eggs via a hatc hery, protection if nesting beaches, awareness raising among the local community regarding turtle conservation, inspection of local passenger boats for egg smuggling and liaison with other turtle conservation initiatives on the Island. More than 3850 Olive Ridley eggs were collected and installed in the hatchery for safekeeping during the project period and more than 2600 hatchlings released into the sea, giving a hatchling success rate of 70% (Islam, 2001). Conservation of Biodiversity, Marine Park Establishment and Ecotourism Development Project at St Martin’s Island (MoEF) Established in 2001 to implement the management plan developed by Tomascik under the NCSIP-1, this project has been involved in ex-situ and in-situ turtle conservation via local partic ipation, and research. Through four hatcheries established by the project, 33,274 turtle hatchlings have been released since project inception (A.M. Kamruz Zaman, pers.comm. 29 August 2006), including 12,794 Olive Ridley turtle hatchlings and 1270 Green Turtle hatchlings between 2001-2004. Further, 43 Olive Ridley turtle nests were successfully conserved in-situ from 2002-2004, of which one did not produce any hatchlings. Of those 42 nests that hatched, 4,452 hatchlings were produced (M.Z. Islam, pers. comm., 1 August 2006). The proposed management plan including zoning has thus far not been implemented. MarineLife Alliance (MLA) This NGO has been working at the site since 2000 on marine-related issues, especially turtle conservation. MLA implements an annual beach clean up program and marine turtle conservation activities including tagging, and has conducted an awareness program for MLA conservation initiatives among the local inhabitants, including school children. Empowerment of Coastal Fishing Communities for Livelihood Security Project (ECFCP) The six-year UNDP/FAO Empowerment of Coastal Fishing Communities for Livelihood Security Project (ECFCP) has been working since 2001 at St Martin’s Island, among other areas, to help fishing communities exploit and manage coastal fisheries resources in a profitable and sustainable manner. One objective was to facilitate sustainable conservation and management of coastal marine fishing resources and habitats through participatory stakeholder and community-based approaches, and the promotion of alternative income generating activities. Major interventions included:

a) facilitating participatory management and planning of marine ecosystem and fisheries, and building awareness of needs, benefits and methods of fisheries management;

b) advocacy, dialogue and networking for pollution control, mitigation of damage, rehabilitation of habitats and conservation of the coastal ecosystem;

c) reduction or banning of over/destructive fishing and extending alternative fishing and d) formation of Fisheries Management Advisory Committees for better management of

fisheries, development and implementation of participatory compliance and enforcement measures, consultation and use of media, establishment of village-level resource and habitat information base for management decisions; and

e) establishment of an experimental Rural Enterprise Development Service at the village level to reduce pressure on fisheries and increase income through additional income generating opportunities.


05/10/2006 43

In general, the ECFCP has had a lot of success with community mobilisation and considerable success with empowerment, but little impact on biodiversity conservation. The notable outcomes with respect to community-based and stakeholder-managed fisheries resources and habitats through reduction of fishing efforts in over-fished fisheries, reduction of destructive fishing practices and conservation of fisheries habitats towards sustainable fisheries, include:

• Increasing realisation among fishing communities that most of the current provisions of fish acts and regulations are, despite appearing anti-fishermen at first glance, actually fishermen-friendly in the long run in terms of ensuring the sustainability of fishing resources;

• A reduction in the application of destructive fishing gears and practices among ECFCP villages; and

• Strong willingness among fishing communities to actively participate in rallies/processions to raise awareness within the community about issues related to unsustainable resource use (shrimp fry collection etc.)

POUSH/Prattaya The CWBMP-contracted NGOs POUSH and Prattaya have been working with the ECFCP VOs at St Martin’s Island since April 2005 for community mobilisation for biodiversity conservation. The NGOs have assisted the VO members to prepare for their role in CWBMP biodiversity conservation activities. 3.4.5 Past status of St Martin’s Island The origin of the Island (coral or otherwise) has generated plenty of interest in the past. Fattah (1979, in MoEF, 2001b) assumed the presence of a submerged reef on the south and southeast of the Island, and the Island was classified as a coral island of biogenic nature by Chowdury et.al, 1992 and Ahmed, 1995 (in ibid, 2001b). Khan (1964, 1991, in ibid, 2001b) described the presence of shell and corall ine limestone deposits as well as coral clusters, but not the existence of coral reefs. According to Akhtar (1992, in ibid, 2001b), the base rock of the Island is sedimentary in origin. Alam & Hassan (1997, in ibid , 2001b) concluded there was no evidence, past or present, of coral reef development around the Island; likewise Tomascik (1997, in ibid , 2001b) did not find any evidence of the existence of coral reefs during an extensive survey of the Island’s sub-tidal area. The boulders found on the intertidal and subtidal zones were found by Tomascik (1997, in ibid , 2001b) to be mostly sedimentary in origin and probably the continuation of the base rock. An assessment of the status of St Martin’s Island according to criteria used by the IUCN to determine the suitability of a site for protected area status was undertaken by Tomascik in 1997. According to the assessment, St Martin’s Island was deemed to satisfy the requirements for IUCN Protected Area Category II (Marine Park). A zoning plan was subsequently developed as part of a management plan to manage the Island as a marine protected area. The management plan was never implemented and the IUCN protected area category never applied. 3.4.6 Present legal status of St Martin’s Island St Martin’s Island was dec lared an Ecologically Critical Area (ECA) under the Bangladesh Environment Conservation Act (BECA) (1995) vide GoB Gazette Notification No. MOEF/4/7/87/99/285 dated 19 April 1999. The Act is implemented by the Environment Conservation Rules (ECR) (1997), which lists, inter alia, the factors that shall be taken into consideration when declaring areas as ECAs. The ECR also states “The Government shall, in accordance with the standards referred to in rules 12 and 13, specify the activities or processes


05/10/2006 44

which can not be continued or initiated in an Ecologically Critical Area.” Rules 12 and 13 refer to standards for air, water, sound, odour and other components of the environment (Rule 12), and standard limits of the discharge of liquid waste and gaseous emission, and standards of the discharge or emission of wastes of various industrial units (Rule 13). In line with the requirement under BECA that operations and processes not to be carried out or initiated in ECAs be specified in the same notification that declared the ECA(s), or in a separate notification, the following were specified (in the same April 1999 gazette notification):

• Natural forest and tree felling and harvesting • Wildlife or game killing • Catching or collection of corals, bivalves, turtles and othe r wild life • Destruction or alteration of habitats for flora and fauna • Any activities that relate to the destruction of the natural characteristics of land and water • Establishment of industries that might pollute the land, water, air and make sound pollution • Any activity that might harm fish and other aquatic lives

ECAs are a new category of Protected Area (PA) in Bangladesh and are not formally included in any of the existing PA categories (e.g. the IUCN classification for PAs). This causes uncertainly about which legislation actually applies to ECAs. Thus the legal status of the ECA and the position of ECA legislation within Bangladesh law are a constraint to ECA management. Until ECA regulations are formally acknowledged in Bangladesh law all ECA management enforcement could become ineffective in reality, with no real benefit for biodiversity conservation. The St Martin’s Island “marine park” proposed in the NCSIP -1, and referred to in the MoEF’s Conservation of Biodiversity, Marine Park Establishment and Ecotourism Development Project at St Martin’s Island, has not actually been officially declared as such under any legislation, including the Protection and Conservation of Fish Rules, 1985 (Amendment 1987) which has the power to declare marine reserves and prohibit fishing and any other detrimental activities. 3.5 People – stakeholders, local communities etc 3.5.1 Local community and stakeholders The results of a stakeholder analysis conducted by POUSH in 2005 are included in Annex 11. Primary stakeholders – the local community Human settlement started on the Island around 150 years ago when six families migrated from Myanmar to live on the Island permanently. In 1996 there was a population of around 3700 from 535 families (Paiker, 1996 in MoEF, 2001b); in 2000 a population of 4766 from 791 households (Islam, 2001) and in 2005 a population of 5726 from 818 households (POUSH, 2006a). The population has been growing at an average of 10.5% per annum since 1974 (Islam, 2001). Most are Bengali Muslims.


05/10/2006 45

The main livelihoods among the local community include:

• Fishing • Coral collection • Shell collection • Seaweed collection • Fishing boat ownership

• Fish drying • Shop keeping • Business • Coconut selling • Farming

Of these, fishing (including shrimp fry collection), fish drying labour, the sale of coconuts and agriculture are the most common livelihoods. A small number are engaged in rickshaw van pulling (mainly for tourists). A survey of occupations of 629 households at St Martin’s Island in 2000 found about 59% were engaged in fishing, 25% in business, 9% in labour and 5% in service (Islam, 2001). In 2005 a POUSH survey of 728 households showed 28% were engaged in fishing, 22% in business, 11% in farming, 10% in service and 9% in labour (POUSH, 2006b). While direct comparisons cannot be made due to differences in survey methodology, there appears to have been a remarkable drop in the number engaged in fishing and a doubling of those involved in service. Socio-economic indicators for St Martin’s Island in 2000 (Islam, 2001) showed 33% of households owned a tube well and 92% had no sanitary toilets and used open latrines. Socio -economic indicators for St Martin’s Island based on a 2005 survey of 70 households (approximately 9% of total households on the Island) are listed in Table 3. While direct comparisons with 2000 figures cannot be accurately made due to differences in survey methodology, tube well ownership appears to have doubled and sanitary toilet ownership tripled.

Table 3: Socio-economic indicators of St Martin’s Island ECA, 2005

Indicator Value Household size Average of 6.61 people a Sanitary latrine ownership 24.3% Livestock ownership 32.9% Poultry ownership 92.9% Homestead plot ownership 97.1% Cultivable land ownership 54.3% Garden ownership 9.2% Tube well ownership 57.1% Value of assets owned Average of Taka 25,100 per capita; Taka 125,015 per household Literacy Male: 45.6%; Female: 26.9%; Population: 36.9% Dwelling roofing materials Corrugated iron – 71%; straw – 5.7%; otherb – 19% Household floor space Average of 60.1 square feet/capita Income Average annual income of Taka 122,321/household Expenditure Annual average of Taka 18,207 per capita Notes: Percentages = percent of 70 households surveyed. a A 2000 survey of 100% of households o n the Island by Islam (2001) calculated an average family size of 6.03 which is probably closer to the actual figure than the 2005 survey based on a sample of only 70 households. b Leaves, jute sticks, paddy stem, polythene. Source: POUSH (2006c), Socio Economic Baseline Survey Report, Community Mobilisation for Biodiversity Conservation at Cox’s Bazar, Coastal and Wetland Biodiversity Management Project.


05/10/2006 45

Secondary stakeholders Secondary stakeholders, and their role in the ECA and its management, are summarised in Table 4 (not in order of priority). Interactions between stakeholders and the site The site is a highly lived-in environment and local inhabitants are relatively dependent on the natural resources of the site for their livelihoods. In addition to local pressure on the resource base, wealthy outsiders are purchasing land from locals mostly to cash-in on tourism opportunities. These stakeholders are responsible for unplanned development in inappropriate areas and with inadequate waste management facilities, exerting a pressure on the natural environment far greater than the local community is capable of alone. The main stakeholder activities, legal and illegal, that impact on the site include:

• Excessive cutting/removal of sand dune vegetation • Harvesting of threatened turtles and turtle eggs • Coral and marine invertebrate (shell) collection for sale as curios • Destructive fishing methods • Hunting of birds • Conversion of habitat to agriculture • Conversion of habitat to infrastructure • Unplanned development, mostly for tourism • Fish harvesting and fish processing • Boat anchoring in coral beds

Table 4: Stakeholder involvement in St Martin’s Island ECA management

Stakeholder Activities affect ECA

Affected by ECA

management

Major role in co-management

(decision-making)

Secondary role in co-management

Schools/mosques/madrasas ü

Fishing boat/trawler owners ü ü ü

Boat builders ü ü ü

Local government ü ü ü

Government agencies ü ü ü

Ansar/VDP ü ü ü

Tourism service providers ü ü ü

Religious leaders ü

Non-local landholders ü ü ü

Other project personnel ü ü ü

Conservation NGOs/projects ü ü ü

Other NGOs/projects ü ü ü

CBOs ü ü ü

Coast guard/navy/police ü ü ü

Researchers/scientists ü ü ü


05/10/2006 46

Advantages of the ECA for stakeholders The local community will gain from the presence of the ECA in several ways: a commitment by DoE to ensure the sustainability of natural resources at the site, including controls on the adverse activities of outsiders; opportunities to co-manage the site and influence decision-making on resource management; access to alternative livelihood and income-generating opportunities; and opportunities for capacity building in sustainable resource use, biodiversity conservation and ECA management. Advantages of stakeholders for the ECA The site will gain from the local community a source of labour, intelligence on illegal activities, specialist local skills (e.g. turtle monitoring) and volunteers for the implementation of conservation activities and monitoring of their results and ecological parameters. Past and current measures to develop stakeholder relationships Many measures have been taken in the past to develop relationships with stakeholders, both primary and secondary, under various initiatives on the Island. Current measures continue under projects b), c) and d). a) St Martin’s Pilot Project (NCSIP-1) Under this project which ran for 18 months in 2000/01 (see Section 3.4.4) community groups were formed for the first time for direct participation in natural resource conservation activities. A total of 16 groups of an average of 15 members each were formed from seven villages (Islam, 2001). Participation was strong as the community anticipated longer-term benefits (such as employment opportunities) under the subs equent phase of the project. Relations between project staff and the local community were very good, to the extent that private land was donated for project activity purposes. b) Conservation of Biodiversity, Marine Park Establishment and Ecotourism Development Project at St Martin’s Island (MoEF) The village groups established under the Pilot Project phase (in (a) above) were to be utilised for community-led conservation and individuals employed where possible in this, the project’s subsequent phase (St Martin’s Island Project in short). However, implementation of this subsequent phase has been a lot less participatory than anticipated. In addition, almost 70 positions were available on the project around 30 of which were reserved for locals, however only 10% of those local positions were filled in 2001 and most of the remaining not until 2006, causing deterioration in relationships with the community. Local community perceptions are that the project is not working for them (M.Z. Islam, pers. comm., 30 July, 2006). c) ECFCP Since 2001 the ECFCP has been working with the local fishing community to mobilise and empower the community for sustainable livelihoods. The ECFCP has developed stakeholder relationships at all levels, but particularly at the village-level at the site through:

• assisting four villages (Daskhin Kona Para, Majher Para, Paschim Para and Purba Para villages) to organise themselves into eight village organisations (VOs) and Village Development Committees (VDCs) to collectively address their problems and needs;

• empowering the VOs and VDCs to think through their problems and concerns and plan to address them in a self-reliant manner through demanding their political entitlement;

• providing a voice to the community through a radio program, which community members participate in via interviews, singing, experience sharing, drama etc.;


05/10/2006 47

• strengthening the capacity of VOs and VDCs to operate community-managed savings/credit schemes;

• increasing the communities’ access to social, extension and other support services provided by both government and NGOs;

• increasing the communities’ access to community education and health care; • improving community infrastructure facilities such as roads, ponds, school buildings, health

centres, solar energy facilities, etc.; • improving the communities’ capacity to cope with natural disaster and the aftermath; and • establishing alternative income generating activities

These activities have a direct bearing on stakeholder relationships for ECA management, as the same VOs are being targeted for community-based biodiversity management activities within the ECA. d) CWBMP In order to mobilise the local community for biodiversity conservation the following activities have been undertaken with the same communities as the ECFCP, plus at an additional two VCGs at Dakhin Para village:

• baseline information gathered regarding the current status of the ecology and socioeconomic status of the communities via identification of main stakeholder groups engaged in resource use activities; household surveys; socioeconomic surveys; and boundary mapping;

• consensus-building via problem censuses; resource mapping; problem identification and prioritisation; solution analysis; and conflict resolution;

• planning via the preparation of village conservation action plans; and • organisation building via Village Conservation Group (VCG) organisation in existing

ECFCP VOs; development of rules, regulations and constitution of VCGs; and VCG capacity building.

In general, the local community and other stakeholders are aware of the ECA declaration, the intention of DoE to manage the ECA for the long-term conservation of biodiversity and of CWBMP efforts to undertake this task on behalf of DoE initially. 3.5.2 Tourism Past and current use: The Island has been a tourist destination for many years, but with recent developments in tourism infrastructure it has become one of Bangladesh’s most popular tourist destinations. Tourism has increased steadily since tourism first began on the Island. Official statistics on the number of tourists visiting the site are not available as the site has not been systematically monitored for visitor numbers. During a 45-day period in December 1996 - January 1997 between 150 to 200 visitors visited the Island daily (Tomascik, 1997). According to the St Martin’s Island Project, the number of visitors for the whole tourist season for 2002/03, 2003/04 and 2005/06 (2004/05 figures not available) was 62,520, 103,488 and 156,736 visitors respectively (Abdullah Z. Ahmad, pers. comm., 9 August 2006). Tourism is concentrated in the winter (December -January) when the Island is most accessible while the remainder of the year sees hardly any tourists. Monthly visitor statistics collected by the St Martin’s Island Project have not become available during the preparation of this plan, however discussions with tourist vessel/boat operators during the 2005-06 peak season provided an estimate of 30,000-50,000 visitors for the two month period from December 2005 to January 2006 alone (Abdullah Z. Ahmad, pers. comm., 6 July 2006).


05/10/2006 48

The Island is accessible by boat from Teknaf, the closest town on mainland Bangladesh, which is connected to other parts of the country by road. Until 2002 the Island was only accessible by motorised wooden boat, but now several tourist vessels ply the route between Teknaf and the Island, with an average (official) capacity of 300-400 persons each. These depart from the Domdomia and Keruntoli Ghats (Teknaf) during the peak season (generally October – March). Motorised wooden boats departing from the Keruntoli and Kayak Khali Ghats (Teknaf) are available year-round, with an average capacity of 50 persons each. Around 30% of tourists are accompanied by non-local tour guides while on the Island, 10% by local tour guides and the remaining tour independently. Young children often tag along offering their services as “tourist guides”. Visitors to the Island are mostly Bangladeshi nationals; foreigners form only a very small proportion of tourists. Of the 150 to 200 daily visitors during the 45-day period in 1996/1997, only 15 were foreigner (Tomascik, 1997). Domestic tourists originate from all parts of Bangladesh and generally visit in groups with their spouses, family members, friends, class mates or colleagues, with groups ranging in size from a couple to over 100 people. The largest groups are usually from institutions, particularly educational institutions. Most are day trippers (i.e. return from the Island on the same day) who have included St Martin’s Island in their visit to Cox’s Bazar, another very popular tourist destination on the mainland. In the 1996/1997 study period, an average stay of 3-4 hours was noted and this does not appear to have changed in 2006. In 1996/1997, tourists generally followed a pattern of arriving, visiting the Bazar to look around and get refreshments, walking across Uttar Para to the west coast and walking along the beach and intertidal area, then returning to the Bazar to depart (ibid, 1997). This appears to be the same pattern for visitors in 2006, though a proportion now makes the trip to Cheradia by boat. Those who do stay longer than a day visit usually stay between one and three nights (Abdullah Z. Ahmad, pers. comm., 6 July 2006). Visitors to the Island tend not to be repeat visitors, probably due to the distance of the Island from most parts of Bangladesh. Domestic tourists visit the site mainly to have the experience of visiting an Island and to enjoy its scenic and natural beauty. The majority also expect to be able to enjoy a high level of luxury facilities. Foreign tourists tend to be interested in enjoying the natural environment and to observe and learn about local biodiversity, culture and lifestyle. They are more concerned with the quality of service than luxuries (Abdullah Z. Ahmad, pers. c omm., 6 July 2006). The main tourist activities are listed below, and are grouped into those activities that should be encouraged at the site and those that are unacceptable in terms of managing tourism for biodiversity conservation: Should be encouraged: Turtle and bird watching; visiting the Marine Museum; diving and snorkelling; swimming; beach walking; interacting with local people to learn about their culture and lifestyle; purchasing local products, enjoying local music and cultural shows. Unacceptable: The purchase or collection of shells, screw pine fruit, coral or ornamental fish; walking through sand dunes and over the rocky intertidal areas and reefs; horseback riding; playing loud music; and behaviour that does not respect local cultural and religious values e.g. drinking alcohol and prostitution. The community is strongly religious; Tomascik (1997) reported a zero tolerance to western type “beach behaviour”, i.e. the use of bathing suits.


05/10/2006 49

Current visitor infrastructure: The Island has many hotels/motels and restaurants catering to tourism. There were 17 hotels, motels and tourist lodges and about 12 restaurants as of March 2006, with several more under development, but the capacity of these is yet to de determined. There is a scuba diving service that offers scuba diving and snorkelling trips to coral areas, and a Marine Museum near the jetty. The manned Museum showcases a range of preserved marine species, sells souvenirs and provides information on the Island and sustainable tourism practices. A new hospital has recently been completed (to open in late 2006). Current and past concessions: There are currently no tourism concessions for the site, though this may change in the future. Although not included among the seven different areas identified for tourism development in the National Tourism Policy (1992), the government has declared the Island an “exclusive tourist zone” (New Age National, 17/01/2005). This includes the preparation of a master plan for transforming the Island into a tourist zone equipped with world-class amenities to be implemented by the Local Government Engineering Department (LGED) (ibid , 17/01/2005). 3.5.3 Interpretation provisions There are currently a few interpretation provisions at the site. Some government agencies and NGOs, e.g. MoEF and CNRS, have established signs to raise the awareness of tourists and the local community about ECA rules, nature conservation and the details of project initiatives. Two billboards explaining general conservation tips and legal and illegal natural resource exploitation are placed at the main bazaar and at the port. The Marine Museum displays exhibits of preserved marine specimens and offers information about the Island both verbally and in the form of a brochure and map. The Museum staff also use a microphone to raise the awareness of tourists arriving at the Island about sustainable tourism practices and conservation. The Captain of the Keari Sindbad tourist vessel provides information on the history, description and attractions of the Island and environmentally-friendly tourism practices via microphone during the vessel’s passage to the Island. 3.5.4 Educational use Current educational use of the site is generally limited to groups of university science students, for which visiting the Island to undertake marine-related studies is part of the curricula. At least 20 groups of 30-40 students, i.e. 600-800 students, visit the Island annually. There are no educational facilities or resources at the site. 3.5.5 Research use and facilities Research conducted: According to MoEF (2001a), the Island has been known as a paradise for algologists. Prof. Nurul Islam of the Department of Botany, University of Dhaka, has been researching the benthic marine algae since the mid-1960s. However the continuing decline in algal flora means the site is becoming less suitable for research in this area. Angiosperm flora has been under study since 1963 (MoEF, 2001a). The DoF Marine Fisheries Survey Management Unit in Cox’s Bazar researched the catch-ability of bottom-set gill nets (Duba jal) in the marine waters off the Island over a 12 month period in 1993-94. The research recorded, inter alia, catch rates, catch composition and water physiochemical


05/10/2006 50

parameters (Islam, 1997). Research on the molluscan fauna of the Bay of Bengal between 1988 and 1990 also included St Martin’s Island as one of the ten sample sites (University of Dhaka, 1990). The site has been surveyed for waterfowl over the past 20 years, with formal and regular waterfowl counts beginning in 1987 as a component of the Asian Waterfowl Count (AWC). The Bangladesh Nature Conservation Committee (NCC), which was involved with the AWC program, started its own national program in 2002 called the Bangladesh Waterfowl Census (BWC). The NCC conducts a waterfowl census annually in mid -winter along the flyways of Bangladesh, which includes St Martin’s Island. MarineLife Alliance (MLA), an NGO, has been researching marine-related issues at the site since 2000 including investigation into the trade of both coral and sea turtles and their products originating from the site, and the major threats to sea turtles and their nesting grounds. MLA has studied shore birds, waterbirds and their habitats at the site, participated in an underwater survey and conducted by-catch surveys of cetaceans and a study of whale sharks in the Bay of Bengal adjacent to the site. A series of research projects have recently (2006) been conducted under the auspices of the St Martin’s Island Project covering molluscs, gastropods, crabs, marine invertebrates, soil status and sedimentation, marine algae, aquatic pollution, floral diversity, angiosperms, medicinal plants and the establishment of a living marine aquarium. Research reports will be available from the St Martin’s Island Project once cleared by the Ministry. Suitability for research: The site is suitable for research for a number of reasons. Controversy over the geology and the origin of unique geomorphic features on the Island clearly demonstrates the high scientific value of St Martin’s Island. Co-occurrence of corals, seagrasses and mangroves in the Island represents little known succession sequences of corals in the tropical areas and is of considerable scientific interest. The Island also contains some of the most unique, but thus far unstudied, benthic communities in Bangladesh - one not found elsewhere in the South Asia region. Studies on the competitive interaction between corals and algae offer exciting research opportunities. A marine research laboratory was recently established at the site by the St Martin’s Island Project. 3.6 Landscape St Martin’s Island is a small offshore island in the Bay of Bengal, some 10 km south of the tip of the Teknaf Peninsula. It is long and narrow; some seven km long and only 500 m wide at its widest point. The Island may be divided into three distinct physiographic areas, Uttar Para, Dakhin Para and Cheradia. Uttar Para in the north is approximately two km long and one km wide, and consists of alluvial sands mixed with molluscan deposits. A large shallow lagoon in its centre, which is connected to the sea at high tide by a narrow tidal channel on the west coast, has been largely converted to agricultural fields. Uttar Para is the main centre of the island and is somewhat urbanised with a cluster of hotels, motels, restaurants, shops and other buildings (homes, schools, etc). A narrow sandy stretch known locally as Golachipa separates Uttar Para in the north from the quieter, more natural area of Dakhin Para in the south. Dakhin Para consists of several small lagoons. A narrow sandy rocky reef extends from south Dakhin Para for approximately 1.8 km to form Cheradia, which is separated from the main Island during high tide. Cheradia consists of three


05/10/2006 51

vegetated islands that have developed from the accumulation of alluvial sands and calcerous littoral deposits. The coastline of the Island is mainly sandy beach and apart from the north and north west of the Island has a rocky intertidal zone. The shore line is covered with dense Pandanus, and the sand dunes and flat sandy ground consist of Ipomea . A small patch of mangrove exists in the north western corner of the main Island. 3.7 Bibliography Alam, M. (2003), Bangladesh Country Case Study for National Adaptation Programme of Action

Workshop, 9-11 September 2003, Bhutan.

Alexander, M. (2005), The CMS Guide to Management Planning, Conservation Management System Consortium, Talgarth, Wales, UK. (www.esdm.co.uk/cms)

Anon. (1990), Studies on the Identity and Abundance of Molluscan Fauna of the Bay of Bengal – Final Report, Department of Zoology, University of Dhaka, Bangladesh Agricultural Research Council, Bangladesh.

CITES (2006), CITES Appendices I, II and III. <www.cites.org>. Downloaded on 30 June 2006.

DoE (1996), Plant Biodiversity , Pre-Investment Facility Study: Coastal and Wetland Biodiversity Management Project (Project BGD/94/G41), Dhaka, Bangladesh.

DoE (1999), GIS and Cartographic Services – Final Report, Pre-Investment Facility Study: Coasta l and Wetland Biodiversity Management Project (Project BGD/94/G41), Dhaka, Bangladesh.

FAO/OIE (2006), Recommendations from the FAO & OIE International Scientific Conference on Avian Influenza and Wild Birds (Rome, Italy, 30-31 May, 2006).

GoB/GEF/UNDP (1999), Project Document, Coastal and Wetland Biodiversity Management at Cox’s Bazar and Hakaluki Haor Project (BGD/99/G31), Dhaka, Bangladesh.

Islam, M. S. (1997), Study on the catch -ability of bottom set gillnet (Dubajal) in marine waters off St Martin’s Island , Marine Fisheries Survey Management Unit, Department of Fisheries, Cox’s Bazar, Bangladesh.

IUCN (2006), 2006 IUCN Red List of Threatened Species. www.iucnredlist.org. Downloaded on 30 June 2006.

MoEF (2001a), Survey of Flora , National Conservation Strategy Implementation Project-1, Dhaka.

MoEF (2001b), Survey of Fauna, National Conservation Strategy Implementation Project-1, Dhaka.

MoEF (2005a), National Adaptation Program of Action (NAPA).

MoEF (2005b), National Biodiversity Strategy and Action Plan for Bangladesh .

New Age International (2005), Govt plans to turn St Martin’s into exclusive tourist zone, 17 January 2005.

POUSH (2006a), Land Use Survey Report, Coastal and Wetland Biodiversity Management Project.

POUSH (2006b), Reconnaissance Social Survey, Community Mobilisation for Biodiversity Conservation at Cox’s Bazar, Coastal and Wetland Biodiversity Management Project.


05/10/2006 52

POUSH (2006c), Socio Economic Baseline Survey Report, Community Mobilisation for Biodiversity Conservation at Cox’s Bazar, Coastal and Wetland Biodiversity Management Project.

POUSh (2006d), Participatory Action Plan Development: St Martin’s Island ECA, Community Mobilisation for Biodiversity Conservation at Cox’s Bazar, Coastal and Wetla nd Biodiversity Management Project.

Rashid, S.M.A. and Islam, M.Z. (2005), Review: Conservation and research on marine turtles in Bangladesh. In Shanker, K. and Chowdury, B.C. (eds) Sea Turtles of the Indian Subcontinent, Wildlife Institute of India, Dehradun, India, pp 200-216.

Sivasubramaniam, K (2003), Protection and Conservation of Coastal Biodiversity and Natural Resources for Sustainable Livelihood and Environmental Security in the Coastal Waters of Bangladesh. GoB/UNDP/FAO Empowerment of Coastal Fishing Communities for Livelihood Security Project, Cox’s Bazar, Bangladesh.

Sorder, S. (2005), Bangladesh Mid-Winter Waterfowl Census, Nature Conservation Committee, Dhaka, Bangladesh.

Tomascik, T. (1997), Management Plan for Coral Resources of Narikel Jinjira (St Martin’s Island): Final Report, National Conservation Strategy Implementation Project-1, Ministry of Environment and Forest, Government of Bangladesh.


05/10/2006 53

4. BIODIVERSITY CONSERVATION FEATURES 4.1 Identification and Confirmation of Conservation Features The following is a list of those species and habitats/communities considered important for biodiversity conservation at the site.

Feature International status National status Local status Screw pine ? ? Mangrove ? ? ? Indigenous Onion ? ? Marine algae ? ? Finless porpoisea IUCN (Data Deficient); CITES I ? ? Irrawaddy dolphina IUCN (Data Deficient); CITES I ? ? Bottlenose dolphina IUCN (Data Deficient); CITES II ? ? Indo-Pacific Humpbacked dolphina

IUCN (Data Deficient); CITES I ? ?

Pan tropical spotted dolphin

IUCN (Lower Risk); CITES II ? ?

Spinner dolphin IUCN (Lower Risk); CITES II ? ? Olive Ridley Turtle b IUCN (Endangered); CITES I ? ? Loggerhead Turtleb IUCN (Endangered); CITES I ? ? Green Turtle b IUCN (Endangered); CITES I ? ? Hawksbill Turtle b IUCN (Critical); CITES I ? ? Leatherback Turtle b IUCN (Critical); CITES I ? ? Black-bellied Ternc IUCN (Near Threatened) ? ? Grey-headed Lapwingc IUCN (Least Concern) Coral-associated fishes ? ? ? Coral ? ? ? Lobsterd Crabsd Molluscs ? ? ? Sea cucumbere ? Sea urchinse Rocky intertidal habitat ? ? Sand dunes and beaches

? ?

Rocky land habitat ? ? Marine habitat ? ? Mudflat ? ? ? Insects ? Notes: a Combined under one heading “Cetaceans” for the purposes of management. b Combined under one heading “Marine turtles” for the purposes of management. C Combined under one heading “Birds” for the purposes of management d Combined under one heading “Crustaceans” for the purposes of management. e Combined under the one heading “Echinoderms” for the purposes of management Sources: 1. IUCN (2006), 2006 IUCN Red List of Threatened Species. <www.iucnredlist.org>. Downloaded on 30 June 2006. 2. CITES (2006), CITES Appendices I, II and III. <www.cites.org>. Downloaded on 30 June 2006.


05/10/2006 54

4.2 Objectives This section provides a management objective for each feature (species, habitat or community) based on the condition we want of each feature as a result of our management actions (outlined in Section 4.3). This section also includes performance indicators for each feature based on limits deemed acceptable for those factors affecting the feature, acceptable limits of the physical attributes of each feature that will indicate the condition of the feature, and the monitoring requirements for those indicators considered most important for monitoring both factors and physical attributes. Note: Indicators, including the scale and frequency of monitoring, will need to be reviewed as more information becomes available about each species/habitat/community and factors affecting those. Only those most indicative of factors and the physical state of the feature should be selected. 4.2.1.1 Screw pine (Pandanus odoratissimus) Pandanus is distributed in small to large patches over the Island, growing naturally along the sandy beaches and planted extensively as hedges around the homesteads. 4.2.1.2 Management Objective Pandanus will be distributed all along the coastline protecting the stretches of beach and sand dunes and will cover an area similar to that which existed in 2001, i.e. 20% greater than the current (2006) coverage. 4.2.1.3 Performance Indicators 4.2.1.3.1 Factors and operational limits

Factor Limits 1. Clearing for infrastructure development and private dwellings

No clearing

2. Cutting for fuelwood and household use No removal of whole plants; limited cutting of branches

3. Collection of mature fruit for: sale as curios, drying for fuelwood and drying of seeds for consumption

Collection limited to 75% of fruits borne by each tree

4.2.1.3.2 Attributes and specified limits

Physical Attributes Limits 1. Area At least 20% of the coastline

2. Distribution All along the coastline and scattered in inlands areas

3. Fruits Mature trees have at least five fruits each winter


05/10/2006 55

4.2.1.3.3 Monitoring

Indicator Method Location Frequency Data format 1. Coverage and distribution of Pandanus

Calculate percentage coverage, and record location of distribution, by traversing the coastline

Entire coastline Annually Percentage of Pandanus coverage for whole site; map distribution

2. Number of fruits and fruit bearing trees

Random sample of 3 spots of 30 plants

Island periphery Every fruiting season

Aver age number of fruits per tree; average number of fruit bearing trees/plot sampled

4.2.2.1 Mangrove There is a small patch of mangrove remaining in Dakhin Para on privately-owned land. According to MoEF (2001a), the Dakhin Para mangrove includes, among other species, Sonneratia apetala, Acanthus ilicifolius, Hibiscus tiliceous, Excoecaria agallocha and Calycopteris floribunda. 4.2.2.2 Management Objective Planted mangrove will cover around one hectare at Dakhin Para, 1.5 hectares at Deearmatha and 1.5 hectares at Cheradia, with an additional one hectare of natural mangrove at Dakhin Para which will be naturally regenerating. The mangrove will comprise not less than 17 mangrove and mangrove-associated species, with the main species being Lumnitzera racemosa , Sonneratia apetala, Acanthus ilicifolius and Hibiscus tiliceous. 4.2.2.3 Performance Indicators 4.2.2.3.1 Factors and operational limits

Factor Limits 1. Clearing for asserting land rights No clearing of mangrove

4.2.2.3.2 Attributes and specifie d limits

Physical Attributes Limits 1. Area (ha) Not less than 5 ha.

2. Species diversity Not less than 12 mangrove and mangrove-associated species

3. Species abundance As close as possible to that of Annexure 65-67 in MoEF 2001b, pp 338-343


05/10/2006 56


Indicator Method Location Frequency Data format 1. Area (ha) Record total area

of mangrove for site

Dakhin Para/ Deearmatha/Cheradia

6 monthly Total area in hectares per mangrove patch; total area for whole site

2. Species composition

As per transect method in MoEF 2001b, p 159 (Ecological baseline data)


Annually As per data format in Annexure 65-67 in MoEF 2001b, pp 338-343

3. Species abundance

As per MoEF 2001b, p 159 (Ecological baseline data)


Annually As per data format in Annexure 65-67 in MoEF 2001b, pp 338-343

4.2.3.1 Indigenous onion A small-bulbed onion species native to St Martin’s Island; a major crop cultivated during winter. 4.2.3.2 Management Objective The indigenous onion is sustainably cultivated at the site and continues to represent one aspect of the cultural heritage of the Island. 4.2.3.3 Performance Indicators 4.2.3.3.1 Factors and operational limits

Factor Limits 1. Introduction of other species Indigenous onion represents 80-90% of onion

harvest

2. Skill levels of onion farmers 100% of the onion farmers are aware of best practice production technology


Physical Attributes Limits 1. Area (ha) Equivalent to at least existing area (to be determined,

but approx 10 ha)

2. Seed quality At least 60% germination and 90% purity


05/10/2006 57


Indicator Method Location Frequency Data format 1. Area (ha) Calculate area under indigenous onion

cultivation for five randomly selected farms; compare area to previous year’s area for each farm and determine average percentage increase or decrease for 5 farms; use percentage change to extrapolate total change in hectares for all farms under onion cultivation

Random assessment of 5 onion farmers

Annually Estimated area (hectares) under onion cultivation for whole site, including average annual percentage change

4.2.4.1 Marine algae One hundred and fifty species of marine algae have thus far been identified at the site, including 10 economically important species. Marine algae are distributed throughout the rocky intertidal and sub-tidal zones. 4.2.4.2 Management Objective Marine algae will flourish luxuriously in the rocky intertidal and subtidal zones, and will be found washed ashore between February and March most years. The seaweed will form a basis for sand accumulation, ultimately assisting the formation of sand dunes. A diversity of at least 150 marine algae species will be maintained. 4.2.4.3 Performance Indicators 4.2.4.3.1 Factors and operational limits

Factor Limits 1. Harvesting of seaweed (Hypnea spp.) No collection for at least two years, then possibly

managed rotationally Restricted collection for research purposes

2. Rocky reef habitat degradation No removal of boulders

3. Water quality See Section 4.2.16

4. Use of seine nets No use of seine nets in algal areas


Physical Attributes Limits 1. Species diversity Not less than 150 species

2. Coverage Existing (2006) coverage


05/10/2006 58


Indicator Method Location Frequency Data format 1. Species diversity Collect samples

from 2-3 shoreline areas

Shoreline areas and underwater survey

Monthly between December and April

Species list and abundance

2. Coverage Record area during survey of species diversity

As above Annually Area (ha) per location

3. Examples of harvesting

Record all cases reported

Where reported (drying areas)

Ongoing Number of cases and quantities; particulars of collector

4. Water quality See Section 4.2.16 4.2.5.1 Cetaceans According to the NCSIP -1 Survey of Fauna (MoEF, 2001b) ten cetacean species were recorded in the waters around or adjacent to the site – Balaenopterus musculus (Blue whale), Megaptera nova eangliae (Hump-backed Whale), Sousa chinensis (Indo-Pacific Humpbacked dolphin), Neophocaena phoecaenoides (Finless porpoise), Orcaella brevirostris (Irrawaddy dolphin), Tursiops truncatus (Bottlenose dolphin), Delphinus delphis (Common dolphin), Peponochephala electra (Melon-headed whale), Stenella attenuata (Pan tropical spotted dolphin) and a spinner dolphin (Stenella sp.). However the presence of the hump-backed whale, common dolphin and melon-headed whale is doubtful (M.Z. Islam, pers. comm., 1 August 2006). 4.2.5.2 Management Objective At least seven cetacean species will utilise the pristine marine waters surrounding the site as a foraging and breeding ground and safe migration passage. 4.2.5.3 Performance Indicators 4.2.5.3.1 Factors and operational limits

Factor Limits 1. By-catch in offshore fishing activities No by-catch

2. Pollution of marine habitat No pollution of marine environment

3. Sound pollution and turbidity from oil and gas exploration/extraction

No oil and gas exploration/extraction within 20 km of Island

4. Sound pollution from engine boats Engine boats limited to X (to be determined)


Physical Attributes Limits 1. Species diversity At least seven species

2. Species abundance To be determined


05/10/2006 59


Indicator Method Location Frequency Data format 1. Species diversity

Record all sightings

Around whole Island and territorial waters, including west to Marphoti Bandh (15 km west of site)

Annually Number and type of species


Transect survey Around whole Island and territorial waters, including west to Marphoti Bandh (15 km west of site)

Annually Number of individuals per species

3. Distribution Transect survey Around whole Island and territorial waters, including west to Marphoti Bandh (15 km west of site)

Annually Area of sighting; and species sighted

4. By-catch Personal communication with fishermen

Around whole Island and territorial waters, including west to Marphoti Bandh (15 km west of site), plus offshore fishing vessels

Annually – during survey for 1, 2,and 3 above

Species and abundance, location, type of gear used

4.2.6.1 Marine turtles Five species of marine turtle have been reported in the area: including Lepidochelys olivacea (Olive Ridley Turtle), Eretmochelys imbricate (Hawksbill Turtle), Chelonia mydas (Green Turtle), Caretta caretta (Loggerhead Turtle) and Dermochelys coriacae (Leatherback Turtle). Three species – the Olive Ridley, Hawksbill and Green turtles – are known to nest at the site. The main nesting beach for the Olive Ridley turtle is Shil Banyar Gula at the western beach – 80-90% of the Olive Ridley nests recorded in 2000-01 occurred on this 1000m beach stretch (Islam, 2001); while the main nesting beach for the Green Turtle is Badam Gonya, a small (100m) stretch of sand at the southern end of the western beach. 4.2.6.2 Management Objective Many Olive Ridley and Green turtle individuals will come to the shore each season and make their way uninterrupted to and from their nests at their preferred nesting beaches. Hawksbill and Leatherback turtles will initially be rarely observed but will become increasingly common. The hatchlings of eggs hatched in-situ will make their way safely to the sea naturally, while the hatchlings of eggs hatched ex-situ will be released safely into the sea with the assistance of the community.


05/10/2006 60

4.2.6.3 Performance Indicators 4.2.6.3.1 Factors and operational limits

Factor Limits 1. Collection of turtle eggs for food No collection of eggs

2. Alteration of nesting ground via infrastructure development

No alteration of sand dune habitat

3. Plantation of inappropriate species in dune areas No non-native or spreading root varieties

4. Predation of turtles and turtle eggs by stray dogs Dog populations at nesting beaches maintained at zero

5. Damage to nests by stray dogs Dog populations at nesting beaches maintained at zero

6. By-catch in offshore fishing activities Zero by-catch

7. Trapping in fishing nets Zero deaths from trapping

8. Excessive lighting disorienting hatchlings Limited use of lighting during nesting season

9. Human disturbance of nesting areas and turtles Limited human movement on nesting beaches during nesting season

10. Construction of rock walls along east and west coasts

No further establishment of rock walls; removal of current embankments





Physical Attributes Limits 1. Species diversity At least three species

2. Species abundance At least 250 (Olive Ridley) and 50 (Green) and presence of other species.

3. Distribution of nesting sites At least 12 spots for Olive Ridley and at least 4 spots for Green Turtle, as recorded in 2000-01 season (Islam, 2001)

4. Number of nests At least 150 Olive Ridley nests/season and 50 Green Turtle nests/season

5. Hatchlings Not less than 70% per nest


05/10/2006 61


Indicator Method Location Frequency Data format 1. Species diversity and abundance

Record all sightings including location of individuals

Entire site Ongoing during season

Total number of individuals recorded at site for each species and location

2. Number of nests

Record number and location of all nests

Entire site Daily during season

Total number of nests and location, per species

3. Clutch size Record number of eggs for all nests


Total number of eggs per nest; average number of eggs per nest (per species)

4. Number of disturbed nests

Record number and location of disturbed nests


Total number of disturbed nests; percentage of nests disturbed; location of nests

5. Turtle mortality

Number and location of dead turtles

Entire site Ongoing during season - fortnightly

Total number of dead turtles; ratio of dead individuals to total individuals recorded at site

6. Ex-situ hatchlings

Record the number of eggs relocated to the hatchery, the number of eggs hatched, and hatchling survival

Hatchery(s) Ongoing during season

Total number of eggs relocated, total number of eggs hatched, percentage of eggs hatched, total number of hatchlings survived, percentage of survived hatchlings (per species)

7. Trapped turtles

Record all reports of trapped turtles, including species and location

Any Ongoing during season

Number of turtles reported as trapped; location; species.

4.2.7.1 Birds A total of 120 species of birds have been recorded from the Island (77 resident species and 43 migratory species) of which 18 species may be classified as locally threatened. Two species, the grey-headed lapwing (Vanellus cinereus) and Black-bellied Tern (Sterna acuticauda), are listed in the 2006 IUCN Red Data Book of Threatened Species. 4.2.7.2 Management Objective St Martin’s Island will continue to be an important stepping stone along the migratory bird flyways. Gulls, sandpipers, plovers, turnstones, snipes etc. will forage on the beach, and other migratory birds will be found on the beach and in the wetland in the forest of Dakhin Para. At least 100 species will be found at the site in their various preferred habitats.


05/10/2006 62

4.2.7.3 Performance Indicators 4.2.7.3.1 Factors and operational limits

Factor Limits 1. Vegetation habitat destruction No further clearing of vegetation on the Island

2. Sand dune habitat destruction No further loss of sand dune habitat

3. Water body habitat destruction No further conversion of water bodies for agriculture

4. Hunting and trapping No hunting of any species of bird

5. Predation of eggs and hatchlings by house crow No house crows at the site

6. Human movement in roosting, feeding and nesting areas

Limited human movement in these areas



2. Species abundance To be determined

3. Presence and abundance of threatened species Not less than 4 species

4. Distribution of species Entire Island 4.2.7.3.3 Monitoring

Indicator Method Location Frequency Data format 1. Species diversity Record all species

present on a monthly basis during winter

Whole site – include different habitats (beach, sand dunes, water bodies, mangrove)

Annually Number and location of species, location, number and location of threatened/ endangered species


Record number of individuals present on a monthly basis during winter

Whole site – include different habitats (beach, sand dunes, water bodies, mangrove)

Annually Number and location of individuals for each species, location, number and location of threatened/ endangered species

3. Records of hunting

Record all reports/observations of hunting, including location, species, number of individuals

Whole site Ongoing Number of species and number of individuals hunted, location of hunting

4. Interactions between wild birds and domestic birds

To be determined

5. Sampling of live and dead birds for HPAI H5N1

To be determined


05/10/2006 63

4.2.8.1 Coral-associated fishes The coral community supports approximately 86 species of associated fish fauna characteristic of coral reef environments.

4.2.8.2 Management Objective At least 86 species of coral fishes are found in the coral communities of St Martin’s Island and are represented in all age classes. Viable populations exist for all species. 4.2.8.3 Performance Indicators 4.2.8.3.1 Factors and operational limits

Factor Limits 1. Use of destructive fishing gear No use of small-sized gill nets and small hooks

2. Loss of coral habitat No coral collection



4. Sound pollution from engine boats Engine boats lim ited to X (to be determined)


Physical Attributes Limits 1. Species diversity At least 86 species

2. Species abundance At least existing (2006) levels (to be determined) 4.2.8.3.3 Monitoring

Indicator Method Location Frequency Data format 1. Species diversity Survey fish landing

area and fish market; and underwater survey

Fish landing areas at east coast, north east (jetty) and others; market in Purba Para; and underwater in coral protection zone

Bi-monthly Species list and abundance; landing data (size ranges, abundance)

2. Coral community health

As per section 4.2.9

4.2.9.1 Coral The NSCIP-1 identified 66 species of soft and scleractinian hard coral belonging to 22 genera. The major hard coral genera are Porites, Favites, Goniopora, Cyphastrea and Goniastrea, with Porites being the most abundant in terms of coverage. In general, almost all rocky substrate of the sub-tidal zone of the Island supports diverse coral communities for up to 200m seaward. Live coral colonies extend from the lower intertidal zone to the sub-tidal zone for some 400-1000m. Small coral colonies and recruitment growth are present in the rock pools of the lower intertidal zone. The coral coverage in 1997 varied from 2-10% depending on the location and abundance was considered low (MoEF, 2001b).


05/10/2006 64

4.2.9.2 Management Objective Restore coral abundance, diversity and coverage to the maximum extent possible within the limits imposed by the natural environment. 4.2.9.3 Performance Indicators 4.2.9.3.1 Factors and operational limits

Factor Limits 1. Coral collection for curio business No collection

2. Walking over intertidal and subtidal living coral colonies

No walking (except where provided for under ecotourism program)

3. Boat anchoring No anchoring except at mooring buoys

4. Boulder removal/disturbance No boulder removal/disturbance

5. Uncontrolled scuba diving and snorkelling No recreational diving/snorkelling in core coral protection zone

6. Sewage disposal into marine environment No disposal of untreated sewerage into marine waters

7. Fishing on coral bed bottoms Limited use of seine nets in coral areas outside core coral protection zone

8. Marine water quality See Section 4.2.16


Physical Attributes Limits 1 Coral species diversity Between 60-100 species

2. Coral coverage Up to 20% within 5 years.

3. Coral-associated fish species diversity At least 84 species (to be redefined after coral fish survey)

4. Coral-associated invertebrate species diversity

At least 150 marine algae species, 250 mollusc species, four sea urchin species, sea cucumber

4.2.9.3.3 Monitoring Indicator Method Location Frequency Data format

1. Coral recruitment

10-15 sample plots

All coral areas Annually Average recruitment record per quadrant

2. Coral growth

10-15 sample plots

All coral areas Annually Growth area and length for branching coral

3. Coral carried by tourists; shops

Point inspection

At jetty, other boats (St Martin’s Island); and Labonee Point & Jhinuk Market (Cox’s Bazar)

Daily during tourist season (St Martin’s Island); weekly (Cox’s Bazar)

Tourists - number of tourists in possession, species & abundance; Shops – number, location of shops; species and abundance; numbers sold; particular s of shop owner/keeper

4. Water quality

See Section 4.2.16


05/10/2006 65

4.2.10.1 Crustaceans Seven species of crab have been recorded from the Island, including the Soldier crab (Dotilla myctiroides), Fiddler crab (Uca sp.), Ghost crab (Ocypoda ceratopthalma), Red coral crab (Carpilius convexus), Three-spotted crab (Portunus sanguinolentus), Blue swimmer crab (P. pelagicus) and the Rock crab (Gapsus sp.). Numerous unidentified hermit crabs also roam the rocky intertidal areas and Pandanus areas. Four species of Palinuridae lobster (Panulirus polyphagus, P. versicolor, P. ornatus, and P. homarus) and one species of Schyllaridae lobster (Thenus orientalis) are so far recorded (M.S. Islam, pers. comm., 16 July 2006).

4.2.10.2 Management Objective Maintain species composition and population at viable stock levels. 4.2.10.3 Performance Indicators 4.2.10.3.1 Factors and operational limits

Factor Limits 1. Collection of juveniles via beach seine and small-meshed gill net (bottom-set and drift)

No fishing with destructive gear; adult sizes in market/at fish landing areas



3. Coral habitat destruction No coral collection

4. Rocky intertidal habitat degradation See section 4.2.13.1



Physical Attributes Limits 1. Species diversity and abundance At least 7 species of crab and 5 species of lobster –

abundance to be determined.

2. Species size A range of size groups including adults 4.2.10.3.3 Monitoring

Indicator Method Location Frequency Data format 1. Species diversity, abundance and size range

Direct observat ion: beach for crabs; markets for lobster and crabs

Landing points; fish markets; beach

Bi-monthly Species list, abundance, size ranges, price/kg

2. Fishing gear used

Direct observation of gear types

Landing points, fishing grounds, fishermen’s homes

Bi-monthly Type of gear, numbers of gear, location


05/10/2006 66

4.2.11.1 Molluscs A total of 187 species of molluscs have been recorded at the Island, of which 44 species are gastropods and the rest are bivalves. Some important gastropods are abundant, e.g. Conus striatus, Conus textile and Conus geogrphes, and two economically important gastropods that are heavily depleted worldwide - Trochus niloticus and Turbo marmoratus - are also present at the Island. 4.2.11.2 Management Objective Plenty of mollusc shells and live molluscs will be found in the intertidal habitat of the Island. 4.2.11.3 Performance Indicators 4.2.11.3.1 Factors and operational limits

Factor Limits 1. Shell collection No shell collection for curio sales

Limited collection for research purposes

2. Habitat degradation No removal of boulders

3. Pollution of marine habitat No oil spillage outside general use zone

4. Marine water quality See Section 4.2.16






2. Species abundance & distribution Not less than current (2006) abundance – to be determined.


Indicator Method Location Frequency Data format 1. Species diversity

Quadrants (1 square metre); approx. 4-5 quadrats per spot

4-5 spots in intertidal areas

Bi-monthly Species diversity, number per square metres (density)

2. Mollusc trade

Record all cases reported All Island Ongoing Number of cases; particulars

3. Marine water quality

See Section 4.2.16


05/10/2006 67

4.2.12.1 Echinoderms Four species of sea urchin, one species of star fish, a number of brittle stars and one species of sea cucumber have been recorded. 4.2.12.2 Management Objective Echinoderms will be plentiful in rocky intertidal rock pools. 4.2.12.3 Performance Indicators 4.2.12.3.1 Factors and operational limits

Factor Limits 1. Collection of sea urchins for curio trade & research

No collection for curio business Restricted collection for research purposes

2. Killing of sea cucumbers No killing of sea cucumbers

3. Rocky habitat degradation No collection/removal of boulders

4. Water quality Water quality





Physical Attributes Limits 1. Species diversity & abundance Current (2006) levels 4.2.12.3.3 Monitoring

Indicator Method Location Frequency Data format 1. Species diversity Direct observation;

4-5 spots Intertidal rocky beach area

Bi-monthly Species list


Direct observation; 4-5 spots

Intertidal rocky beach area

Bi-monthly Number of individuals

4.2.13.1 Rocky intertidal habitat With the exception of the north eastern corner, the Island’s entire intertidal zone is fringed with numerous boulders that extend from a few metres to a few hundred metres to the subtidal zone. These boulders of all shapes and sizes originate from the bedrock and provide a diverse microhabitat for numerous marine species sheltering from tidal influences. The upper portion of the rocky habitat is mostly dry during low tide and contains dead coral colonies. The lower intertidal area consists of diversified marine life, including coral, molluscs, echinoderms, reef fishes, barnacles, crabs, algae etc. It also provides a huge number of rock pools of various sizes where small reef fish forage for the duration of the ebb tide. Depending on the tide, the intertidal zone rocky habitat covers 150-250 ha.


05/10/2006 68

4.2.13.2 Management Objective The rocky intertidal zone will be in a natural state, consisting of many rocks and boulders of all shapes and sizes, and providing a suitable habitat for the diversified marine species that depend on its existence. 4.2.13.3 Performance Indicators 4.2.13.3.1 Factors and operational limits

Factor Limits 1. Human boulder removal for various purposes

No boulder removal for any purpose: construction, creating of embankments, collection of molluscs, fishing, or creation of boat harbours.

2. Human movement over rocky intertidal rocky area

No human movement over intertidal rocky area except where permitted under ecotourism plan

3. Mollusc collection No mollusc collection

4. Waste disposal No dumping of solid waste or sewerage


Physical Attributes Limits 1. Physical structure No alteration of physical structure

2. Species diversity Not less than the species diversity of algae, molluscs and echinoderms recorded in this plan


Indicator Method Location Frequency Data format 1. Species diversity 10-15 sample plots Along coastline Annually Number of species

2. Amount of waste As above Plots identified in 1 above

Monthly Frequency of waste per plot; average frequency of waste.

3. Human movement

Direct observation of people, evidence of humans from litter

Along coastline Monthly in tourist season

Presence of people and rubbish, location

4. Physical structure

Direct observation of examples of boulder removal, disturbance and mollusc collection

Depends on examples – record examples

Ongoing Location and extent of removal/ disturbance/mollusc collection

4.2.14.1 Sand dunes and beaches The sand dunes of St Martin’s Island generally occur in a single line along the beach, and are fragmented. They are between 1-4 m in height, and extend for a total of around 1.5 km. The beach creeper Ipomea pes-caprae and thick layer of marine algae that occurs in late winter helps dune formation. Long sandy beaches occur along much of the coastline.


05/10/2006 69

4.2.14.2 Management Objective Healthy naturally regenerating beach and dunes will extend along the length of the coastline. The dunes and beaches will provide undisturbed habitat for nesting turtles and feeding, roos ting and nesting resident and migratory birds. The dunes will be adequately covered with sand-binding and stabilising vegetation including Ipomea, Vitex and Pandanus, which will be naturally regenerating. 4.2.14.3 Performance Indicators 4.2.14.3.1 Factor s and operational limits

Factor Limits 1. Infrastructure development in dune system No structures to be developed within dune system

2. Clearing of dune vegetation for infrastructure development and fuelwood

No clearing of dune vegetation for any purpose

3. Human movement in dune system Restricted to pathways established under the CWBMP

4. Fishing boat docking No docking in dunes; no docking on beach outside designated areas (to be determined)

5. Collection of shells from beach No shell collection


Physical Attributes Limits 1. Dune vegetative coverage 50% coverage of Vitex, Ipomea and Pandanus

2. Dune structure Erosion limited to 5% of dunes

3. Beach invertebrate species diversity Not less than current (2006) diversity 4.2.14.3.3 Monitoring

Indicator Method Location Frequency Data format 1. Vegetative coverage

20 random samples recording percentage of coverage and species

Coastline 6 monthly Percentage coverage of each sample; average coverage; species

2. Invertebrate diversity

Quadrat method, 5 random samples

Coastline 6 monthly Diversity, density (average and per plot)

3. Presence of pedestrian routes additional to those established permanently under CWBMP

Record number and location of non-established routes

Coastline 6 monthly Number and location of non-established routes mapped

4. Presence of infrastructure

Record and map all examples

Entire coastline

Six monthly Number and location of developments mapped

5. Erosion Record and map all examples of dune erosion, and extent of erosion

Entire coastline

Six monthly Location and extent of dune erosion mapped


05/10/2006 70

4.2.15.1 Rocky land habitat A small area of rocky land exists at Shil Bania, south of Dakhin Para Morong (lake) and west of the Coast Guard base. The majority of the area is covered with giant boulders similar to that of the intertidal zone, with some lowland pools. The rocky land area covers about 100 ha, and is the last remaining habitat for rare species such as the water monitor (Varanus salvato r), Bengal cobra (Naja kaouthia ), bush birds, water birds, garden lizards, native herbs, shrubs and climbers. The rocky ground and shallow water pools provide an excellent terrestrial microhabitat, especially during winter. 4.2.15.2 Management Objective To maintain the rocky land habitat in its current form as a geological feature that is unique both locally and nationally. 4.2.15.3 Performance Indicators 4.2.15.3.1 Factors and operational limits

Factor Limits 1. Clearance of rocks and boulders for agriculture No clearance

2. Agricultural expansion No further expansion of agriculture in rocky land area

3. Infrastructure development No further infrastructure development in rocky land area


Physical Attributes Limits 1. Species diversity Not less than X species (to be determined)

2. Area Not less than 100 ha

3. Presence of rocks and boulders At least current (2006) coverage of rocks/boulders – to be determined


Indicator Method Location Frequency Data format 1. Area Map area Whole rocky land area

of Dakhin Para Annually Area (ha)

2. Species diversity and abundance

Survey Whole rocky land area of Dakhin Para

Annually Species diversity and abundance

3. Rock cover Random sample of 10 50m x 50 m plots

Throughout rocky habitat in south Dakhin Para

Annually Percentage of rock cover


05/10/2006 71

4.2.16.1 Marine habitat The marine habitat at the site includes the territorial waters of the site. The marine habitat supports a wide variety of marine biodiversity, a lot of which does not occur elsewhere in Bangladesh. Islam (1997) reports a salinity range between 21.0 ppt (September) to 33.5 ppt (February) for the Island for 1994. Tomascik (1997) also described marine environmental parameters as determined during the study period December 1996 - January 1997. Surface and bottom sea water temperatures ranged between 22ºC and 29ºC. In-shore salinity fluctuated from 25.0 ppt to 32.0 ppt, but the study was conducted in the dry season so those values are expected to vary considerably (as shown by Islam, 1997). The turbidity (Secchi disc) of in-shore waters ranged from 1.5m to 8.0 m, depending on sea conditions and the tidal cycle. 4.2.16.2 Management Objective Maintain marine water environmental parameters as close to natural as possible to ensure the best enabling conditions possible for marine biodiversity. 4.2.16.3 Performance Indicators 4.2.16.3.1 Factors and operational limits

Factor Limits 1. Pollution from disposal of untreated sewerage directly into sea

No disposal of untreated sewerage into marine environment

2. Pollution from solid waste disposal No solid waste disposal into marine environment

3. Increased water turbidity and sedimentation as a result of deforestation

No further deforestation

5. Pollution from fish offal from fish dressing/washing

No fish dressing/washing outside designated areas

6. Pollution and increased water turbidity and sedimentation from agricultural runoff

Limit agricultural run-off

3. Pollution of marine habitat via oil leakage from fishing boats

No oil spillage outside general use zone


Physical Attributes Limits 1. Turbidity/sedimentation Secchi disc readings as high as possible, but no less

than an annual average of X (to be determined)

2. Nutrient status Low concentrations of phosphorus (P) and nitrogen (N) – levels to be determined.

3. Toxicity Not exceeding limits of ECR, 1997


05/10/2006 72


Indicator Method Location Frequency Data format 1. Water quality Turbidity, salinity,

temperature, nutrient status (nitrogen and phosphorus)

5 locations around Island and at least 2 in coral core protection zone

Monthly for first year; bi-monthly thereafter

Secchi disc depth in metres (turbidity), salinity in ppt, temperature in degrees Celsius per plot, concentrations of phosphorus and nitrogen

2. Presence/ abundance of solid waste

Record presence, type and location of solid waste as and when observed

Where observed Ongoing Location, abundance and type of solid waste

3. Toxicity To be determined 5 spots in near shore areas adjacent to town centre, hotels, agriculture etc.

Monthly for first year; bi-monthly thereafter

Toxicity (to be determined)

4.2.17.1 Mudflat habitat The small area of mudflat at the southern end of the western beach supports a wide variety of fauna including birds, marine invertebrates, an amphibious sea snake, Fiddler crabs and mud crabs. 4.2.17.2 Management Objective The mudflat will cover two hectares and support a wide variety of birds, marine invertebrates, crabs and the amphibious sea snake. 4.2.17.3 Performance Indicators 4.2.17.3.1 Factors and operational limits

Factor Limits 1. Private ownership may affect ability to maintain mudflat in its natural state

No change in natural condition


Physical Attributes Limits 1. Area No less than two hectares

2. Species diversity No less than present diversity of birds, marine invertebrates, crabs and sea snake

3. Physical structure No alteration to physical structure


05/10/2006 73


Indicator Method Location Frequency Data format 1. Area Direct measurement Only mudflat area

at site 6 monthly Area in hectares

2. Species diversity

Bird counts, invertebrate diversity count through tube or quadrat method (several random samples), survey of crabs and sea snake (night time)

Only mudflat area at site

6 monthly Species list

3. Physical structure

Direct observation of physical changes

Only mudflat area at site

Bi-monthly Any physical changes noted, location, probably cause

4.2.18.1 Lagoons 4.2.18.2 Management Objective 4.2.18.3 Performance Indicators 4.2.18.3.1 Factors and operational limits

Factor Limits


Physical Attributes Limits


Indicator Method Location Frequency Data format 4.2.19.1 Insects Wildlife NPPPs to insert information obtained from Mr Badrul Amin Bhuiyan (Entomologist) 4.2.19.2 Management Objective 4.2.19.3 Performance Indicato rs


05/10/2006 74

4.2.19.3.1 Factors and operational limits

Factor Limits


Physical Attributes Limits


Indicator Method Location Frequency Data format


05/10/2006 75

4.3 Conservation Status and Rationale This section outlines the current conservation status of each feature compared to our objective for the feature (where the current status is known), the rationale for proposed management actions and the management actions required for the feature to reach the conservation status defined by the objective. The timing of management actions is provided in the work plan at Section 9. 4.3.1.1 Assessment of screw pine conservation status Pandanus is distributed all over the Island in large and small stands, particularly along the sandy beaches and around homesteads. However the use of Pandanus for firewood has degraded the vegetation to the extent that beach and dune erosion in taking place. 4.3.1.2 Rationale Pandanus operates virtually as a fence around the Island, protecting the inland areas from the elements of wind, water and sand. Pandanus is important for sand dune formation, maintaining dune structure and protecting the shoreline from wind and water erosion. There some management of factors affecting Pandanus at the Island. It has been planted extensively along the coastline, particularly near homesteads as fences and windbreaks, but is also collected or cut for fuelwood, cleared for infrastructure development and dwellings, and its mature fruits collected for sale to tourists as curios. Mature fruits are also dried for fuelwood, and the dried seeds eaten by children. The St Martin’ Island Project have planted the equivalent of 11 km of Pandanus along the coastline (A.M. Kamruz Zaman, pers.comm. 29 August 2006). The clearing and cutting of Pandanus are the most serious factors affecting its decline, particularly the removal of the whole plant as it is the root system that stabilises beach and dune sediments. As the plant propagates both vegetatively and via seed, the collection of fruits may not seriously affect the natural regeneration of the plant. The ECA regulation banning the clearing of vegetation needs to be legislated and enforced, and ECA rules extended to limit the collection of Pandanus fruits to a level that sustains the natural regeneration of the plant. Natural regeneration is possible if fruit collection is limited (perhaps to 75% - to be determined) and there is no clearing of Pandanus plants for any purpose - fuelwood or development. Limited fuelwood use is possible if only branches are cut, rather than whole plants removed. Plantation of Pandanus to assist natural regeneration is recommended initially, especially in the most eroded dune areas, and alternative sources of fuelwood are required for those too poor to purchase fuelwood from Teknaf. 4.3.1.3 Management actions • Awareness -raising as per Section 5.3/Annex 13. • Prepare new ECA rules based on existing ECA regulations that apply specifically to Pandanus.

Include restrictions on the collection, sale and purchase of natural Pandanus fruits to 75% of fruits per tree, and limit the use of natural Pandanus for fuelwood or household purposes to branches rather than whole plants.

• Identify the fuelwood needs of the local community, assess the feasibility of establishing an alternative source of fuelwood and, if feasible, establish an alternative fuelwood plantation based on short-rotation species such as Kadam, Shimul and Madar in homestead areas or fallow land.

• Implement a program of assisted regeneration of Pandanus with the assistance of the community, including identification of the most suitable areas for plantation. Select both the most eroded areas and those areas in most danger of erosion, including at least the eastern and western sand dunes of Golachipa.


05/10/2006 76

4.3.1.4 Risks To be inserted by relevant discipline 4.3.2.1 Assessment of mangrove conservation status In 1996, the Dakhin Para and Deearmatha mangrove forests covered 1.6 and two acres respectively (MoEF, 2001a). The top canopy was dominated by Sonneratia apetala and a total of 29 species was recorded of which nine were common. On Cheradia, two small patches of mangrove existed on the small lagoons covering 1.5 and 1 acre respectively, also dominated by S. apetala. Most of the mangrove vegetation, though coppiced, was relatively undisturbed in 1996. Currently only about one hectare of mangrove is remaining - in Dakhin Para. 4.3.2.2 Rationale There is currently no management of factors affecting mangrove at the site. The juvenile mangrove forest existing in 1996 was deemed to have the potential to develop into a fully-fledged forest if properly protected. Its relatively undisturbed nature was attributed to the restrictions imposed on natural wood cutting by the local council head, preferences for wood imported from Teknaf and the conservatism of women in leaving the house for firewood collection or other purposes (MoEF, 2001a). Since then, mangrove has been cleared almost solely to assert land rights and to facilitate the recognition of land ownership. The potential for the mangrove remaining in 2006 to develop if protected is unclear but unlikely as it recently came under private ownership. Measures to protect the remaining mangrove need to be assessed, including the possibility of bringing the area under a voluntary conservation agreement between the land owner and DoE. Assisted regeneration of mangrove is urgently needed at the site. Awareness raising of the local community of the importance, role and function of mangrove, and thus the intention to regenerate mangrove at the site, is necessary. 4.3.2.3 Management actions • Assess the intentions of the landowner that owns the land with the remaining mangrove patch. • If clearing is the intention, raise awareness of the landowner of the unique nature of the

mangrove formation at St Martin’s Island, the importance of mangrove for biodiversity; ECA regulations banning the clearing of vegetation and alteration of habitat, and DoE’s intention to enforce those regulations at the site.

• Discuss with the landowner DoE’s wish to extend the natural mangrove area at Dakhin Para by one hectare and assess the possibility of initiating a voluntary conservation agreement between the landowner and DoE to protect the remaining mangrove patch indefinitely, including compensation to the landowner if necessary.

• If feasible, fence the remaining natural mangrove patch and install signage that explains both the significance of the mangrove, efforts to rehabilitate the mangrove and guidelines for its ongoing protection.

• Prepare new ECA rules based on existing ECA regulations that apply specifically to the remaining mangrove patch at the site and the clearing/alteration of any mangrove that is planted.

• Law enforcement as per Sections 5 and 8. • Plant, as soon as possible, mangrove saplings in areas identified for mangrove plantation at

Dakhin Para (1 ha), Deearmatha (1.5 ha) and Cheradia (1.5 ha) that resemble as closely as possible the species recorded in MoEF (2001a), pp 338-343.

• Establish and manage the core protection zone outlined in Section 3.2 (Table 2) that includes the remaining mangrove patch.


05/10/2006 77

4.3.2.4 Risks To be inserted by relevant discipline 4.3.3.1 Assessment of indigenous onion conservation status While still cultivated, the indigenous onion is at risk of being replaced by other onion varieties that are cheaper and give a higher yield. 4.3.3.2 Rationale This small-bulbed variety of onion is indigenous to the Island and is cultivated nowhere else in Bangladesh. Its yield performance, rela tive cost and the non-availability of quality seed makes it susceptible to replacement by non-indigenous varieties. There is currently no management of factors affecting the decline of this species. Efforts need to be made to ensure the continued survival of this indigenous species and protect it from replacement with other species, including awareness raising, training in cultivation and promoting the species to tourists. While the onion is already a reasonably popular purchase item among tourists, its promotion as indigenous would probably improve sales. The onion represents one aspect of the cultural heritage of the Island and this value should be protected. 4.3.3.3 Management actions • Awareness raising as per Section 5.3/Annex 13. • Identify those farmers who are willing to continue the cultivation of the species if provided

training and assistance in improving the yield of the variety. • Prepare and conduct a training program on production technology to increase the yield and

reduce the relative cost of the species. • Assist farmers cultivating the species to develop and implement a marketing campaign to

promote the species to the local market and other parts of Bangladesh, including to tourists visiting the Island.

4.3.3.4 Risks To be inserted by relevant discipline 4.3.4.1 Assessment of marine algae conservation status The present day populations of marine algal flora are very different from what they were in the 1960s and even 1980s and may be ascribed to the disturbance of the habitat (MoEF, 2001a). The current conservation status of seaweed at the site is unknown, but probably remains the same. 4.3.4.2 Rationale While marine algae grow luxuriously on the undisturbed boulders they are threatened by harvesting, the indiscriminate removal of boulders, the use of seine nets and possibly shore pollution. There is currently no management of factors affecting marine algae at the site. Seaweed harvesting in large quantities by the local community for trading to Myanmar has been reported. It is normally collected from the beach between February and April and is traded in its dry form, measured by weight. In 2001, 20 boatloads of 2-3 metric tons each were traded (Islam, 2001). The local community are aware of the role of seaweed and the impacts of seaweed harvestin g on the beach habitat. During the St Martin’s Pilot Project in 2000-01, traders informed the project that the 2001 season was their last and expressed a desire to be involved with ongoing efforts to manage the site as a “Marine Protected Area” (Islam, 2001). Whether seaweed is presently harvested is unconfirmed. Efforts to conserve seaweed at the site need to build on the existing awareness, and


05/10/2006 78

regulations regarding the harvesting of seaweed need to be explicit. The continuous disturbance of the intertida l rocks, particularly for construction and household use, is also an impediment to the proper growth of marine algae. Both seaweed collection and the disturbance to beach rocks is depriving the Island of the vital role seaweed plays in protecting soil from erosion and in enhancing sedimentation by holding the organic and inorganic components of brackish water during the monsoon. Seaweed is thus very important for improving and protecting beach structure. The ecological role of seaweed is much higher than its very small contribution to livelihoods on the Island. The dragging of seine nets across algal areas also adversely affects algae. The use of seine nets in marine algal community areas needs to be managed. In the north of the Island fish catches are landed and dressed/washed, and the waste subsequently enters the marine waters. The pollution caused as a result of this may also affect marine algae growth. The effects of such pollution of marine algae need to be clarified. The NCSIP-1 Survey of Flora (MoEF, 2001a) recommended assessing the scope for managed extraction of marine algae via bioprospecting. If determined feasible and in line with management preferences for the site, this should be implemented in a way that provides a source of sustainable funding for ECA management. 4.3.4.3 Management actions • Awareness -raising as per Section 5.3/Annex 13. • Determine whether seaweed trading remains a problem at the site and if so, identify those

involved and raise their awareness of the importance of marine algae for both coastal and livelihood protection.

• Determine the impact of pollution as a result of fish dressing/washing on marine algae and managed accordingly.

• Prepare new ECA rules based on existing ECA regulations that apply specifically to marine algae the site. Include at least a ban on the collection of marine algae for commercial trade and restrictions on the collection of marine algae for research; restrictions on the use of seine nets in marine algae areas; and, if necessary, restrictions on pollution related to fish dressing/washing adjacent to marine algae areas.

• Law enforcement as per Sections 5 and 8. • Contain boat docking, harbouring and boat making away from the main marine algae areas. • Establish and manage the protection zones for beach habitat as identified in Section 3.2 (Table

2). • Implement management actions for protecting the rocky intertidal habitat that seaweed depends

on, as outlined in section 4.3.13.3. 4.3.4.4 Risks To be inserted by relevant discipline 4.3.5.1 Assessment of cetacean conservation status The following assessment of cetacean status at the site is based entirely on discussions with M.Z. Islam, 5 July 2006. The diversity and abundance of cetacean species in and around the site is unclear. Of the 10 species recorded in the NSCIP -1 survey, three are doubtful and of the remaining seven species only three have been observed recently (Irrawaddy, Finless and Spinner dolphins). Many Finless porpoises have been recorded. Cetacean species in addition to the Finless Porpoise were recorded in an upper Bay of Bengal survey conducted in 2004 (five species) and in surveys conducted in Myanmar waters close to the Island (four species), all of which may also occur in the


05/10/2006 79

site’s territorial waters. Apparently the population of marine cetaceans in Bangladesh is quite good compared to other regions of the world. 4.3.5.2 Rationale There is currently no management of factors affecting cetacean species at the site. The major factors affecting cetaceans include habitat health and the intensity and type of fishing activity in cetacean habitat. The status of cetacean habitat needs to be improved. Pollution of the marine environment via a number of factors affects the suitability of the marine environment for cetaceans, among others, and its management is covered in Section 4.3.16. Fishing by-catch is the major problem for small cetacean species, particularly from the use of gillnets, set bag nets, seine nets, trawling nets and long lines. The widely-used low-cost drifting gill net used for commercial fishing is responsible for a high proportion of cetacean by-catch and may be the single greatest threat to cetaceans worldwide (M.Z. Islam, pers. comm., 5 July 2006). The small cetaceans generally aren’t strong enough to break free from the nets and come to the surface for air, and thus drown. Despite having a special sympathy for cetaceans, fishermen at the site admit that it is impossible to avoid cetacean by-catch when using strong filament nets to catch target species. Cetacean mortality as a result of by-catch and entanglement apparently occurs in Bangladesh on a scale unheard of in the scientific community (M.Z. Islam, pers. comm., 3rd July 2006). Awareness raising and information dissemination to the general community and authorities is necessary. The use of acoustic devices to divert dolphins from nets should also be considered. All cetacean species should be included in the Bangladesh Wildlife (Preservation) (Amendment) Act, 1974, as currently only some are included. The sound pollution caused by seismic surveys conducted off-shore for oil and gas exploration, and turbidity as a result of (planned) extraction, probably has an adverse effect on cetaceans at/around the site and should be restricted. Likewise the use of engine boats should be regulated. Year-round monitoring is required to determine the actual diversity and abundance of cetaceans in and around the site. Ongoing surveys of species movement and by-catch composition at the site are also necessary for effective management. 4.3.5.3 Management actions • Awareness -raising as per Section 5.3/Annex 13. • Conduct an extensive study on cetacean foraging, habitat use, movement pattern and migratory

corridor at the site, and identify critical near-shore cetacean habitat. • Arrange for the temporary closure or management of areas identified important for seasonal

migration in or out of fishing areas, to be reopened once migration is complete. • Monitor by-catch to identify gear -specific threats in and around the site. • Seek collaboration from fishermen, the Navy and Coastguard in reporting offshore cetacean

observations and mortality, and use this information in awareness raising/training activities. • Assess the feasibility of simple, inexpensive alterations to fishing methods and gear including

attaching acoustic alarms to nets to alert cetaceans to the presence of gear/annoy them into swimming away, attaching weights to the top of nets to allow small cetaceans to swim over the nets and setting nets in deeper water, and incorporate into awareness raising activities.

• Implement an education and training program to reduce by-catch. • Prepare new ECA rules based on existing ECA regulations that apply specifically to cetaceans

in the ECA. Include at least: a seasonal or complete ban on the use of specific fishing gear in


05/10/2006 80

critical cetacean habitat; rules on fishing with gill nets (including limiting mesh size and soak time), long lines and trawl nets; the prohibition of oil and gas exploration and extraction within 20 km of the site; and regulations on the number of engine boats operating at the site.

• Law enforcement as per Sections 5 and 8. • Ensure all cetacean species are included in the Bangladesh Wildlife (Preservation)

(Amendment) Act, 1974. • Implement the ecotourism program for dolphin observation as defined in Section 6. 4.3.5.4 Risks To be inserted by relevant discipline 4.3.6.1 Assessment of marine turtle conservation status Nesting populations were high several decades ago but have declined significantly, and observations of natural hatchling emergence, which were once common, are now reduced to zero. Green turtles were once among the most common species to nest but this no longer seems the case; the local community and fishermen report a decline in the number of nesting females of 70-80% over the last 30 years (Rashid & Islam, 2005). Locals have also reported regular nesting of the Hawksbill turtle during the 1950s, but this has declined dramatically (ibid , 2005). There are no records of turtle nesting prior to 1996; the most recent data on the status of marine turtles at the site are from the St Martin’s Pilot Project (2000-01) and the project’s subsequent phase (2001-04). Under the Pilot Project, Islam (2001) recorded the emergence of 144 Olive Ridley turtles and 21 Green turtles between January 2000 and June 2001, of which those successful in nesting numbered 141 and three respectively. The first Leatherback turtle ever recorded to emerge at the site occurred during the same period, but it did not nest. No Hawksbill Turtles were recorded during this period – the last recorded observation of a Hawksbill turtle was in 1998 (M.Z. Islam, pers. comm., 11 July 2006). In the same period, a total of 74 dead turtles were washed ashore, including 69 Olive Ridleys, three Green turtles, one Hawksbill turtle and one Leatherback. The subsequent phase of the project recorded an increasing number of Olive Ridley nests over the period 2001-2004, with 73, 99 and 102 nests in 2001-02, 2002-03 and 2003-04 respectively, for a total of 274 nests. A decreasing number of Green turtle nests were recorded over the same period, with 22, 19 and 9 nests respectively for a total of 50 nests (M.Z. Islam, pers. comm., 1 August 2006). The many initiatives implementing turtle conservation activities at the site, both past and present, have been responsible for the release into the sea of many turtle hatchlings hatches via the ex-situ conservation of eggs in hatcheries (see Section 3.4.4). A further 42 nests were successfully conserved in -situ in the 2002/2003 nesting season (M.Z. Islam, pers. comm., 30 July 2006). 4.3.6.2 Rationale The marine turtle species occurring in and around the site are globally endangered thus the continued protection of turtle habitat at the site, and other protective measures, are important for the conservation of the species both locally and globally. There are many factors affecting turtle populations at the site and although some measures are in place to manage those factors, these are generally not sustainable. The community are aware of the factors affecting turtles at the site and the measures required for their conservation through the various initiatives that have been taking place since 1996; this awareness needs to be built on and maintained. The main management actions required include the continuation of the in -situ and ex-situ conservation of turtle eggs, control of the stray dog population, protection of the beach and sand dune habitat including the declaration and management of core protection zones for turtle conservation, protection of nests, an extension of ECA regulations to specifically cover turtles at the


05/10/2006 81

site and the enforcement of those rules, the implementation of turtle -friendly fishing practices and management of tourism-related threats. Despite several initiatives for in-situ conservation at the site, the successful hatching of turtles remains almost completely reliant on the relocation of eggs to hatcheries for safe hatching due to predation by dogs and collection by humans. According to Rashid & Islam (2005) only 2-5% of nests survive under natural conditions, and while observations of natural hatchling emergence were once common such observations are now reduced to zero (Islam, 2001). Unless the eggs are relocated to a hatchery for safe hatching they have no chance of hatching as virtually no nest remains undisturbed nowadays. Measures need to be taken to ensure that eggs can safely hatch naturally. In-situ conservation is preferred to ex-situ conservation, as the hatchling rate is greater than 90% for in-situ nests and 60-70% for ex-situ nets (M.Z. Islam, pers. comm., 1 August 2006). In the meantime, the continuation of ex-situ conservation measures via hatcheries for the safe hatching of eggs will remain an important component of the turtle conservation strategy at the site. Predation of turtles and turtle eggs by the stray dog population is common, with dogs continuously roaming the beaches at night for turtles and eggs. In 2000-01 an estimated 200-300 dogs were on the Island, and five turtles were killed by dogs when emerging for nesting during that period. While all nesting sites are affected, the most severely affected is the northern part of the Island where 90% of the dog population is found. The dogs serve no real purpose on the Island, therefore a control program to maintain the dog population at zero should be implemented. A control program was implemented in 2004 but the population has rapidly increased to pre-control levels (M.Z. Islam, pers. comm., 12 July 2006). The St Martin’s Island Project culled 205 dogs in 2005 (A.M. Kamruz Zaman, pers.comm. 29 August 2006). The collection of eggs from nests for sale to neighbouring Myanmar and Bangladeshi hill tribe peoples is ongoing despite many awareness raising efforts. While the poaching of eggs is estimated to have declined by around 60% as a result of support from the local community, the Bangladesh Rifles and the Bangladesh Police (Rashid & Islam, 2005), the theft of eggs is still considered the single greatest threat to the success of in -situ hatching (Islam, 2001). An estimated 90-95% of nests are exploited by humans, with an estimated 12,000 – 18,000 eggs collected annually (Rashid & Islam, 2005). Several very experienced egg collectors exist on the Island who are very good at identifying nests and following weather, lunar and tidal conditions to maximise the outcomes of their efforts. Some collectors have changed their attitude and become important participants in conservation efforts, while others remain very active even to the extent of stealing eggs while being employed in conservation efforts (Islam, 2001). The protection of in-situ nests from theft is extremely important if hatchlings are ever going to hatch naturally at the site. The beach and sand dune nesting habitat of marine turtles at the site is increasingly degraded. The main problem is the construction of a coastal embankment via the piling of loose boulders along a considerable length of the east and west coasts. Degradation of sand dunes and development and increased human activity along the shoreline is also affecting the nesting habitat. The construction of boulder embankments has severely reduced access to nesting sites above the high tide mark and has led to turtles either being unable to nest, or nesting within the tidal area where the eggs are washed out by the tide. Prior to construction of the embankment, nesting was widespread throughout the west of the Island (Islam, 2001); now the turtles either turn back or start digging their nests then find boulders hidden beneath the sandy surface and reattempt to nest elsewhere. During the 2000-01 season a turtle was observed to make six attempts at nesting in a boulder-strewn area, spending between 10-30 minutes per attempt. Totals of up to 195 minutes were observed for nesting when it should normally take 45-65 minutes (ibid , 2001). This is not only tiring and reduced the chances of successful nesting, but also exposes the turtles to the risk of predation for longer than


05/10/2006 82

necessary. The time taken also means that turtles are sometimes unable to return to the sea before the low tide and remain stranded by exposed rocks until the next high tide, again making them more susceptible to predation. The maintenance of rock free areas is required for the continued nesting of marine turtles at the site. Sand dune degradation due to both natural and man made causes needs to be arrested in order to maintain this important nesting habitat. The control of human movement in nesting areas is also required. A core protection zone based on the preferred nesting beaches has been identifie d in Section 3.2 and should be established as soon as possible. While the main Olive Ridley nesting beach has already been proposed a “protected beach” under the Pilot Project no measures have been taken to manage this properly. The CWBMP -identified core t urtle zone has been earmarked for turtle ecotourism, for which a program should be developed and implemented. Current ECA regulations banning the collection or killing of turtles is insufficient to protect turtle populations at the site. The regulations need to be extended to include the protection of turtle eggs from collection. The inclusion of marine turtles in the Wildlife (Preservation) (Amendment) Act (1974) would also facilitate the protection of marine turtles at the site. A revised notification under the Act, which is currently in the final stages, will include marine turtles in the list of protected animals, i.e. Schedule III. Legislation relating to marine turtles, both ECA and non-ECA legislation, needs to be enforced at the site. The threats to turtles at the site as a result of fishing activities include entanglement in nets followed by death either from drowning or from being killed by fishermen who do not understand how, or are unwilling, to release turtles safely from nets; and deliberate or accidental collision with fishing vessels. The implementation of turtle -friendly fishing methods is necessary. The sound pollution caused by seismic surveys conducted off-shore for oil and gas exploration, and turbidity as a result of (planned) extraction, probably has an adverse effect on marine turtles at/around the site and should be restricted. Likewise the use of engine boats should be regulated. Managing tourism-related threats, including disturbance to nesting areas through excess noise, movement and light, can be achieved through the establishment and management of the core protection zones identified in Section 3.2, awareness raising and the restriction of tourism in turtle nesting areas to managed ecotourism, as mentioned above. Further research into the population of the Hawksbill turtle around the Island, and the continuation of tagging and subsequent data collection initiated in 2000, is necessary. An important consideration in the management of marine turtles at the site is for DoE to coordinate all ongoing initiatives under other projects/organisations as per DoE’s mandate of ultimate responsibility for ECA management. Currently, the Marine Fisheries Research Institute (of DoF, Ministry of Fisheries and Livestock) also claims responsibility for the protection and management of marine turtles, which are presently controlled by the Forest Department. Given that considerable revenue is at stake, this may be a contentious issue between the two agencies (Rashid & Islam, 2005). Clear lines of responsibility need to be defined. A volunteer program could be established for turtle conservation in line with similar opportunities offered overseas, where interested people (students, ecotourists etc.) pay to volunteer their time during the nesting season to assist in the management of turtle conservation programs. Participants would have the opportunity to spend time at the site, working with local people to conserve turtles. They can assist with collecting data, monitoring, transferring eggs to hatcheries, observing guided tours, and tagging and measuring turtles (if this type of survey is re-established at the site). Funds


05/10/2006 83

raised this way contribute to the ongoing management of the activity and also provide labour for monitoring and other activities. 4.3.6.3 Management actions • Awareness -raising as per Section 5.3/Annex 13. • Prepare new ECA rules based on existing ECA regulations that apply specifically to turtle

conservation at the site. Include at least: a ban on the collection, sale and purchase of turtle eggs; rules regarding the control of stray dogs; restrictions on fishing gear operated adjacent to turtle nesting areas during the nesting season, especially within core protection zones; a ban on the use of shrimp/fish trawl nets not equipped with a turtle excluder devices (TED) in the Bay of Bengal; rules defining a no fishing zone along the nesting beaches during the nesting season; the prohibition of oil and gas exploration and extraction within 20 km of the site; and regulations on the number of engine boats operating at the site.

• Law enforcement as per Section 5 and 8. • Conduct a study of the population on Hawksbill turtles around the Island. • Re-establish the tagging and subsequent data collection initiative that was started in 2000. • Ensure cur rent revisions to include marine turtles in the Wildlife (Preservation) (Amendment)

Act, 1974 are enacted as part of the Government’s commitment to several international conventions.

• Facilitate discussions at Ministry level between the MoEF and Ministry of Fisheries and Livestock to ensure clear lines of responsibility and intersectoral cooperation and collaboration with respect to the conservation of marine turtles.

• Stabilise sand dunes as outlined in Section 4.3.14.3, including the plantation of Ipomea, Vitex and Pandanus; ensure all species planted for sand dune stabilisation are native, original species.

• Establish and manage the core protection zones for turtles as outlined in Section 3.2 (Table 2) as soon as possible.

• Implement tourism management actions addressing the threats of tourism on marine turtles as outlined in Section 6.

• Clear pathways several metres wide through existing artificial boulder embankments at main emerging points to enable turtles to access nesting areas, following observation of turtle emergence attempts at least at Jadirbill, Kona Para and Borobil.

• Develop and implement a set of guidelines on the use of lighting during turtle nesting seasons for all existing shore-based developments, including modifications to existing lights where necessary.

• Implement and maintain a stray dog control program, maintaining the dog population in core protection areas to zero.

• Continue the ex-situ and in-situ protection of turtle eggs as currently implemented each season under various initiatives, including the coordination by DoE of all initiatives operating at the site as per the DoE mandate of ECA management responsibility.

• Implement turtle-friendly fishing practices at the site including the safe release of turtles from nets and seasonal and geographic restrictions on the use of certain types of gear.

• Implement a system for the accurate identification of trapped turtles by fishermen as part of the monitoring program, including laminated good-quality colour photographs of the five species known to use the waters, and a description of defining features.

• Implement the ecotourism program for turtle observation as outlined in Section 6. • Assess the feasibility of establishing a volunteer program for turtle conservation in line with

similar opportunities offered overseas – contact www.seaturtlescapeyork.com and others for information in setting up the program.

• Initiate the use of TEDs in shrimp/fish trawling nets among shrimp trawl owners and operators.


05/10/2006 84

4.3.6.4 Risks To be inserted by relevant discipline 4.3.7.1 Assessment of bird conservation status Shore bird surveys conducted over the eight years 1997-2004 for two to three days each in the winter have shown a decline in both bird species diversity and abundance (M.Z. Islam, pers. comm., 5 August 2006). A count of 3062 individuals in 1997 declined dramatically to only 356 individuals in 2004, a decrease of 88%. The mean number of species recorded for the period was 19.6, with a minimum of 17 and a maximum of 23, of which only one species showed an increase in abundance over the period (of one) and the remaining showed a decrease in abundance. The decline in gulls, terns, plovers, herons, egrets, snipes, curlews etc., can be attributed to the loss of wilderness and expansion of agriculture and human habitation. On the other hand, the population of terrestrial birds associated with human habitation, including the common mynah, pied mynah, blue rock pigeon, black drongo, sunbird, sparrow and house crow, has increased. In terms of diversity, 107 species of the total 120 species recorded from the Island up to 1997 (MoEF, 2001b), were recorded during ongoing surveys over the 18-month period 2000-01, including both threatened species: the Grey-headed lapwing and Black-bellied tern (Islam, 2001). 4.3.7.2 Rationale There is currently little management of factors affecting bird species at the site. The protection of beach, sand dune, lagoon and mangrove habitat and the control of native bird hunting and trapping are the main management actions required. The main migratory season coincides with the peak tourist season at the Island, during which time large areas of preferred habitat are inundated with tourists. A decrease in vegetation for nesting in the 1990s has been reversed somewhat by the protection of forest in Dakhin Para by the local community, resulting in an increase in vegetation and the bird population there (MoEF, 2001b), however this is insufficient. Several of the core protection zones identified will protect bird habitat, some of which will function as bird watching sites for which a bird watching ecotourism program should be developed and implemented. Children use sling shots to kill birds for fun and at least one individual on the Island enjoys killing birds with an air gun. The hunting of larger birds for food such as the ruddy shell duck is not uncommon. ECA regulations banning the catching, collecting and killing of wildlife need to be legislated and enforced. The non-judicious use of pesticides also affects bid habitat and needs to be managed via awareness raising, including of integrated pest management (IPM). The highly pathogenic avian influenza (HPAI) H5N1 virus is not currently a threat to birds at the site but the site lies on important migratory flyways and wild birds are known to have contributed to the introduction of the HPAI H5N1 virus to new geographical locations world wide (FAO/OIE, 2006). Thus it is important that management remains vigilant of this threat to bird biodiversity at the site, and collaborates with the Ministry of Fisheries and Livestock (MoFL) - the government body charged with monitoring HPAI H5N1 in Bangladesh. The potential for benefiting from the experiences and accomplishments of the Global Rinderpest Eradication Programme (GREP) in working with transboundary animal diseases should also be assessed, especially in regard to country cluster cooperative direction, the use of existing specialised organisations and the establishment of regional networks.


05/10/2006 85

4.3.7.3 Management actions • Awareness -raising as per Section 5.3/Annex 13. • Prepare new ECA rules based on existing ECA regulations that apply specifically to native birds

at the site. Include at least a ban on the hunting and trapping of native birds; the right of DoE to confiscate air guns and sling shots; and rules regarding the control of house crows and other alien predatory bird species.

• Law enforcement as per Sections 5 and 8. • Identify requirements for, and establish, habitat restoration not already covered in other sections

of this plan. • Establish and manage the core protection zones outlined in Section 3.2 (Table 2) that relate to

bird habitat. • Implement the ecotourism program for bird watching as outlined in Section 6. • Introduce IPM methods for farming, including the judicious use of pesticides. • Assess the feasibility of establishing voluntary conservation agreements between DoE and

landowners owning land with significant bird habitat, and if feasible establish agreements where applicable to improve and/or preserve bird habitat.

• Establish a control program with the local community to eliminate house crows and other alien predatory bird species from the Island, including a waste management system for garbage and restaurant waste that discourages habitation by the house crow.

• Monitor interactions between wild birds and domestic bird species at the site; incorporate sampling of live and dead birds for HPAI H5N1 in the monitoring program outlined in Section 4.2.7.3; collaborate with the MoFL to share any data relevant to HPAI H5N1 disease outbreaks, spread and transmission; assess the potential for collaboration with the GREP; and ensure any government decisions to eliminate wild birds or their habitat within the site as a result of Avian influenza fears are opposed.

4.3.7.4 Risks To be inserted by relevant discipline

4.3.8.1 Assessment of coral-associated fish conservation status There is insufficient data to make an accurate assessment of the conservation status of coral-associated fishes at the site, as information for both species composition and abundance is lacking. Fishermen reported in 2001 that the catch per unit of effort for fishing at the site had declined compared to a decade ago (Islam, 2001), which is perhaps a result of the increase in the number of fishing boats by 50-60% during the same period. However, in 2001 coral-associated fishes were not well represented in the daily catches and it was thought that these fish species were not overexploited (ibid, 2001). 4.3.8.2 Rationale The site includes Bangladesh’s only coral community and is thus unique in Bangladesh for coral-associated fishes. There is currently no management of factors affecting coral-associated fishes. The main threat is the loss of coral habitat, for which management actions are outlined in the following section (Section 4.3.9.3). While other threats to coral-associated fishes are currently relatively minimal it is important to implement management actions to contain those threats at their presently low levels. An important element of the management of coral-associated fishes at the site is the conduct of a full fish survey by an experienced fish taxonomist, as recommended by NSCIP-1 (MoEF, 2001b).


05/10/2006 86

The main fishing practices at the site include large-meshed bottom-set gill nets (Sheel jal) and hook and line (Borshi) - which are operated nightly in winter to catch snapper, grouper and cat fish but which also involve coral-associated fish by-catch - and monofilament gill nets (Rok jal) and beach seine (Tana jal), which are used mainly to catch small-sized juveniles and sub-adults of mixed species. The large-meshed bottom-set gill net is in general an environmentally-friendly fishing method but has become less popular because fishermen want quicker returns. The sound pollution caused by seismic surveys conducted off-shore for oil and gas exploration, and turbidity as a result of (planned) extraction, probably has an adverse effect on fishes at the site and should be restricted. Likewise the use of engine boats should be regulated. Awareness raising of the importance of the Island’s coral-associated fishes both globally and nationally is very important, as is the implementation of fishing practices that minimise the risk to coral-associated fishes and the extension of ECA regulations to specifically protect coral-associated fishes. The management of coral-associated fishes is poorly represented in existing fisheries policy and legislation and should also be reviewed and updated. If established and managed properly, the core coral protection zone identified in Section 3.2 (Table 2) will go a long way to protecting coral-associated fishes. 4.3.8.3 Management actions • Awareness -raising as per Section 5.3/Annex 13. • Conduct an extensive survey of fish fauna at the site using an experienced fish taxonomist,

including present status, stock size, seasonal abundance and dependent populations/ communities.

• Prepare new ECA rules based on existing ECA regulations that apply specifically to coral-associated fishes in the ECA. Include at least: a ban on the harvesting of juvenile and sub-adult coral fish; a breeding season ban on the use of specific fishing gear (mainly fine-meshed seine nets that collect juveniles) in coral community areas; restrictions on fishing during intensive fish breeding seasons; rules on fishing with gill nets (including limiting mesh size); a ban on the collection, sale and purchase of ornamental fishes; the prohibition of oil and gas exploration and extraction within 20 km of the site; and regulations on the number of engine boats operating at the site.

• Law enforcement as per Sections 5 and 8. • Encourage a return to the large-meshed bottom-set gill net for long-term sustainability of fish

resources. • Review existing fisheries policy and legislation and make recommendations to government for

the specific inclusion of coral-associated fishes in policy and legislation that recognises their importance and supports their conservation.

• Protect coral habitat as outlined in Section 4.3.9.3 below. 4.3.8.4 Risks To be inserted by relevant discipline 4.3.9.1 Assessment of coral conservation status The most recent data on coral at the site is from a 1997 survey, which estimated that 30,000 coral colonies are removed annually, representing 24% of the existing population then. Coral removal has continued unabated since thus we can reasonably assume that the current status of coral at the site is very poor.


05/10/2006 87

4.3.9.2 Rationale The coral communities at the Island are highly significant as there are only a few examples worldwide where coral communities dominate rock reefs as they do at the Island. The coral colonies are affected by many factors, both natural and anthropogenic. According to Tomascik (1997), the natural environmental conditions around the site are marginal for the development and survival of coral communities, which places even more importance on the management of factors affecting coral that are within our control. Natural factors include low salinity, high turbidity (affecting light availability), substrate disturbance as a result of heavy seas, high nutrient concentrations, the effects of circulation and tides, cyclonic storms, possible effect of earthquakes on the unstable (boulder) substrate of the site and relative sea levels (as a result of ongoing uplift). Anthropogenic factors affect coral at the site both directly (e.g. collection, anchoring) and indirectly by exacerbating natural factors. The conservation of coral at the site requires minimisation of the effect of anthropogenic factors on the already limiting natural factors, and management of direct anthropogenic factors. As the anthropogenic factors affecting natural factors are mainly related to marine water parameters, these are covered in section 4.3.16 (Marine habitat). Direct anthropogenic factors have a huge impact on coral at the site. There is currently very little/no management of these factors and unless these are controlled the present low coral coverage at the site will be further significantly reduced, also reducing coral-associated species. The main management actions required to protect coral at the site include the enforcement of ECA regulations regarding the removal of coral, the establishment and management of a core coral protection zone, managing marine water parameters, introducing and enforcing coral-friendly fishing practices, the control of indiscriminate boat anchoring, control of boulder removal/displacement and management of tourism, including indiscriminate (albeit small scale) scuba diving/snorkelling in coral areas. ECA regulations banning the removal of coral are neither legislated nor enforced. While no curio shops selling coral continued to operate at the site once the Pilot Project started in 2000, tourists were observed in the 2005/2006 winter peak tourist season purchasing coral from various stalls selling drinks and snacks, and directly from the beach, both near the Abakash Hotel and at Cheradia. The smuggling of coral from the site to tourist markets in the popular tourist centre of Cox’s Bazar and the large centres of Chittagong and Dhaka operates on a large scale with the assistance of law enforcers. In the four month period January to April 2001 alone, almost 10,000 pieces of coral were discovered during the interception of smuggling activities (Islam, 2001). The actual figure would be much higher as not all activities were intercepted. In most or all incidences, the local police and UP personnel were either directly or indirectly involved in the smuggling (Islam, 2001). Merchants from Teknaf, Cox’s Bazar and even Myanmar are involved in the racket, and pay large sums to the collectors in advance. The racket was and remains well-organised; ‘minders’ were paid to both protect the merchants from, and threaten, Pilot Project personnel during 2000-01 (Islam, 2001). Unless a concerted effort is made to properly enforce law regarding the removal of coral, there is little chance for the sustainability of coral at the Island. A demand-side awareness-raising program implemented simultaneously with supply-side controls is absolutely necessary as without demand there is no reason for supply. This requires raising the awareness of tourists both at the Island and Cox’s Bazar of the susceptible nature of coral in Bangladesh and an extension of ECA rules to include a ban on the purchase of coral anywhere in Bangladesh. Boulder removal and displacement adversely affects coral as the boulders are the substrate upon which corals have colonised at the site. The use of artificial reefs to facilitate coral colonisation may be considered as an alternative substrate, but in general the Island does not suffer from a lack of


05/10/2006 88

suitable susbstrate. The use of rock-weighted gill nets over inshore boulder reefs adversely affects coral beds. Coral-friendly fishing techniques need to be introduced at the site. The indiscriminate anchoring of boats in coral areas has a similar effect in damaging the coral. A system of management of boat anchoring, both through no anchoring zones and the provision of permanent anchoring buoys, is required. Coral-related tourism management is also necessary. Large numbers of tourists walk over intertidal rocky areas to view marine fishes, coral, molluscs, echinoderms and other marine invertebrates, adversely affecting both the habitat and species. Unregulated scuba diving and snorkelling to view cor al also occurs at the Island, but on a very small scale. The establishment and management of the core coral protection zone as outlined in Section 3.2 needs to occur as soon as possible. If properly enforced, the restrictions identified for the zone will reverse the effects within that zone of most factors affecting coral at the site. A coral appreciation program should be developed and implemented as part of ecotourism initiatives. 4.3.9.3 Management actions • Awareness -raising as per Section 5.3/Annex 13. • Extend current ECA regulations to include a ban on the sale and purchase of coral; the right of

DoE to close businesses selling coral and arrest any persons directly or indirectly involved in the sale/purchase and smuggling of coral; a ban on anchoring in any coral area; a ban on the removal or displacement of boulders for any purpose; and a ban on the use of rock-weighted gill nets over coral areas.

• Law enforcement as per Section 5 and 8. • Prepare a code of conduct for snorkelling and scuba diving in coral areas (Section 6). • Determine the requirements for mooring buoys at popular harbouring areas, taking into

consideration restrictions that will be applicable under zones established by CWBMP/DoE, and install the buoys. Include at least the east coast (Purba Para, near the jetty), the west coast (Kona Para) and Holabonia. Only a very limited number of buoys should be established in the Cheradia core coral protection zone, in line with activities in that zone being restricted to management and limited research only.

• Assess the necessity for, and feasibility of, establishing artificial reefs to facilitate coral growth. • Establish and manage the core coral protection zone as outlined in Section 3.2. • Management of tourism-related effects as outlined in Section 6. • Initiate the coral appreciation ecotourism program in buffer zone 3, as outlined in Section 6. • Manage marine water quality as outlined in Section 4.3.16. • Organise an annual “reef clean” program with local divers, open to a restricted number of

interested tourists; source funding from international organisation(s) that support annual reef cleans worldwide.

4.3.9.4 Risks To be inserted by relevant discipline 4.3.10.1 Assessment of crustacean conservation status While there is no data on which to base an assessment of the conservation status of crabs and lobsters at the site, but it is known that species of both are harvested at the site and caught as by-catch. 4.3.10.2 Rationale There is currently no management of factors affecting lobsters and crabs at the site. While Muslims in general do not eat crab, crabs and lobsters are harvested for their high market value both


05/10/2006 89

nationally and internationally. Both are harvested via gill nets and seine nets and are sent to Cox’s Bazar and other towns on ice for sale where they are ultimately consumed locally or exported. The site provides the only habitat in the country for spiny lobsters. The main threats to lobsters are the accidental collection of juveniles in small-meshed monofilament gill nets and bottom-set gill nets, and coral habitat destruction. The collection of juveniles is particularly dangerous given the long life cycle of lobsters. Lobsters and crabs are also caught and dried for sale as souvenirs in local curio markets. A factor affecting red crabs is predation by stray dogs. In addition, the sound pollution caused by seismic surveys conducted off -shore for oil and gas exploration, and turbidity as a result of (planned) extraction, probably also has an adverse effect on crustaceans at the site and should be restricted. Likewise the use of engine boats should be regulated. Management actions required include awareness raising regarding the sustainable harvesting of crabs and lobsters; an extension to ECA rules banning the collection of wildlife to include the use of crab and lobster shells in curio items; and alterations to gear to minimise the collection of juveniles; the management of spiny lobster (coral) habitat and control of stray dogs. 4.3.10.3 Management actions • Awareness -raising as per Section 5.3/Annex 13. • Protect lobster habitat (coral communities and marine habitat) as outlined in Sections 4.3.9 and

4.3.16. • Prepare new ECA rules based on existing ECA regulations that apply specifically to crab and

lobster species at the site. Include at least: a ban on the collection, sale or purchase of crustacean species for curio businesses; rules regulating the harvesting of crabs and lobsters including a ban on the collection of brood and juvenile crabs and lobsters, the use of appropriate harvesting gear and a ban on harvesting of crabs in the intensive breeding season (June -July); rules regarding the control of stray dogs; the prohibition of oil and gas exploration and extraction within 20 km of the site; and regulations on the number of engine boats operating at the site.

• Law enforcement as per Sections 5 and 8. • Introduce proper (improved) fishing gear - lobster pots/traps with specific ‘escape routes’ for

undersized lobsters – and for use outside the core coral protection zone only. • Encourage responsible harvesting practices including the release of juvenile/brood stock crabs

and lobsters trapped in gill nets. • Assess the feasibility of establishing a sustainable harvesting system for commercially

important crustacean species. • Control stray dog populations at the site, as outlined in Section 4.3.6. 4.3.10.4 Risks To be inserted by relevant discipline 4.3.11.1 Assessment of mollusc conservation status There is no information on which to base an assessment of the status of molluscs at the site, but it is known that mollusc shells are widely collected in large quantities from the beaches. 4.3.11.2 Rationale There is currently no management of factors affecting mollusc species at the site. Molluscs are important, among other reasons, as water purifiers, sand builders and a food source. Shells are collected in large quantities by the local community for lime production and sale as curios. Tourists purchase shells and also collect shells themselves. Boulder removal and disturbance adversely


05/10/2006 90

affects mollusc habitat, as does indiscriminate fishing boat harbouring/docking. The main management actions required to conserve mollusc biodiversity are awareness-raising, the extension of ECA regulations to specifically include mollusc shells and enforcement of legislation. The sound pollution caused by seismic surveys conducted off-shore for oil and gas exploration, and turbidity as a result of (planned) extraction, probably has an adverse effect on molluscs at the site and should be restricted. Likewise the use of engine boats should be regulated. 4.3.11.3 Management actions • Awareness -raising as per Section 5.3/Annex 13. • Prepare new ECA rules based on existing ECA regulations that apply specifically to mollusc

species and habitat at the site. Include at least a total ban on the collection, sale or purchase of any mollusc species for curio business; a ban on the removal/displacement of boulders; the prohibition of oil and gas exploration and extraction within 20 km of the site; and regulations on the number of engine boats operating at the site.

• Law enforcement as per Sections 5 and 8. • Close down shell markets in St Martin’s Island, Cox’s Bazar, Chittagong and Dhaka. • Establish the core protection zones as outlined in Section 3.2 (Table 1) that include restrictions

on boat harbouring, boulder removal/disturbance and protection of shorelines. 4.3.11.4 Risks To be inserted by relevant discipline 4.3.12.1 Assessment of echinoderm conservation status The sea cucumber (Holothuria atra) occurs in very low numbers due to over-exploitation (Islam, 2001). There is no data on which to base an assessment of sea stars and sea urchins but it is known that sea stars are rarely seen at the Island anymore and urchins are heavily harvested. 4.3.12.2 Rationale There is currently no manageme nt of factors affecting sea cucumbers, sea stars and sea urchins. The habitat for these echinoderms is adversely affected by the removal of boulders for household work and construction, the disturbance of boulders during shell collection and fishing, fishing boat harbouring and tourist movement in the rocky intertidal areas. Marine water quality also affects echinoderm habitat. Managing the echinoderm habitats (rocky intertidal areas and marine habitat) will go some way to conserving these species, however the species face other threats as well that need to be managed. Sea urchins are collected for sale to curio traders/tourists and are also collected by tourists themselves. They are also collected for research purposes. There is a lack of awareness among some about sea cucumbers – some think it is a type of giant leech and kill them (Islam, 2001). The sound pollution caused by seismic surveys conducted off-shore for oil and gas exploration, and turbidity as a result of (planned) extraction, probably has an adverse effect on echinoderms at the site and should be restricted. Likewise the use of engine boats should be regulated. Apart from habitat protection via zoning and other measures, the main management actions required are awareness raising, extension of ECA regulations to include rules specific for sea urchin collection and the killing of sea cucumbers.


05/10/2006 91

4.3.12.3 Management actions • Awareness -raising as per Section 5.3/Annex 13. • Prepare new ECA rules based on existing ECA regulations that apply specifically these

echinoderm species at the site. Include at least: a ban on killing sea cucumbers; a ban on the collection of sea urchins for any purpose; restrictions on the collection of species for research purposes; the prohibition of oil and gas exploration and extraction within 20 km of the site; and regulations on the number of engine boats operating at the site.

• Law enforcement as per Sections 5 and 8. • Protection of rocky intertidal habitat as outlined in Section 4.3.13. • Establishment of zones that include restrictions on fish boat docking as per Section 3.2. • Protection of marine habitat as outlined in Section 4.3.16. • Encourage the return of all species caught in nets back to the water rather than discarding them

on the beach. 4.3.12.4 Risks To be inserted by relevant discipline 4.3.13.1 Assessment of rocky intertidal habitat conservation status While the extent of damage to the rocky intertidal habitat has not been determined, it is deteriorating due to human intervention. 4.3.13.2 Rationale There is currently no management of factors affecting the rocky intertidal habitat. The rocky intertidal habitat, which extends around most of the Island, is important for the continued existence of a large variety of marine biodiversity including molluscs, echinoderms and fish. The habitat is becoming degraded through pollution, tourist and other movement, boulder removal and displacement and mollusc and echinoderm collection. Pollution occurs as a result of solid waste disposal by tourists and households, agricultural run-off and the disposal of sewerage directly into the marine environment. Due to its location in the intertidal area, this habitat is the first to receive any runoff from the land. Implementation of management actions outlined for the marine habitat (Section 4.3.16) will minimise the effect of pollution on the rocky intertidal habitat. Tourists clamber all over the rocky intertidal areas, treading on and collecting the species residing there. Fishermen do the same, as do shell and sea urchin collectors. Boulders are removed from the area in large quantities for creating rock-free boat harbours, construction and other purposes and are displaced by fishermen and shell collectors during their activities, both of which affect the microhabitats provided by the boulders. Mollusc and echinoderm collection adversely affects the diversity and abundance of species utilising the habitat. The main management actions required include awareness raising of the importance and fragility of the zone, the extension of ECA rules to specifically ban the removal or displacement of boulders and the collection of echinoderms, and the management of human movement in rocky intertidal areas, including tourism management, via zoning.


05/10/2006 92

4.3.13.3 Management actions • Awareness -raising as per Section 5.3/Annex 13. • Prepare new ECA rules based on existing ECA regulations that apply specifically to rock

intertidal habitat in the ECA. Include at least: a ban on the removal and displacement of boulders from the rocky intertidal zone for any purpose; a ban on the removal of mollusc and echinoderm species; a ban on human movement in the rocky intertidal zone outside general use zones, except on established walkways (to be developed under the ecotourism plan, Section 6).

• Law enforcement as per Sections 5 and 8. • Ensure human movement over rocky intertidal areas within core protection areas is only via

established (raised) walkways; for rocky intertidal areas within buffer and general use zones encourage the local community and tourists to limit their movement to upper shore areas keeping the lower intertidal area as free of human movement as possible.

• Implement the zoning system identified in Section 3.2, including limiting the areas where fishing can be conducted in rocky intertidal areas, and where local fishing boats can harbour (at present boulder free zones).

• Manage marine water quality as outlined in Section 4.3.16. 4.3.13.4 Risks To be inserted by relevant discipline 4.3.14.1 Assessment of sand dune and beach conservation status The sand dunes at the site were much better developed and higher during the 1980s (M.Z. Islam, pers. comm., 16 July 2006). The dunes are in an increasingly degraded state, with those of the north western part of the Island at Kona Para, Golachera, severely eroded. Along with the degradation of sand dunes is the depletion of associated dune flora. A small area of sand dune was observed to form naturally at the northern end of the western beach in 1997-98. The beach areas at the south of the Island are relatively undisturbed and in good condition, except where the establishment of boulder embankments have changed the natural characteristics of the beach. At the north of the Island the beach is degraded seasonally through heavy use but recovers annually after the rainy season. A section of beach at the north-east was heavily eroded, perhaps irreversibly, in 1997 as a result of tidal surges during a cyclone. 4.3.14.2 Rationale The continued health of the sand dunes and beach is very important for the protection of inhabitants from predicted sea level rises (which the site is particularly susceptible to) and habitat for globally significant species of turtle and birds. The dunes act as a filter for rainwater and groundwater, and are important for the continued natural cha racter of the site, particularly of the beach. They also prevent sand being blown inland by winds. The necessity for stabilising sand dunes in the coastal ECA sites was outlined in the CWBMP ProDoc (GoB/GEF/UNDP, 1999), with a goal of protecting a total of 5000 ha of sand dune habitat across all three coastal ECAs, including St Martin’s Island ECA. There is currently little management of factors affecting the sand dune habitat. Winter winds and tidal forces accelerate the erosion of dunes that have had vegetation removed. Natural regeneration is possible if current factors affecting the health of the dunes, including infrastructure development, the clearing of dunes and dune vegetation adjacent to hotel areas, the collection of dune vegetation for fuelwood and pedestrian traffic are controlled.


05/10/2006 93

The cutting and collection of vegetation and the alteration of habitat for flora and fauna within ECAs is banned under ECA regulations and this ban needs to be legislated and enforced at the site, particularly for those establishing hotels. The development of infrastructure within the dune system, and even clearing of dunes adjacent to hotel areas, needs to be controlled. The plantation of dune vegetation species (Pandanus) in the areas most affected is necessary to complement natural regeneration efforts. The St Martin’s Island Project planted the equivalent of 11 km of Pandanus along the coastline (A.M.Kamruz Zaman, pers.comm. 29 August 2006). The implementation of management actions for the conservation of Pandanu s as outlined in Section 4.3.1 will facilitate sand dune stabilisation as it is the major dune plant. Pedestrian traffic over the dunes needs to be managed via the establishment of permanent pathways. Several core protection zones that meet the needs of the dune habitat and its dependent species have been identified and should be established as soon as possible. Awareness raising of the importance of viable sand dune habitat for livelihood protection and the protection of turtle and bird species needs to be an important part of the strategy for the maintenance of dunes. 4.3.14.3 Management actions • Awareness -raising as per Section 5.3/Annex 13. • Prepare new ECA rules based on existing ECA regulations that apply specifically to dune

habitat. Include at least: a ban on infrastructure development within 15-20 metres of the dune system (to be clarified); a ban on the clearing of dune vegetation for any purpose; a ban on the clearing of dunes for any purpose.

• Law enforcement as per Sections 5 and 8. • Determine and map the location and extent of infrastructure development, pedestrian traffic and

vegetation clearing in dune areas, and rank dune areas in most urgent need of stabilisation. • Identify dune areas appropriate for in -situ conservation of dune vegetation and manage those

areas as demonstration plots, with fencing if necessary, and interpretive signage explaining the role of dune vegetation, the importance of healthy dune systems and the objective for the plot.

• Identify dune areas requiring assisted vegetation regeneration; plant appropriate dune vegetation species and manage those areas as demonstration plots as described above. Include at least the eastern and western sand dunes of Golpachipa.

• Assess the areas most suitable for Pandanus for enhanced protection from cyclones and tidal surges as per Section 4.3.1, ensuring that turtle nesting areas are excluded, and establish plantations where practical/suitable.

• Implement the management actions outlined in Section 4.3.1 for Pandanus conservation. • Identify the most appropriate access routes for pedestrian traffic through the dunes; establish

permanent pathways to the beaches along those routes; fence dune areas along the access routes to provide protection from pedestrians; provide signage that directs people to beach access routes (both from the beach and from the roads/villages); and provide interpretive signage along those routes explaining the role of the pathways and the importance of a healthy dune system for livelihoods and habitat protection. The pathways should be constructed of wooden slats chained loosely together as is commonly used in dune systems worldwide to minimise the damage to dunes.

• Organise an annual “beach clean” program with the local community; source funding from international organisation( s) that support annual beach cleans worldwide.

• Establish the identified beach core protection zones as outlined in Section 3.2 (Table 2). • Establish zones for fishing boating mooring as outlined in Section 3.2 (Table 2).


05/10/2006 94

4.3.14.4 Risks To be inserted by relevant discipline 4.3.15.1 Assessment of rocky land habitat conservation status The whole Island was once a rocky land habitat but has gradually been altered through the removal of rocks and boulders for agriculture. Now only about 100 ha of rocky habitat is remaining. 4.3.15.2 Rationale There is currently no management of factors affecting the rocky land habitat at the site. The habitat is significant in that it is not present elsewhere in Bangladesh (M.Z. Islam, pers. comm., 5 July 2006). This 100 ha area is the last remaining rocky area at the site and has not yet been cleared, probably as the boulders are too large for removal. However, the removal of rocks to improve the land for cultivation is ongoing. The area needs to be protected from further conve rsion to cultivation, but this may prove difficult as the entire rocky land habitat is privately owned. The feasibility of establishing voluntary conservation agreements should be assessed, particularly among adjacent landowners, which would increase the total continuous area under protection. Another factor is the trend in selling land to outsiders, who usually have less respect for the land than locals do. Incentives to both conserve the land and not sell the land need to be assessed. If protected, the area can regenerate naturally. A small amount of revegetation of degraded areas would complement the natural regeneration process. 4.3.15.3 Management actions • Awareness -raising as per Section 5.3/Annex 13. • Arrange for the designation of the area as a unique geological area of Bangladesh. • Prepare new ECA rules based on existing ECA regulations that apply specifically to the

alteration of the rocky land habitat. Include at least: a ban on the removal of any more rocks/boulders from the rocky land south of Dakhin Para; a ban on the conversion of rocky land to cultivation; a ban on the development of infrastructure on the rocky land habitat, except for an elevated walkway over the area for ecotourism purposes; and a ban on any further human settlement in the area.

• Law enforcement as per Sections 5 and 8. • Assess the feasibility of voluntary conservation agreements between the DoE and landowners

owning land within the rocky land area, including compensatory measures. • Revegetate degraded area of the rocky habitat with Pandanus, Streblus asper and other naturally

occurring species. • Establish the identified rocky land core protection zone as outlined in Section 3.2 (Table 2). • Initiate the ecotourism activity identified for the zone in collaboration with the landowne rs, as

outlined in Section 6 4.3.15.4 Risks To be inserted by relevant discipline 4.3.16.1 Assessment of marine habitat conservation status A 2006 study of aquatic pollution at St Martin’s Island conducted by Dr. M.M. Maruf Hossain will be available shor tly from the MoEF’s Conservation of Biodiversity, Marine Park Establishment and Ecotourism Development Project at St Martin’s Island. Apart from that report, no actual data exists on which to base an assessment of marine habitat at the site, however the marine waters are presumed to be affected by several factors. Tomascik (1997) recommended a year-long assessment


05/10/2006 95

of marine water parameters to understand the status of marine water at the site over all seasons (rainy and dry). 4.3.16.2 Rationale The quality of the marine habitat at the site affects a large proportion of all species, communities and habitats described above including fishes, coral communities and coral-associated species, marine invertebrates, marine algae, marine turtles and cetaceans. The marine environment is affected by both natural and anthropogenic factors, some of which also exacerbate natural factors. The management of anthropogenic effects on natural factors affecting the marine environment includes minimising impacts on turbidity and nutrient concentrations. This includes minimising suspended particulate matter concentrations and dissolved organic compounds (turbidity) nutrient concentrations) as a result of sewerage pollution, domestic and agricultural runoff, deforestation and urbanisation. A one year monitoring program to collect baseline data on environmental conditions during a full year cycle should be conducted to determine these parameters. The unsustainable development of tourism at the site, which is currently beyond the carrying capacity of the Island given the lack of basic services including any effective sewerage system, is generating a huge amount of waste. One hotel is already draining its sewerage directly into sea. Solid waste is discarded into marine waters at the site by tourists and the local community alike and into waters surrounding the Island by tourists travelling to and from the site by boat. Boat operators are continually scooping and throwing overboard oily water that accumulates in the holds of poorly maintained boats. Marine water quality is very important for the ongoing health of marine biodiversity, particularly the coral communities, thus measures to prevent oil spillage, solid waste and sewerage disposal into the marine environment are necessary. Awareness raising, enforcement of restrictions regarding littering, regulations regarding sewerage disposal and waste management, and zoning for oily water disposal are required. 4.3.16.3 Management actions • Awareness raising as per Section 5.3/Annex 13. • Restrict the draining of oily water from boats to the general use zone only, as identified in

Section 3.2. • Establish a system on tourist vessels for preventing the throwing of rubbish overboard,

including awareness raising of the impact on the marine environment and an announcement at the start of each journey that the practice is prohibited and punishable.

• Assess the feasibility of different systems of sustainable sewerage management at the Island that are not based on marine sewerage discharge and do not affect groundwater; determine regulations around sewerage management based on the feasibility assessment and implement the regulations.

• Establish a waste management system for domestic and public waste. • Extend ECA regulations to ensure all future development activities submit a detailed EIA that

includes the consideration of nutrient loading as a parameter. 4.3.16.4 Risks To be inserted by relevant discipline


05/10/2006 96

4.3.17.1 Assessment of mudflat habitat conservation status The small area of mudflat is generally in its natural condition. 4.3.17.2 Rationale While there are no currently no factors affecting the mudflat area at the site, the mudflat is under private ownership and faces the threat of alteration in the future, e.g. for hotel construction/shrimp farming, as has been the custom in other areas of Bangladesh. The mudflat is the only example of its kind on the whole Island and is important for a variety of species. It is an important bird feeding ground as its dependent invertebrate species supply a food source for birds. In the face of contraction of bird habitat at the site due to high levels of human activity in the preferred roosting areas in the north of the Island, the mudflat area is becoming increasingly important for birds. The mudflat is also the only habitat on the Island for the amphibious sea snake (Laticauda colubrina ) and also supports mud crabs and a large population of Fiddler crabs. 4.3.17.3 Management actions • Discuss with landowners owning land that includes the mudflat area the importance of the

mudflat habitat and explore options for arranging voluntary conservation agreements with them to avoid any alteration of the mudflat area.

• Extend ECA regulations regarding the alteration of habitat for flora and fauna to specifically include restrictions on the alteration of mudflat habitat for any purpose.

• Awareness -raising as per Section 5.3/Annex 13 4.3.17.4 Risks To be inserted by relevant discipline 4.3.18.1 Assessment of lagoon conservation status 4.3.18.2 Rationale 4.3.18.3 Management Actions 4.3.18.4 Risks 4.3.19.1 Assessment of insect conservation status To be completed by Wildlfie NPPPs 4.3.19.2 Rationale 4.3.19.3 Management Actions 4.3.19.4 Risks


05/10/2006 97

5. STAKEHOLDERS 5.1 Evaluation The interaction of local people with the site, both legally and illegally, is relatively high. There are a number of reasons for this: a) the site is not devoid of human habitation as is more generally the case with PAs but rather is a highly lived-in area, b) levels of poverty and a dependence on natural resources to maintain livelihoods are relatively high; c) there are limited opportunities for incomes/livelihoods that don’t rely on unsustainable resource use; d) there is a lack of awareness of the legality of certain activities; and e) there is a lack of awareness of the environmental impact of activities. Given that the local community is relatively dependent on the site’s resources for their livelihoods, management for biodiversity conservation and sustainable resource that doesn’t involve the direct participation and support of the community will fail. The establishment and maintenance of good relationships with the local community, and the joint planning, implementation and monitoring of biodiversity conservation activities with those stakeholders, is the only way to obtain benefits for the ECA and has to be one of the main principles of site management. The local community should not be seen as just stakeholders but as co-managers of the site. Properly supported, the community has the scope to manage the day-to-day use of resources at the site. Thus, effective management of the site will require that a lot of time and resources are devoted to establishing and maintaining these primary stakeholder relationships. Other benefits of good relationships with the community include access to indigenous knowledge, a pool of volunteers to facilitate effective management and a cost-effective model of management. The declaration of the site as an ECA has several benefits for the local community. Firstly, if effectively managed, threats to biodiversity conservation and sustainable resource use by resource users external to the site will be removed, ensuring the long-term viability of resources for the local community. Secondly, the community will benefit from learning how to manage their own activities to ensure long-term sustainable resource use via the training, awareness raising and capacity building being provided by CWBMP. Thirdly, a model of joint management of biodiversity conservation and sustainable resource use means local communities will be able to participate in decision-making regarding resource use, and therefore have better control of their future. Lastly, the community will have access to alternative livelihood opportunities that will be developed as a crucial element of reducing threats to biodiversity, including employment opportunities provided by different management strategies, e.g. the development of ecotourism. Apart from primary stakeholders, it will be equally important to develop and maintain good relationships with secondary stakeholders. There is a trend in transfer of land ownership from local inhabitants to wealthy outsiders who are mainly interested in perceived opportunities for cashing-in on tourism development, which is increasing the scale of interaction between people and the site. These stakeholders have expectations regarding the future returns on the land they have purchased and will be major determinants of the success or failure of management for biodiversity conservation. Site management will also only be effective if CWBMP/DoE has good collaborative relationships with local government and other government agencies. Already there are conflicts at the site between the two projects of the MoEF – the CWBMP and the St Martin’s Island Project. It is important that via the CWBMP, DoE’s responsibility to play an active role in environmental management is asserted and that this role is accepted by other government departments. Good relationships with these stakeholders at both the local and national levels are vital.


05/10/2006 98

5.2 Objectives 5.2.1 Management objectives Institutional arrangements will be initiated and sustained within the local community as an integral part of the local level governance and management of biodiversity. The target community will own and operate the newly emerged and evolving institutional arrangement towards achieving biodiversity management. The community, as owners of the biodiversity resources, will be aware of and initiate targeted steps for the conservation and management of biodiversity in collaboration with CWBMP/DoE. The modality of implementation of conservation management by both CWBMP and DoE post-CWBMP is via the VCGs. Government agencies that have a stake in the management of the ECA will work collaboratively with DoE, facilitating its mandate to assert its environmental management responsibilities within the ECA. 5.2.2 Performance indicators and monitoring

Indicator Method Location Frequency Data format 1. Functionality and capacity of VCGs

Through discussions with VCG and reviewing project records. Record number of VCG members per VCG; frequency of meetings; participation in CWBMP/DoE-initiated activities; number of proposals received from VCG; number of biodiversity conservation activities implemented by VCG

All VCGs within site

Annually For each VCG – number of meetings per annum, frequency of meetings; number of CWBMP activities participated in; number of proposals received; number of activities implemented by VCG

2. Alternative livelihoods developed

Through discussions with VCG and reviewing project records. Record number of AIGAs developed; proportion utilised; proportion of VCG members engaged in AIGA

All VCGs within site

Annually Number of AIGA opportunities provided per annum; proportion of VCGs utilising alternatives; proportion of VCG members in each VCG engaged in those AIGAs

3. Community-based enforcement

Office record review. Record level of compliance with legislation, number of cases reported by community to DoE

Whole site Ongoing Percentage of compliance with legislation; number of cases reported.

Others to be determined


05/10/2006 99

5.3 Status and Rationale 5.3.1 Status Relationships with the local community are reasonably well-developed through earlier mobilisation during the Pilot Project, ECFCP activities and more recently mobilisation for CWBMP activities in the form of Village Conservation Groups (VCGs). VCGs include village members from a range of livelihood backgrounds and for present purposes are sufficient in number and coverage. How ever, as discussed in Section 3.5.1, a legacy of community expectations not being met exists causing the local community to mistrust project intentions. A gap also exists between the actual and planned relationship between government stakeholders at the national level. The MoEF (mandate to manage the ECA via the DoE) and the Ministry of Civil Aviation and Tourism (MCAT) are at odds over how to manage the site. The MoEF intends to manage the site for biodiversity conservation and protect the ecologically critical status of the site, while the MCAT wants to proceed with the development of the site as an “exclusive tourist zone” which, according to the New Age National (17/01/2005) means transforming the Island into a tourist zone with world-class amenities via a master plan implemented by the LGED. Another gap in stakeholder relations is also evident at the field level between the St Martin’s Island Project and the CWBMP, both of which are being implemented by the MoEF (the former directly, the latter via the DoE). While both have a goal of biodiversity conservation, among others, there appears to be neither agreement on the best way to achieve biodiversity conservation and ecotourism development at the site, nor coordination of activities at field level. 5.3.2 Rationale The main requirements for maintaining good stakeholder relations include improving stakeholder understanding of the necessity for managing the site for biodiversity conservation, regaining the trust of the local community and strengthening the capacity of the VCGs to be active co-managers of the ECA, providing alternative livelihoods for those most highly -dependent resource users within the ECA and establishing community-based enforcement of ECA rules and regulations and other relevant legisla tion. Improving stakeholder awareness of the necessity for managing the site for biodiversity conservation will facilitate cooperation and the implementation of other management activities. Particularly important is the development of a common understanding between government departments of the modalities of future management of the site with respect to biodiversity conservation. The site can serve the dual purposes of biodiversity conservation and tourism, as long as tourism is managed appropriately and all tourism development/management is along the lines of true ecotourism. Awareness raising both at the village level and within the greater community is an important component of the overall strategy for site management as it can foster understanding and support for site management. Given community respect for the Bangladesh Navy and Coastguard, and therefore their scope in positively influencing the community, they should be utilised where possible in awareness raising activities. There is scope within the CWBMP to utilise professional assistance for awareness raising activities, which should be drawn upon for these activities. The inclusion of Fisheries Management Organisations (FMOs) in ECA management should also be considered as these represent resource users for whom behaviour changes will have a positive impact on biodiversity conservation at the site.


05/10/2006 100

Regaining the trust of the local community is particularly important for the success of future management. Unless CWBMP makes strong efforts to gainfully and meaningfully include the local community in conservation efforts, co-management attempts will be thwarted through a lack of trust by the local community. VCGs have been organised to facilitate sustainable conservation and management of biodiversity, but need to be strengthened to actively participate in the co-management of the site. Their capacity to identify, develop and implement their own sustainable biodiversity management activities linked with local government initiatives needs to be built, as does their capacity to play a central role in monitoring the enforcement of ECA regulations. Institutionalisation of the VCGs, both through their inclusion in Local ECA Committees and their registration as legal entities, will further strengthen their capacity to co-manage the site. Tourism, the diversification of agriculture and handicrafts are the main alternative livelihood opportunities offered by the site. There is considerable scope for alternative income generating opportunities via ecotourism development, as outlined in Section 6. The St Martin’s Island Project has trained 203 Islanders between 2002 and 2006 in different alternatives livelihoods including the making of plaster of paris items, wooden handicrafts, coconut handicrafts, carpentry, housemaking, bamboo crafts, tour guiding and special cookery (for tourists) (A.M.Kamruz Zaman, pers.comm. 29 August 2006). Any income opportunities that arise from site management, particularly from ecotourism development, must be reserved for the local community only. The population is highly dependent on fishing. Fruit and vegetable diversification is necessary to provide an alternative livelihood and reduce the pressure on fish biodiversity. Under no circumstances should any invasive alien species be introduced for alternative incomes/livelihoods – awareness needs to be raised among the community regarding the effect of invasive species on biodiversity. DoE does not currently have the manpower or other resources to ensure the effective enforcement of environmental law within the ECA. An integral component of the co-management of the site will be community-based enforcement that is developed and managed by DoE. The local community have expressed a willingness to participate in community-based enforcement. 5.3.3 Management actions 5.3.3.1 Improve stakeholder understanding and cooperation • Establish a common understanding of the future management of the site between MoEF and

MCAT (see Section 6.3.3), and between the St Martin’s Island Project and CWBMP. • Imple ment the awareness raising program specific for site users as outlined in Annex 13. • Prepare and conduct a program of awareness raising for local government decision makers

regarding the importance of the site for species and habitats (based on the contents of Annex 13); explain proposed management actions and seek their collaboration in managing the site.

• Prepare and conduct awareness raising activities, to reach all sectors of the wider community (based on the contents of Annex 13) that promotes the site as an ECA and increases understanding of the site’s management requirements.

• Utilise, among others, the Bangladesh Navy and Coastguard where possible in awareness raising activities.

• Identify opportunities to work in partnership with similar programmes and projects to promote synergies in the implementation of activities and to avoid overlap and duplication of effort.

• Extend co-management to include Fisheries Management Organisations (FMOs) etsablished under ECFCP.


05/10/2006 101

5.3.3.2 Rebuild trust/strengthen VCGs

• Ensure the community understands that DoE will be managing the ECA beyond the life of both the St Martin’s Island Project and CWBMP, and that long-term management will be based on a model of co-management with the community.

• Identify in collaboration with the community their role and responsibility as a partner and co-manager of the site.

• Identify current strengths and weaknesses in relation to their roles and responsibilities and provide capacity building in those areas they see fit, focusing on those already experienced in community participation activities under the ECFCP and along lines of discipline-specific responsibility.

• In addition to those needs identified above, ensure capacity building training in identifying, developing and submitting biodivers ity conservation initiatives to DoE, assessing biological indicators, monitoring activity outcomes and participating in local government and ECA management institutional setting.

• Link VCGs with civil society volunteer mentors, including college and high sc hool teachers and reputable clubs dedicated to social service/environmental protection.

• Identify suitable individuals within VCGs that are prepared to act as Community Focal Points; and provide training as required.

• Institutionalise the VCGs through their inclusion in the Local ECA Committee, representation in DC Committee, UP/Upazilla meetings and registration with the social welfare department/ Joint Stock Company as per VOs under ECFCP; draft MOUs/guidelines to ensure VCG inclusion in the Local ECA Committee and representation in DC Committee/Upazilla meetings is meaningful.

• VCG members (at least one representative from each) should be included in Upazilla/District administrative committee/related committees (e.g. environment, forestry, agricultural, fisheries, land use committees etc.) and recognised as important stakeholders.

• Draft policy with the community which gives them the legal authority to co-manage the site beyond the life of the project; use policy and legal expertise provided for under the CWBMP to revise and discuss the policy; and submit to DoE as a policy suggestion.

• Share any new information about the site, CMP implementation and ECA management in general promptly with the community via VCG meetings.

• Include the VCGs/local community in the annual review of CMP implementation and major (three-yearly) reviews of the CMP as outlined in Section 11.

• Develop a reliable communications system for the VCGs to enable their timely participation in co-management.

• Establish a system for CWBMP/government recognition of VCG achievements with respect to biodiversity conservation or active ECA co-management and award annually.

• Link VCGs into local government service providers and NGOs to ensure ongoing access to support mechanisms.

• Create a common account fund for all VCGs and a saving scheme similar to that established under ECFCP for emergencies and start-up loans.

5.3.3.3 Alternative livelihoods

• Assess the progress of ECFCP in the development of alternative livelihood/income-generating

opportunities at the site and all lessons learnt. • Prepare guidelines for the development of alternative livelihood/income-generating

opportunities based on ECFCP lessons learnt and biodiversity conservation guidelines.


05/10/2006 102

• Draft a list of alternative livelihood/income-generating opportunities with the community that are feasible for the site and its inhabitants (including those mentioned by Tomascik (1997) and as per ECFCP experience) and rank in order of community interest. Consider at least agriculture, including fruit diversification via homestead orchards and the use of the coconut plant for bedding, buttons, brushes and rope, handicrafts and tourism alternatives.

• Prepare guidelines for all agricultural-based alternatives identified that encourage the cultivation of local species yielding at least the same as HYVs, organic agricultural practices and the use of IPM.

• Demonstrate these agriculture best -practice methods via awareness raising and demonstration plots.

• Establish maize as a food, fodder and fuel alternative. • Provide credit support for establishing alternatives assessed as feasible. • Provide training in, and the opportunity for developing, alternative income-generating

possibilities provided by the development of ecotourism as outlined in Section 6, e.g. souvenir and handicrafts production; tour guiding; running the Information/Visitors Centre, providing accommodation; tourism infrastructure works etc.

• Assist in the marketing requirements of all relevant alternatives.

5.3.3.4 Establish community-based enforcement • Raise awareness among the community for the need for community-based enforcement and

identify those willing to participate in a program of community-based enforcement. • Raise awareness among the community of the main enforcement problems. • Draft guidelines for the operation of a program of community-based enforcement. • Train participants in implementing the program and monitoring the program. • Implement DoE/community-based enforcement for the protection of species and habitats as per

existing and new ECA regulations outlined in Section 4.3/Annex 12 of this plan. 5.3.4 Risks To be inserted


05/10/2006 103

6. TOURISM 6.1 Evaluation Ecotourism is not only widely recognised as a tool for biodiversity conservation and may also be the only long-term sustainable development path open to isolated communities (Denmam, 1992 in Tomascik, 1997), and thus will play an important role in the management of St Martin’s Island for biodiversity conservation. The site is already heavily used for tourism, but the form of tourism taking place at the Island is both unplanned and unregulated. Despite the current adverse impact of tourism on biodiversity features at the site, tourism can and should continue at the Island, albeit in a different form. Large scale tourism development is not an option given the environmental limitations of the site thus while St Martin’s Island should continue to accommodate visitors, these should be restricted in number and only to those areas within the site designated for tourism under zoning described in Section 3.2. All forms of tourism on the Island need to be managed and developed in an environmentally-friendly way. The site has many points of interest for tourism. Firstly, it is the country’s only truly offshore island. While there are several islands in Bangladesh, most are very close to, and in many cases are generally extensions of, the mainland - except during high tide. In contrast, the 34 km journey to the Island down the Naff River estuary and across the Bay of Bengal far from the mainland imparts a true sense of sea adventure. The Island is a source of pride for Bangladeshi nationals and most who can afford it consider it a destination they must visit during their lifetime. Secondly the Island supports a relatively pristine natural environment, including clear blue waters (outside the rainy season), extensive beach areas, rocky reefs, coral colonies and coral-associated fishes and invertebrates, birds and marine turtles. The Island also supports a ‘wild’ rocky land habitat that is unique in Bangladesh. While migratory birds and marine turtles occur seasonally the season corresponds with the tourist season. Thirdly, the site offers a respite from the ‘hustle and bustle’ of overcrowded and noisy cities and towns, and thus opportunities for quiet enjoyment. Local soc ial and cultural norms and Islander lifestyle are additional points of interest for tourism. The actual carrying capacity of the site is unknown. Tomascik (1997) estimated the real carrying capacity, i.e. physical carrying capacity corrected for the cons traints of weather, sea conditions and the Ramadan period to be 861 visits per day. The effective carrying capacity, i.e. the maximum number of visits that can be managed by the level of site management (linked to the provision of physical facilities such as lodgings, potable water, sanitary toilets, garbage facilities etc., and the number of park managers, etc.) could not be estimated, but given the lack of these facilities the effective carrying capacity would be lower than 861 visits per day. According to Tomascik (1997) the local community tolerated the 150-200 visits per day and with close consultation could probably tolerate 500-800 visits per day. It is impossible to estimate the daily tourist visits from the information provided by the St Martin’s Island Project as these are whole -season figures and visits are not distributed evenly throughout the season. However, based on the estimates given for tourist visits to the Island in December 2005 and January 2006 (Section 3.5.2), there were around 500-833 visits to the Island daily. The current level of visitation is having an adverse impact on biodiversity features though this is generally not a result of the actual numbers visiting the site, but the lack of management of the activities of those that visit the site. The Island can support the current level of visitation if activities are managed. Actual demand is high and potential demand is good, given that there are few opportunities in Bangladesh for nature-based tourism, a growing awareness in Bangladesh of the enjoyment of


05/10/2006 104

nature-based tourism, the huge seasonal tourist market of neighbouring Cox’s Bazar and a growing middle-class with increasing disposable incomes. The site does not need to be further promoted domestically, given the existing high level of awareness of, and interest in, the Island as a popular tourist destination within Bangladesh. There is little scope for increased demand from international tourists; as Tomascik (1997) noted, while marine ecotourism has become increasingly popular worldwide St Martin’s Island has, compared to other areas, relatively little to offer in terms of unique marine attractions. Compared to other areas, the Island has relatively low aesthetic value and the shallow depths, very poor visibility, low diversity of marine biota and lack of coral reefs means the possibility of attracting international divers is low (ibid, 1997). Nevertheless there is sufficient domestic demand to ensure the viability of ecotourism development. Access to the site via boat is reasonably simple in the peak tourist season, with several vessels departing to and returning from the Island each day. Each vessel has an official capacity of between 300 and 400 persons, with many more accommodated when necessary. Access is limited outside the peak tourist season as regular services do not depart due to the weather and thus unfavourable conditions in the bay. Local boat owners regularly make the crossing outside the peak season in good weather conditions, and may be hired by tourists for this purpose. This is an unpopular option though, given the perceived safety of the smaller local vessels and unorganised nature of departures. Access within the site is limited, but is sufficient to meet the needs of most tourism currently. There is currently a sufficient amount of accommodation and restaurant facilities etc. to meet the needs of overnight stays. However, tourism infrastructure is unsuitable with respect to managing the waste of tourists. Many organisations and individuals provide tourist facilities at the site. The management of tourism at the site by DoE as part of its ECA management mandate should not involve the duplication of facilities provided by existing providers but rather ensure that existing provisions are managed to avoid or minimise any adverse impact on the environment. Ecotourism development at the site by CWBMP/DoE should also include collaboration with other initiatives intending to develop ecotourism, e.g. the St Martin’s Island Project. Tourism-related stakeholders include current and future owners and operators of tourism services, the local community, government agencies and the St Martin’s Island Project. Tourism service providers in general expect to be able to continue providing services with little or no restrictions, which is not possible if tourism at the site is managed to minimise harm to the environment. The local community are generally interested in seeing tourism continue to develop at the site, but wish to benefit more than they are currently doing so. Reasonably resource dependent, the local community cannot realistically reduce their dependence on the natural resources of the site without alternatives. There is sufficient scope for their participation in ecotourism developed at the site as a main alternative inc ome generating opportunity. The MCAT is a major stakeholder and is currently in conflict with the MoEF regarding the designation of the Island as an ‘exclusive tourist zone’ and its development as such. The expectations of the MCAT, Bangladesh Parjatan Cor poration (BPC) and the private sector for how tourism should be developed at the site definitely differ from the expectations of DoE and the community. Regardless, the MCAT, BPC and the private sector will all be important stakeholders in the development of ecotourism at the site, as community-based tourism needs to be done in partnership with such stakeholders. Ecotourism development is also a component of the St Martin’s Island Project but initial efforts thus far suggest the encouragement of conventional tourism only. The emphasis on ecotourism rather than conventional tourism, and ecotourism’s main role as a strategy for biodiversity conservation needs to be affirmed at the site for all stakeholders.


05/10/2006 105

Resources are available within the CWBMP for ecotourism development at the site, after which alternative resources will need to be found and sustainable funding mechanisms developed. A carefully considered plan for ecotourism development can serve as a bidding document to secure further funds. In defining zones for management of the site, core protection zones for coral, turtles and migratory birds were identified, several of which should function for ecotourism as well. 6.2 Objective for access and tourism 6.2.1 Management objective All tourism at the site will be based on policy developed specifically for tourism in ECAs, including environmentally-friendly tourism based on ecotourism best-practice principles and functioning as an integral component of conservation strategies for biodiversity at the site. All tourism will be within the carrying capacity of both the site in general and of specific areas within the site. Ecotourism development at the site will help raise awareness throughout Bangladesh and regionally and internationally about the ecological importance of the site, particularly for marine turtles, birds and coral. National and international visitors, particularly the wildlife watching community, will be attracted to the site, as will educational groups. Ecotourism will be community-based, providing an important source of alternative income for community groups and reducing the pressure of unsustainable resource use on the site. Tourism will respect local values – social, cultural and religious. Ecotourism will also be an important source of funds to support the cost of ongoing management of the site. While tourism management and development will be overseen by those responsible for ECA management, all stakeholders will be involved in managing and developing tourism at the site, including the local community, government agencies, the private sector and other projects/NGOs. 6.2.2 Performance indicators and monitoring The indicators should measure the quality and quantity of tourism provided at the site. The main tourism objectives for the site are the management of current conventional tourism in an environmentally-friendly way and the development of community-based ecotourism as an alternative source of income, thus indicators need to reflect these priorities. This includes indicators for the greening of current conventional tourism and for community involvement and reduced dependence on natural resource use. The indicators should be reviewed when ecotourism programs are developed and implemented.

Indicator Method Location Frequency Data format 1. Number of visitors

Count total number of visitors coming to the site, including whether domestic or international.

At jetty in St Martin’s Island and at ghats at Teknaf

Ongoing during peak season

Total number of visitors at each point of interest; total number of visitors.

2. Distribution of visitors

Count total number of visitors at each location within the site.

All points of interest

Ongoing during peak season

Total number of visitors at each location

3. Overnight stays Collect information on number of overnight stays from hotels

At hotels Monthly in tourist season

Total number of overnight stays per month


05/10/2006 106

Indicator Method Location Frequency Data format 4. Level of tourist satisfaction

Measure formally by structured questionnaires for 10% of visitors

At hotels, on tourist vessels/boats

Structured questionnaire – each season

Depends on structure of questionnaire and comments received in visitor books but should include compilation of positive comments, improvements suggested, and complaints

5. Amount of funds raised from ecotourism for site management

Calculate total amount of funds raised from ecotourism for site management

NA Annually (every tourist season)

Financial year figure

6. Number of local community members directly involved in tourism provision

Count number of individuals involved

At all points of the program

Annually (every tourist season)

Total number, and number by occupation e.g. interpretive guides, accommodation providers, souvenirs sellers, information centre/visitor centre employees

7. Number of community members diverted from natural resource use

Survey local community

Whole site Annually Total number, and number by resource-use category

6.3 Status and Rationale 6.3.1 Status Tourism at the site is currently unsustainable; almost all tourism activities are non environmenta lly-friendly and not based on ecotourism best-practices. Tourism is currently adversely affecting both biodiversity and the natural landscape of the Island, and is above the Island’s carrying capacity both generally (given the level of management) and at specific points of the site. Plans for future private tourism development continue unabated and are not based on ecotourism principles. Current tourism has raised awareness of specific natural features of the site but not the significance of the site for the ongoing conservation of those features, or the importance of those features both nationally and globally. Tourism at the site is currently conducted with extremely limited participation of the local community, with direct benefits accruing mainly to the non-Islander tourism service providers. Benefits to the local community are secondary, based only on the increased demand for food, souvenirs and other miscellaneous items. As a result, tourism has increased rather than reduced the pressure on natural resource use, as the limited benefits to the majority of the community mean they are still dependent on resources use for livelihoods. Current tourism also neither respects local social and cultural norms, nor provides any income for the ongoing management of the site. 6.3.2 Rationale To maximise the benefits of tourism for biodiversity conservation there needs to be a greening of current conventional tourism at the site, including the management of tourism within the carrying capacity of the site, and the de velopment of ecotourism activities related directly to biodiversity


05/10/2006 107

conservation strategies. Thus the main management actions required for tourism include the development of policy for tourism at the site, the control of current tourism to minimise tourism’s adverse effects and the development of ecotourism opportunities including associated facilities/infrastructure. Developing ecotourism at the site requires a collaborative effort between the community, relevant government agencies and the private tourism sector. While community-based, the local community will need to be linked with the tourism sector which will provide advice on developing and managing tourism. The capacity of the local community to participate in tourism development and management needs to be built, partnerships between the local community and other stakeholders need to be developed for the co-management of ecotourism at the site and logistical and infrastructure requirements addressed. A draft plan for ecotourism development as outlined in Annex 14 will be shared with the local community and other stakeholders and revised according their input. All opinions will be considered but the main focus of ecotourism development at the site will be that it is community-based and must employ local community members. Awareness raising among tourism providers regarding the impact tourism is currently having on the site and its biodiversity values is the first step in greening the current conventional tourism taking place. It is the responsibility of tourism service providers to provide an environmentally-friendly service for tourists to enjoy. While awareness raising for tourists directly is also important, it is tourist service providers that can lead by example and provide the scope for tourists to have a limited impact on the site. Ecotourism best-practices standards for tourist service providers need to be developed and implemented. Service providers should be certified against these standards, with those not meeting the standards being removed from the Island. Many new ECA rules regarding the conservation of biodiversity at the site have been identified in Section 4.3/Annex 12 and these should be incorporated into tourism best practices. This management plan has identified core protection, buffer and general use zones, with functions and restrictions, including those relating to tourism. The zoning need to be implemented as soon as possible and managed accordingly. The development of ecotourism programs as identified for those zones should proceed based on the draft programs provided in Annex 14. Preliminary scoping indicates ecotourism opportunities exist for bird watching, marine turtle observation, scuba diving and snorkelling, dolphin watching, trail walking and coral appreciation. In additio n to a range of ecotourism programs, the site will have an Information Centre that will serve as the focal point for ecotourism at the site. Another option is the inclusion of St Martin’s Island ECA in a wider “ECA Tour” program which visits all ECAs in Bangladesh. The ecotourism program at the site will increase public understanding and awareness of marine turtles, migratory birds and coral at the site and raise the profile of the ECA and the global significance of its habitats for these species/communitie s both nationally and internationally, provide an alternative livelihood source for the local community and generate funds for the ongoing management of the site. The capacity of the local community to participate in ecotourism activities needs to be assessed based on the anticipated requirement of the proposed programs, and training conducted. Training will be required for guiding and manning an information centre. One or two ecotourism programs will be developed initially as pilot programs and to enable the local community to learn “on the job”. For all of the programs a core of local community members will be trained in ecotourism guiding. All programs will have both a self-guided or guided-tour option, with the exception of the turtle observation progra m which will be guided-tour only. Registered guides will be present at all ecotourism locations at the site for answering questions, assisting tourists and monitoring tourist behaviour.


05/10/2006 108

6.3.3 Management actions A. Policy and planning

1. Develop a tourism policy for the site in collaboration with MCAT based on the CBD Guidelines on Biodiversity and Tourism Development and management actions proposed in this conservation management plan. Include at least: sustainable funding mechanisms, infrastructure development, operation of tourism services, zoning, local community involvement, other private sector involvement, benefit sharing, pricing, ecotourism standards and eco-certification of tourism service providers, marketing and promotion of ecotourism products, the roles and responsibilities of DoE/MoEF and MCAT in ECA tourism development and management.

2. Extend ECA regulations where necessary to include rules related to tourism development management based on policy developed in (1) above.

3. Prepare a draft Ecotourism Master Plan in collaboration with MCAT based on the policy and ecotourism development programs identified in Annex 14, and share with all stakeholders including the local community.

4. Finalise the plan and have it approved and endorsed by DoE, MoEF and MCAT. 5. Implement the Master Plan in collaboration with MCAT/BPC, the local community and

tourism service providers. B. Management of current tourism

1. Raise awareness among all stakeholders, e.g. tourists, tourism service providers, local community, local government, MCAT and other relevant initiatives/organisations about the status of St. Martin’s Island as an ECA and its significance for biodiversity, the impact of current tourism on biodiversity and natural resources, ECA regulations, the necessity for mana ging tourism with respect to biodiversity conservation and the intention to develop community-based ecotourism to protect biodiversity, maintain the suitability of the Island for tourism and provide alternative sustainable livelihoods for the local community.

2. Raise awareness among the same group of ecotourism best practices. 3. Calculate the current Tourism Carrying Capacity (TCC) of the Island and sites within the

Island; based on the TCC, set quotas for the number of tourists entering the site and staying overnight, and the numbers joining tourism programs to specific areas within the site.

4. Place a moratorium on any further infrastructure development until the ECA specific Tourism Policy is developed.

5. Develop and implement ecotourism standards and best practice guidelines for tourists and tourism service provider (hotels, motels, restaurants, tour operators etc.).

6. Engage current tourism providers in conservation activities. 7. Establish check points at various entry/departure points, e.g. at the St Martin’s Island jetty,

Golachipa, to monitor tourist numbers and activities. 8. Implement zoning as identified in section 3.2 which includes zoning for tourism. Restrict

and manage movement in and around turtle nesting sites, migratory bird habitat, sand dune areas and coral areas.

9. Develop and introduce an eco-friendly sewerage disposal and waste management system based on site requirements.

10. Develop and enforce strict regulations on the use of ground water by hotel operators, and implement a sustainable water use system based on rain water storage, the use of salt water for flushing toilets and the use of recycled water.


05/10/2006 109

11. Assess the feasibility of establishing energy alternatives for generators and fuelwood including solar energy.

12. Enforce existing and new ECA regulations as compiled in Annex 12 regarding tourism impacts on biodiversity.

13. Ban and control culturally insensitive behaviour, e.g. the sale and consumption of alcohol, improper dress and prostitution.

14. Develop a joint community-based/DoE monitoring and surveillance program for tourism management and development.

C. Development of ecotourism programs Finalise the draft ecotourism programs provided in Annex 14 and implement including:

1. Assess the feasibility of each program outlined in Annex 14, and share with the local community.

2. Preparing a detailed costed proposal for each initiative deemed feasible. 3. Preparing guidelines for the operation of each initiative. 4. Selecting one or two initiatives to be implemented initially as pilot demonstration activities,

identify community training needs based on community capacity and the requirements of demonstration programs.

5. Identify suitable organisations to assist the establishment of the demonstration activities, including meeting the community training needs identified above.

6. Implement demonstration activities. 7. Incorporate the results of the demonstration activities into the final ecotourism master plan

for the site. D. Development of tourism facilities and infrastructure

1. Assess the facilities/infrastructure requirements for the ecotourism programs proposed in Annex 14 and determine how these needs can best be met. Consider at least:

a. A visitors information centre b. Tourists check posts c. Tourist sanitation facilities d. Elevated wooden walk ways in the rocky inter-tidal area/rocky land habitat. e. Elevated observation platforms/bird hides f. Community-based meals/accommodation facilities for tourists.

2. Collaborate with the St Martin’s Island Project in assssing the feasibility of developing a “Living Aquarium”.

E. Coordination

1. Prepare a Memorandum of Understanding between DoE/MoEF and MCAT clarifying the roles, responsibilities and coordination mechanisms between both parties with respect to tourism in the ECA.

2. Coordinate with the St Martin’s Island Project/MoEF on all tourism management and development initiatives at the site.

6.3.4 Risks To be inserted by relevant discipline


05/10/2006 110

7. INTERPRETATION 7.1 Evaluation There is a large “audience” of visitors to the Island to justify the provision of interpretation features. The protection of the site and its biodiversity features requires site -specific messages, especially around the role and importance of ECA declaration for the conservation of biodiversity and the sustainability of natural resources. Interpretation provisions should also be used to raise awareness of the significance of the site, and also of ECA rules and regulations. The declaration of ECAs and their management are new concepts in Bangladesh thus interpretation provisions can help visitors attain a greater awareness and understanding of the site, its features and its management. For all the ecotourism programs proposed, interpretation in its various forms will be important and will be developed as an integral component of the programs. 7.2 Site Specific Interpretation Policy The planning and provision of interpretation at the site will be an important part of management’s efforts to conserve biodiversity at the site through improved awareness and appreciation of the species and habitats, thus adequate resources (time and financia l) need to be devoted to this task. The proposed ecotourism programs and Information Centre all have interpretation requirements, including the planning and drafting of interpretation specific to each and the physical production and installation of interpretation features. Once both the draft ecotourism programs and Information Centre requirements (outlined in Annex 14) have been finalised, personnel should be employed to advise the Ecotourism Development Officers on the best form interpretation can take for each program and for the site as a whole. The cost of this assistance can be drawn from the budget for unallocated inputs or awareness raising under the CWBMP. 7.3 Performance Indicators and Monitoring Monitoring indicators for interpretation can be done in much the same way as for tourism in general (Section 6.3). Indicators should provide management with information on the success or otherwise of interpretation in educating, informing and positively changing the perceptions of tourists with respect to the importance of biodiversity conservation, the role of ECAs in Bangladesh, the role of DoE in managing ECAs and the role of the greater community (including themselves).

Indicator Method Location Frequency Data format


05/10/2006 111

8. OPERATIONAL OBJECTIVES 8.1 Operational Objectives The main operational objective for the management of St Martin’s Island ECA is the sustainability of the current ECA management structure, both institutionally and financially. Other important objectives include the preparation of appropriate policy for ECA management; a commitment to enforcing existing legislation relevant to the site; the promulgation and enforcement of new ECA rules as identified in this management plan; the institutionalisation of ECA management that maintains effective arrangements for intersectoral coordination and collaboration at the local and national levels; and capacity building within the DoE for biodiversity management in general and ECA management in particular. 8.2 Rationale The main operational objective for the management of St Martin’s Island ECA is the sustainability of the current ECA management structure. Unless the establishment of a permanent structure for site management is assured at the field level, site management will cease, or at best be minimal, once the CWBMP ends in 2009. Funding for ECA management is limited by DoE budgetary allocations and alternative sources of sustainable of funding need to be sought. Ecotourism can provide one source of funds but will not be sufficient to meet all needs. Other alternatives need to be sought. As discussed in Section 2.1 of this plan, there is no specific policy for ECA management in Bangladesh. The CWBMP provides for the development of policies towards ECAs, in particular the further development of criteria and plans for selection of ECAs, including replication of the concept and ways of ensuring their sustainable funding and, most importantly, means of addressing conflict with other sectoral-based legislation. The development of a policy framework that is consistent with, and effectively supports, ECA management objectives is integral for the institutionalisation of ECA management. Until this is done, field-level operations will be compromised. Another important operational consideration is the DoE’s legal obligations with respect to environmental management. It is necessary that DoE commits to enforcing legislation relevant to the site and collaborates with other relevant agencies to do the same. Closely related is the requirement for ECA regulations currently specified under the BECA (1995) to be legislated and enforced and the promulgation and enforcement of new ECA rules as identified in this management plan. This will probably involve an amendment to the Act itself as currently the only rules that can be promulgated are those relating to standards 12 and 13 of the ECR (1997), which provide insufficient scope for managing the threats to biodiversity at the site. As for policy, the legal framework also needs to be consistent with, and effectively support, ECA management objectives. Effective arrangements for intersectoral coordination are extremely important for institutionalising the concept of ECA management, addressing and minimising intersectoral conflict and affirming DoE’s role in coordinating and implementing environmental management. This is important at all levels, from the field through to the MoEF. Arrangements are currently underway for establishing a Local ECA Committee that will facilitate intersectoral coordination at field level, and that will report to the National ECA Committee, which will facilitate intersectoral coordination at a national level. But the Local ECA Committee is insufficient to support the day to day field -level coordination required between the ECA site management office and village conservation groups for


05/10/2006 112

effective ECA management, especially given the distance between the site and the ECAMU. A model similar to that adopted by other departments at district level, i.e. Upazilla based sub-offices, is required. Given the remote nature of the site and its relative inaccessibility for a good portion of the year, the stationing of an entry-level DoE officer at the St Martin’s Island Parishad is strongly recommended. Apart from non-DoE technical staff that are contracted until the CWBMP finished in 2009, the site office is currently staffed by one DoE officer (ECA Management Officer – or ECAMO), with the expectation that DoE will maintain both the office and ECAMO position as part of their planned expansion to district level. While conversant with DoE policy, law enforcement and environmental management in general, the two DoE persons that have assumed the ECAMO position at the field office during the life of the CWBMP thus far have had neither backgrounds nor training in biodiversity conservation or protected area management. This is indicative of DoE personnel in general. Capacity building within the DoE for biodiversity management in general and ECA management in particular is thus an impor tant operational consideration. The recent and large increase in transfer of land ownership from the local community to outsiders continues, threatening to compromise the present state of the site. The transfer of land ownership needs to be arrested if management for biodiversity conservation is to continue at the site. The leasing of government khas land needs to be arrested for the same reason. A marine research laboratory should be established to gain a better understanding of the St Martin’s Island ecosystem, as recommended by the NCSIP -1 and provided for under the CWBMP. 8.3 Management Actions • Seek commitment from DoE, HQ to establish the current Cox’s Bazar CWBMP office

(ECAMU) as the central government coordinating agency responsible for ECA management in the district, under DoE’s planned expansion of DoE offices at the district level, including one ECAMO.

• In staffing the planned DoE office at district level, ensure the ECAMO position is at a level equivalent to that of other departments represented at district level, i.e. Deputy Director, to facilitate intersectoral coordination.

• Establish, as part of the planned expansion of DoE to district level, representation of the DoE (entry-level officer) in the Teknaf Upazilla Headquarters, as per the current arrangements of Departments of Fisheries, Agriculture, Education etc. to coordinate ECA management activities between the village level and the site management office in Cox’s Bazar and the Local ECA Committee.

• Station an entry-level officer at St Martin ’s Island Union Parishad to act as an ECA ‘ranger’. • Assess the anticipated staffing needs for site management at field level beyond the life of

CWBMP, and ensure that staff employed is qualified in biological sciences; incorporate existing National Project Professional Personnel (NPPPs) into that structure where possible.

• Assess the funding required to manage the ECA post-CWBMP, the shortfall between that required and funding available from government sources, and the feasibility of alternatives.

• In scoping funding alternatives consider, among others, submission of proposals to international organisations funding conservation work, particularly for birds, coral and turtles.

• Review existing policy relevant to the site (outlined in Section 2.1) and identify where conflicts arise; provide recommendations to DoE HQ for changes to conflicting policies, and ensure draft ECA policy addresses those conflicts. Ensure that any ECA policy developed legitimises the co-management role of VCGs/the local community.


05/10/2006 113

• Prepare a draft ecotourism policy (see Section 6.3) as part of general ECA policy consistent with the principles of ECA management, i.e. the conservation and sustainable use of biodiversity resources, and have the policy included in national development plans.

• Ensure ECA policy considers conservation incentives (financial and non-financial) and includes scope for voluntary conservation agreements between landholders and DoE at the site.

• Determine the requirements for establishing certification of ECAs under internationally recognised categories of protected area (e.g. IUCN categories) and undertake to attain certification; and include this alignment in ECA policy.

• Enforce current relevant legislation under BECA (1995) at the site, and collaborate with other releva nt agencies to do the same.

• Seek assistance from DoE Chittagong Divisional Office in the enforcement of law and regulations relating to ECAs.

• Assess the requirements for amending the BECA, 1995, to accommodate legislation for the effective management of ECAs; finalise the compilation of new ECA rules specific to the site (a draft list of rules is provided in Annex 12) and submit to DoE HQ for review and promulgation. Ensure that any ECA legislation developed legitimises the co-management role of VCGs/the local community.

• Enforce, and monitor the implementation of, the new detailed ECA rules. • Establish and implement community-based enforcement as outlined in Section 5.3.3. • Submit a proposal for the inclusion of marine areas in the ECA as outlined in Section 3.1.1. • Establish and maintain the Local ECA Committee, with a broad representation of stakeholders. • Work closely with the Ministry of Relief and Disaster Management to ensure collaborative

efforts with respect to disaster management within the ECA. • Collaborate with the Coastguard to facilitate their participation in ECA management. • Collaborate with the Ministry of Health to control natural population growth at the site. • Collaborate with MCAT and BPC to develop ecotourism at the site (see Section 6). • Collect information on any future development plans for the site and address the impact of these

plans to decision makers. • Provide training for the ECAMO in biodiversity conservation and PA management, including

conservation management planning. This could include a series of workshops on PA management and study tours to successful examples of multiple-use protected areas within the South Asia region, but should include at a minimum a formal study program at Masters Level. Training via workshops at least should be arranged as soon as possible.

• Seek a commitment from DoE, HQ to retain a core of DoE staff trained in those areas listed above for maintaining the conservation management capacity of the site office beyond the life of CWBMP.

• Seek a commitment from DoE HQ to minimise where possible turnover in the ECAMO position until at least a core of trained personnel is available for the role.

• Seek a commitment from DoE, HQ for trained personnel who are transferred out of ECA management roles to retain both a role as mentor to ECA management personnel, and a position in biodiversity/PA management.

• Ban any further transfer of land ownership on the Island via a letter from the DG, DoE. • Ban any further leasing of government khas land. • Set up a well-equipped marine research laboratory staffed by qualified biologists to monitor the

development of coral, associated algae and fish fauna. • Implement the work plan as outlined in Section 9 of this plan. • Maintain the ecological monitoring program as outlined in Section 10 of this plan, via the

implementation of participatory monitoring and evaluation with the local community.


05/10/2006 114

• Maintain all review and subsequent reporting requirements as outlined in Section 11 of this plan.

8.4 Risks To be inserted by ECAMO/PMU


05/10/2006 115

9. MANAGEMENT ACTION PLAN Management actions outlined in the CMP are compiled here as activities with timeframes for initiation (i.e. when each activity should start) and responsibilities. The activities listed are summarised versions of the management actions – in implementing each activity the full description and rationale of each, as outlined in the CMP, should be referred to.

SL No.

CMP Ref Activity

Q4 2006 - Q3 2007

Q4 2007 -Q3 2010

Post- Q4 2010 Responsibility

1 3.1.1 Decision regarding marine areas for inclusion in ECA ECA Cell 2 3.1.1 Review of land ownership DoE/PMU

3 3.1.5 Decision regarding map procurement based on future needs identified in CMP PMU

4 3.1.6 Organise photo library and database ECAMO

5 Finalise zonation including dec ision by MoEF with respect to different zonations proposed by the two projects NPPPs/PMU

6 3.2

Establish and manage zones CWBMP/DoE

7 Survey of invasive alien plant species and impact on biodiversity at the site Plant NPPPs

8 Finalise surveys of fish fauna Fish NPPPs

9

3.3.2.2 Procure recent research reports from St Martin's island Project once cleared by Ministry PMU

10 Identify fuelwood needs Plant NPPPs/VCGs

11 Assess feasibility of establishing alternative source of fuelwood; establish plantation(s) Plant NPPPs/VCGs

12

4.3.1.3

Implement program of assisted regeneration of Pandanus Plant NPPPs/VCGs

13 Assess intention of landowner owning land with remaining mangrove patch Plant NPPPs

14 Awareness raising of landowner as per CMP Plant NPPPs

15

4.3.2.3

Assess possibility of initiating voluntary conservation agreement with landowner and planting additional 1 ha at area Plant NPPPs


05/10/2006 116

SL No.

CMP Ref Activity Q4 2006 -

Q3 2007 Q4 2007 -Q3 2010


16 If feasible fence remaining mangrove area and install signage Plant NPPPs/VCGs

17

Plant mangrove - 1 ha at Dahkin Para; 1.5 ha at Deearmatha and 1.5 ha at Cheradia. Plant NPPPs/VCGs

18 Identify farmers willing to continue cultivation of indigenous onion variety AEO/HEO NPPPs

19 Prepare and conduct training program to increase yield and reduce relative cost AEO/HEO NPPPs

20

4.3.3.3

Assist farmers to develop and implement marketing campaign AEO/HEO NPPPs

21 Determine whether sea weed trading still a problem - awareness raising of those involved Plant NPPPs

22 Determine impact of water pollution on algal growth and manage accordingly Plant NPPPs

23

4.3.4.3

Contain boat docking and harbouring away from algal areas (see No.4) PMU/DoE

24 Cetacean foraging, habitat use, movement pattern and migratory corridor survey Wildlife NPPPs

25 Arrange for temporary closure/management of fishing areas identified important for seasonal migration Wildlife NPPPs

26 Monitor by-catch for gear -specific threats Wildlife NPPPs/VCGs

27 Seek collaboration from Navy, Coastguard and fishermen in reporting off-shore cetacean observation and mortality ECAMO

28 Assess feasibility of simple alterations to gear and incorporate into awareness raising activities Wildlife NPPPs

29 Implement education and training program to reduce by-catch Wildlife NPPPs

30

4.3.5.3

Ensure all cetacean species included in Bangladesh Wildlife (Preservation) (Amendment) Act 1974 PMU

31 Conduct study of population of Hawksbill turtles around Island Wildlife NPPPs

32 Re-establish tagging initiative that began in 2000 Wildlife/Fish NPPPs/VCGs

33

4.3.6.3

Initiate use of TEDs in shrimp/fish trawl nets in Bay of Bengal Wildlife/Fish NPPPs/VCGs


05/10/2006 117

SL No.


Q3 2007 Q4 2007 -Q3 2010


34 Implement stray dog control program Wildlife NPPPs/VCGs

35 Monitor progress of revisions to Wildlife (Preservation) (Amendment) Act 1974 for inclusion of marine turtles Wildlife NPPPs

36

Facilitate discussions between MoEF and MoFL to clarify lines of responsibility with respect to marine turtle conservation within ECAs PMU

37

Continue ex-situ and in-situ turtle egg conservation programs already in operation, including coordination of all initiatives by DoE Wildlife NPPPs/VCGs

38 Clear pathways through existing artificial boulder embankments following observation of emergence attempts Wildlife NPPPs/VCGs

39 Develop and implement set of guidelines of use of lighting during nesting season Wildlife NPPPs

40 Implement system for fishermen for accurate identification of trapped turtles Wildlife NPPPs

41 Implement turtle-friendly fishing practices Fish NPPPs/VCGs

42

Assess feasibility of establishing volunteer program for turtle conservation Wildlife NPPPs

43 Bird habitat survey - establish plantations for habitat recovery not already covered under this plan Wildlife NPPPs

44 Introduce IPM methods for farming including judicious use of pesticides

AEO/HEO NPPPs/VCGs

45 Assess feasibility of establishing voluntary conservation agreements with landholders with significant bird habitat Wildlife NPPPs

46

Establish control program to eliminate house crow and other alien predatory bird species including was te management system Wildlife NPPPs/VCGs

47

4.3.7.3

Initiate HPAI H5N1 monitoring program Wildlife NPPPs

48 Encourage return to large-meshed bottom-set gill net Fish NPPPs/VCGs

49 4.3.8.3 Review existing fisheries policy and legislation with respect to

inclusion of coral-associated fishes Fish NPPPs


05/10/2006 118

SL No.


Q3 2007 Q4 2007 -Q3 2010


50 Code of conduct for snorkeling/SCUBA diving EDOs

51 Determine requirements for mooring buoys NPPPs

52

4.3.9.3

Annual reef clean program Wildlife NPPPs

53 Introduce lobster pots with 'escape routes' for undersized lobsters Fish NPPPs

54 Encourage responsible harvesting practices including release of juveniles/brood stock crabs and lobsters trapped in gill nets Fish NPPPs/VCGs

55

4.3.10.3

Assess feasibility of establishing sustainable harvesting system for commercially important crustacean species Fish NPPPs

56 4.3.11.3 Close down shell markets in St Martin's Island, Cox's Bazar, Chittagong and Dhaka DoE

57 4.3.12.3 Encourage return of marine invertebrates caught in nets to sea

rather than beach Fish NPPPs/VCGs 58 Map location and extent of dune impacts NPPPs 59 Establish pedestrian access routes to beach NPPPs/VCGs 60 Pandanus plantation Plant NPPPs/VCGs 61 In-situ dune vegetation conservation demonstration plots Plant NPPPs/VCGs 62 Assisted regeneration of dunes via demonstration plots NPPPs/VCGs 63

4.3.14.3

Annual "beach clean" program NPPPs/VCGs

64 Assess feasibility of estab lishing voluntary conservation agreements with landholders with significant rocky land habitat Wildlife NPPPs

65

4.3.15.3

Revegetate degraded areas with Pandanus, Streblus asper etc. Plant NPPPs/VCGs 66 Establish system for prevention of waste thrown overboard DoE

67 4.3.16.3 Develop and implement system for boat oily waste water

disposal NPPPs/VCGs

68 4.3.17.3 Assess feasibility of establishing voluntary conservation agreements with landholders owning mudflat areas NPPPs

69

5.3.3.1

Establish a common understanding between MoEF and MCAT PMU/DoE


05/10/2006 119

SL No.


Q3 2007 Q4 2007 -Q3 2010


of future management of Island

70 Establish a common understanding between CWBMP and St Martin's Island Project of future management of Island PMU/DoE

71 Employ short term consultant to assist with design of awareness raising initiatives PMU

72 Awareness raising for site users as outlined in Annex 9 NPPPs/Sub contract

73 Awareness raising for local government decision makers based on Annex 9 NPPPs/Sub contract

74 Awareness raising for wider community based on Annex 9 NPPPs/Sub contract 75 Identify opportunities to work with similar programs/projects ECAMO/PMU

76

Raise awareness among community that DoE will be managing SMI as an ECA beyond life of both projects, based on a model of co-management PMU/DoE

77 Identify with community their role and responsibility as co-manager of ECA CD NPPPs

78

Identify community strengths and weaknesses with respect to those roles/responsibilities and provide capacity building training CD NPPPs

79 Assess feasibility of increasing VCG membership CD NPPPs

80

Capacity building training in developing and submitting conservation initiatives, assessing biological indicators, monitoring activity outcomes and participating in ECA management institutional setting CD NPPPs

81 Link VCGs with civil society volunteer mentors CD NPPPs

82 Identify and train individuals within VCGs willing to act as community focal points CD NPPPs

83 Prepare MOU for meaningful inclusion of VCGs in Local ECA Committee, DC Committee/Upazilla meetings NPPPs/PMU/ECAMO

84

5.3.3.2

Register VCGs with social welfare department/Joint Stock Company CD NPPPs


05/10/2006 120

SL No.


Q3 2007 Q4 2007 -Q3 2010


85 Arrange inclusion of VCG representative in Upazilla/District administrative committee/related committees ECAMO

86 Draft policy to give community legal authority to co-manage ECAs

Sub-contract/DoE/VCGs

87 Develop a reliable communications system for VCGs to enable timely participation in ECA management PMU

88

Establish a system for annual CWBMP/government recognition of VCG achievements with respect to biodiversity conservation/active ECA co-management PMU/DoE

89 Link VCGs to local government service providers and NGOs to ensure access to support mechanisms CD NPPPs

90

Create common account fund for VCGs and savings system for emergencies and start-up loans as established under ECFCP PMU

91 Assess progress of ECFCP in development of AIGAs/livelihoods and lessons learnt CD NPPPs

92

Prepare guidelines for development of AIGAs/livelihoods based on ECFCP lessons learnt and biodiversity conservation guidelines CD NPPPs

93 Draft list of feasible AIGAs/livelihoods with community and rank in order of community interest CD NPPPs/VCGs

94 Prepare guidelines for agricultural-based alternatives AEO/HEO NPPPs

95 Demonstrate agriculture best-practice methods via awareness raising and demonstration plots AEO/HEO NPPPs

98 Establish maize as a food, fodder and fuel alternative AEO/HEO NPPPs 99 Provide credit support for establishing feasible alternatives PMU

100 Provide training in and opportunity for developing AIGAs related to ecotourism EDO NPPPs

101

5.3.3.3

Assist marketing requirements for all relevant alternatives developed NPPPs/Sub-contract

102 5.3.3.4 Raise awareness among local community of need for

community-based enforcement DoE/Sub-contract


05/10/2006 121

SL No.


Q3 2007 Q4 2007 -Q3 2010


103 Identify community members willing to participate in community enforcement NPPPs

104 Raise awareness among community of main enforcement problems DoE/Sub-contract

105 Draft guidelines for operation of program of community-based enforcement

DoE/Sub-contrac t/VCGs

106 Train participants in implementing and monitoring enforcement program DoE/Sub-contract

107

Implement DoE/community enforcement program for species and habitat protection DoE/VCGs

108 Develop tourism policy for site in collaboration with MCAT EDOs/VCGs

109 Extend ECA regulations to include rules for tourism development based on policy developed in No. 108 above PMU/DoE/BELA

110 Prepare draft Ecotourism Master Plan in collaboration with MCAT based on policy developed in No.108 above EDO NPPPs/VCGs

111 Finalise master plan and have it approved and endorsed EDO NPPPs

112 Implement plan in collaboration with MCAT/BPC, local community and tourism service providers PMU/DoE

113 Raise awareness of all stakeholders as outlined in Section 6.3.3 (B) EDOs

114 Raise awareness among the same group of ecotourism best practices EDOs

115 Calculate current carrying capacity and set quotas for visitation based on calculation EDOs

116 Place moratorium on any further infrastructure development until ECA tourism policy finalised DoE

117 Develop and implement ecotourism standards and best-practice guidelines EDOs

118 Engage current tourism providers in conservation activities PMU/EDOs

119

Establish checkpoints at entry/departure points to monitor numbers DoE


05/10/2006 122

SL No.


Q3 2007 Q4 2007 -Q3 2010


120 Develop and introduce sewerage disposal and waste management system DoE/PMU

121 Develop and enforce strict regulations on use of ground water DoE/PMU

122 Assess feasibility of establishing energy alternatives for generators and fuelwood NPPPs

123 Ban and control culturally insensitive behaviour EDOs

124

Develop joint community-based/DoE monitoring and surveillance program for tourism management and development EDOs/DOE

125 Finalise draft ecotourism programs for site (Annex 13) and implement (see Section 6.3.3 (C)) EDOs/PMU

126 Assess facilities/infrastructure requirements for ecotourism programs finalised in 126 above EDOs/PMU/DOE

127

Prepare an MOU between DoE/MoEF and MCAT clarifying roles, responsibilities and coordination with respect to tourism in the ECA EDO NPPPs

128

Coordinate with the St Martin's Island Project/MoEF on all tourism management and development initiative at the site EDO NPPPs

129 Employ short term consultant to assist with planning and provision of interpretation at the site PMU

130

7.2 Plan for provision of interpretation at the site based on needs identified under ecotourism development plan

Sub-contract/EDO NPPPs

131 Seek commitment form DoE to establish Cox's Bazar ECAMU as permanent DoE office for ECA management DoE

132 Ensure ECAMO position at Deputy Director level DoE 133 Establish representation of DoE at Teknaf Upazilla HQ DoE

134 Station entry-level officer at SMI Union Parishad to act as ECA ranger DoE

135

8.3

Assess post-CWBMP staffing needs of ECAMU at Cox's Bazar and staff accordingly with those qualified in biological sciences DoE


05/10/2006 123

SL No.


Q3 2007 Q4 2007 -Q3 2010


136 Assess long term ECA management funding requirements and feasibility of alternatives PMU/DoE

137 Assess scope for securing funding from international organisations funding biodiversity conservation work PMU/DoE

138 Policy analysis relevant to ECAs and identifying conflicts; draft ECA policy to address conflicts PMU/DoE

142 Include legitimisation of VCGs in ECA policy developed PMU/DoE

143 Draft ECA-specific ecotourism policy as part of general ECA policy

EDO NPPPs/DoE/PMU

144

Incorporate conservation incentives (financial and non-financial) and scope for voluntary conservation agreements between landholders and DoE in ECA policy PMU/DoE

145

Determine requirements for establishing certification of ECAs under internationally recognised categories of protected areas; include alignment in ECA policy PMU/DoE

145

Incorporate ECA policy developed in CMP and revise management objectives and actions in light of policy developed PMU/ECAMO/NPPPs

146

Enforce ECA regulations and collaborate with other government agencies to do the same with other relevant legislation DoE

147 Seek assistance from DoE Chittagong in enforcement of law and ECA regulations DoE

148 Assess requirements for amendments to BECA 1995 to accommodate legislation for effective management of ECAs PMU/DoE

149 Finalise compilation of new ECA rules based on draft list in Annex 8; forward to DoE for review and promulgation

NPPPs/BELA/DoE/PMU

150 Ensure legislation legitimises role of VCGs as co-managers NPPPs/BELA/DoE/PMU

151 Enforce and monitor implementation of new rules DoE/VCGs

152

Establish and implement community-based enforcement (5.3.3.4) DoE/VCGs


05/10/2006 124

SL No.


Q3 2007 Q4 2007 -Q3 2010


153 Establish and maintain Local ECA Committee PMU/DoE

154 Collaborate with MRDM with respect to disaster management in ECA ECAMO

155 Collaborate with Coastguard in ECA management DoE

156

Collaborate with local government to improve system of government leasing in ECA/collaborate with MoL to stop leasing land in ECAs ECAMO

157

Collaborate with relevant government departments to discourage further settlement at site and MoH to control natural population growth at site ECAMO

158

Collect information on any future development plans for site by other government departments and address impacts of these to decision makers ECAMO

159

Provide training for ECAMO position in biodiversity conservation and protected area management including conservation management planning PMU/DoE

160

Seek commitment from DOE to retain a core of staff trained in those areas listed in No. 148 to maintain conservation management capacity of office post-CWBMP DoE

161

Seek commitment from DoE to minimise staff turnover in ECAMO position until core of trained personnel available for role DoE

162

Seek commitment from DoE that personnel transferred out of ECAMO position retain role as mentor to ECA management personnel and retain position in PA management DoE

163 10 Establish database for management action recording as described in Section 10 PMU

164 Conduct annual review of site management in accordance with CMP as outlined in Section 11.1 PMU/VCGs

165 Conduct long-term review of CMP as described in Section 11.2 DoE/VCGs 166

11

Conduct audit of site as described in Section 11.3 External auditors


05/10/2006 125

10. MANAGEMENT ACTION RECORDING It is essential that records for all monitoring, management activities, significant events and surveys be maintained. It is important that recording is carried out as an integral part of management, not least because the annual and long-term reviews of the implementation of the management plan (Section 11) will depend entirely on that information. It is also important for the dissemination of information relating to conservation management globally. Information needs to be accessible, thus data need to be collected and stored using accessible and standard systems. A database to manage site data is essential and needs to be developed so that data for all ECA sites can be shared. The replicability of the model of ECA management being developed under CWBMP will be facilitated if information can be shared over all sites. The database should be able to at least:

• Maintain site records • Present reports in an efficient and effective manner • Be used to update and amend the conservation management plan • Fulfil the information requirements of organisations and individuals • Ensure current data are readily available • Provide data for national or regional surveys • Provide a record of management and site conditions that can be used to demonstrate

effective and appropriate site management • Highlight failings and inappropriate management

The indicators for an ecological monitoring program are provided in Section 4.2, under each species and habitat. The indicators will change as further information becomes available, as they have been drafted based on limited information of the status of species and habitats within the site. Nevertheless, these indicators should be compiled into a database as soon as possible. The compilation of indicator data should be based on participatory monitoring and evaluation with the local community. An example of software for conservation management planning and recording that covers all database requirements listed above is provided by CMS (www.esdm.co.uk/cms ), which is now (de-facto) the British national operations standard for conservation management. The website provides a demonstration model, which is worth looking at.


05/10/2006 126

11. CMP REVIEW & ECA AUDIT 11.1 Annual Review The objective of the annual review is to ensure that the site is being managed in accordance with the approved conservation management plan and that any serious, unexpected events or trends that could affect management are taken into account. It is also an opportunity for the field-based site management team (ECAMU office, Cox’s Bazar, and Teknaf sub-office, Teknaf) during the life of CWBMP) to present the preceding year’s work. The management team responsible for the site (PMU, DoE, HQ during the life of CWBMP; ECA Cell, DoE, HQ post-CWBMP) will conduct an objective appraisal of the preceding year’s work in collaboration with the site management team, reach an agreement on the next annual work plan taking into consideration the following:

• all high priority activities should have been completed and all lesser activities reported on; • satisfactory explanations should be sought for any high priority activities not completed; • shortfalls in achievement and performance for any activities should be noted and recorded

against the individual activity, and any necessary adjustments made to the activity record and/or next annual plan;

• if the amount of resources available for site management changes, i.e. increases or decreases, priorities should be reassessed.

The local community, particularly VCGs, should be included in the annual review. 11.2 Long-term Review The conservation management plan requires a major review at predetermined intervals in order to determine the status of the species and habitats of the site. Given the highly threatened nature of the site, a long-term review is recommended at least every three years. The function of the review is to ensure that:

• the objectives and actions stated in the plan are still relevant; and • management has been and will continue to be effective in achieving the desired objectives.

An assessment of the status of species and habitats identified in the management plan should be made, based on whether they are favourable, unfavourable, declining, improving or maintained. Those responsible for the review are as for 11.1 above, and again should include the local community, particularly the VCGs. 11.3 Audit An audit, which should be considered an essential component of the planning process, should be conducted every five years. The audit will function to:

• Assess whether or not the site is being managed at least to the standard required by the Department of Environment.

• Confirm as far as possible that management is effective and efficient. • Ensure that the status of the site’s species and habitats is accurately reported. • Provide an opportunity for the site management team to discuss any issues relating the site

with the audit team.


05/10/2006 127

If an audit identifies any issues or problems that need to be addressed between audits, additional intermediary audits may be arranged at the discretion of the audit team or at the request of senior management. 11.3.1 Personnel The audit team should comprise:

• Auditors – external consultants or independent staff from an auditing group/department • Site manager, Cox’s Bazar office • Personnel responsible for managing site staff • Other relevant staff may be invited to attend

11.3.2 Procedure An audit will comprise two stages:

• An examination of the management plan and the adopted activity planning and recording system

• A site visit/inspection The site (field) manager will be required to provide a copy of the current management plan, annual work plan and long-term work plan prior to the audit date. In addition to these the audit team will inspect the current version of the activity planning and recording system. 11.3.3 Reporting A draft audit report will be sent to the site management team, Cox’s Bazar, for their comment on its accuracy. This will be returned to the audit team which will then send an amended audit report, including observations and recommendations, to both the site manager (Cox’s Bazar) and management (Dhaka). Responses of management (Dhaka) must be returned to the audit team, which will then submit a final version to management (Dhaka). The final version will identify agreed management responses and actions, together with the personnel responsible for ensuring these are undertaken and deadlines for action. The contents of the audit report should include:

1. Appraisal of management plan 2. Appraisal of the recording systems and work plans 3. Site inspection (OUTPUTS)

a. Check for compliance with the plan b. Check for any unplanned/unauthorised activities c. Check condition of the site infrastructure and facilities

4. Resources (INPUTS) a. Finance b. Staff c. Other resources (machinery, tools, vehicles etc.) d. Infrastructure

5. Feature (species/habitats) assessment (OUTCOMES) 6. Summary of recommendations and management responses


05/10/2006 128

Annex 1: Marine algae recorded at St Martin’s Island

Habitat

Sl No Species Name Family Name Habit Macro Micro

National

Status

1 Acrochaetium bengalicum Rhodophyceae F E VU

2 Acrochaetium crassipes Rhodophyceae F E VU

3 Goniotrichum alsidii Rhodophyceae F E VU

4 Erythrocladia subintegra Rhodophyceae TH E VU 5 Erythrotrichia carnea Rhodophyceae TH E VU 6 Liagora ceranoides Rhodophyceae TH R VU 7 Actinotrichia fragilis Rhodophyceae TH R VU 8 Scinaia complanate Rhodophyceae TH R VU 9 Galaxaura fastigiata Rhodophyceae TH R VU 10 Gelidiella tenuissima Rhodophyceae TH R VU 11 Gelidium pusillum Rhodophyceae TH R VU 12 Jania adhaerens Rhodophyceae TH R VU 13 Jania ungulata Rhodophyceae TH R VU 14 Amphiroa fragilissima Rhodophyceae TH R VU 15 Melobesia confervicola Rhodophyceae TH R E VU 16 Hypnea musciformis Rhodophyceae TH R E VU 17 Hypnea pannosa Rhodophyceae TH R E VU 18 Sarconema jurcellatum Rhodophyceae TH R E VU 19 Catenella impudica Rhodophyceae TH E VU 20 Champia parvula Rhodophyceae VU 21 chrysymenia okamuri Rhodophyceae VU 22 Halymania duchassaignii Rhodophyceae VU 23 Asparagopsis taxiformis Rhodophyceae TH R VU 24 Antithamnion sp. Rhodophyceae TH E VU 25 Callithamnion sp. Rhodophyceae TH R E VU 26 Centroceras clavulatum Rhodophyceae TH R VU 27 Ceramium fastigiatum Rhodophyceae TH E VU 28 C. gracillimum Rhodophyceae TH E VU 29 C. tenerrimum + other spp. Rhodop hyceae TH VU 30 Dasya pedicillata Rhodophyceae TH R VU


05/10/2006 129

Habitat


National

Status

31 Calliblepharis sp. Rhodophyceae TH R VU 32 Heterosiphonia sp. Rhodophyceae TH R VU 33 Caloglossa leprieuri Rhodophyceae TH R VU 34 Vanvoorstia coccinea Rhodophyceae TH R VU 35 Cottoniella filamentosa Rhodophyceae TH R E VU 36 Polysiphonia denudata Rhodophyceae TH E VU 37 Polysiphonia mollis + other spp. Rhodophyceae TH VU 38 Tolypiocladia glomerulata Rhodophyceae TH R VU 39 Acanthophora specifera Rhodophyceae TH R VU 40 Bos trychia radicans Rhodophyceae TH R VU 41 Bostrychia tenella Rhodophyceae TH R VU

42 Herposiphonia dendroidea var.

minor

Rhodophyceae TH R

VU

43 Herposiphonia tenella fa.

secumda

Rhodophyceae TH R

VU

44 Laurencia obtusa + other spp. Rhodophyceae TH R VU 45 Lithothamnion sp. Rhodophyceae TH R VU 46 Crouania attenuata Rhodophyceae TH R VU 47 Lophocladia trichociados Rhodophyceae TH R VU 48 Ectocarpus breviarticulatus Phaeophyceae TH E VU

49 E. rhodochortonoides + other

sp.

Phaeophyceae TH E VU

50 Giffordia conifera Phaeophyceae TH E VU 51 Giffordia irregularis Phaeophyceae TH E VU 52 Giffordia mitchellae Phaeophyceae TH E VU 53 Giffordia rallsae Phaeophyceae TH E VU 54 Giffordia thyrsoideus Phaeophyceae TH E VU 55 Feldmannia columellaris Phaeophyceae TH E VU 56 Feldmannia elachistaeformis Phaeophyceae TH E VU 57 Feldmannia indica Phaeophyceae TH E VU 58 Feldmannia vaughani Phaeophyceae TH E VU 59 Sphacelaria tribuloides Phaeophyceae TH E VU 60 Sphacelaria tribuloides Phaeophyceae TH E VU 61 S. novae-hollandiae fa. Phaeophyceae TH E VU


05/10/2006 130

Habitat


National

Status

62 Dectyota bratayresii Phaeophyceae TH R VU 63 Dectyota dechotoma Phaeophyceae TH R VU 64 Dectyota divaricata Phaeophyceae TH R VU 65 Dectyota friabilis Phaeophyceae TH R VU 66 Dectyota patens Phaeophyceae TH R VU 67 Dictyopteris australis Phaeophyceae TH R VU 68 Dictyopteris sp. Phaeophyceae TH R VU 69 Lobophora variegata Phaeophyceae TH R VU 70 Padina australis Phaeophyceae TH R VU 71 Padina tenuis Phaeophyceae TH R VU 72 Padina gymnospora Phaeophyceae TH R VU 73 Padina pavonica Phaeophyceae TH R VU 74 Padina sanctae-crucis Phaeophyceae TH R VU 75 Padina tetrastromatica Phaeophyceae TH R VU 76 Padina vickersiae Phaeophyceae TH R VU 77 Myriactula aravica Phaeophyceae TH VU 78 chnoospora implexa Phaeophyceae TH R VU 79 Colpomenia sinuosa Phaeophyceae TH R VU 80 Hydroclathrus clathratus Phaeophyceae TH R VU 81 Rosenvingea intricata Phaeophyceae TH R VU 82 Rosenvingea orientalis Phaeophyceae TH R VU 83 Rosenvingea sanctae-crucis Phaeophyceae TH R VU 84 Sargassum caryophyllum Phaeophyceae TH R VU 85 Sargassum flavicans Phaeophyceae TH R VU 86 Sargassum ilicifolium Phaeophyceae TH R VU 87 Sargassum piluliferum Phaeophyceae TH R VU 88 Sargassum vulgare Phaeophyceae TH R VU 89 Sargassum wightii Phaeophyceae TH R VU 90 S. spp. (unidentified) Phaeophyceae TH R VU 91 Enteromorpha clathrata Chlorophyceae TH R VU 92 Enteromorpha compressa Chlorophyceae TH R VU 93 Enteromorpha intestinalis Chlorophyceae TH R VU 94 Enteromorpha prolifera Chlorophyceae TH R VU 95 Ulva lactuca Chlorophyceae TH R VU


05/10/2006 131

Habitat


National

Status

96 Chaetomorpha aerea Chlorophyceae TH E VU 97 Chaetomorpha brachygona Chlorophyceae TH E VU 98 Cha etomorpha gracilis Chlorophyceae TH E VU 99 Chaetomorpha linum Chlorophyceae TH E VU

100 Lola capillaris Chlorophyceae TH E VU 101 Lola implexa Chlorophyceae TH VU 102 Lola tortuosa Chlorophyceae TH VU 103 Rhizoclonium grandae Chlorophyceae TH VU 104 Rhizoclonium hookeri Chlorophyceae TH VU 105 Rhizoclonium kerneri Chlorophyceae TH VU 106 Rhizoclonium riparium Chlorophyceae TH VU 107 Cladophora echinus Chlorophyceae TH R VU 108 Cladophora patentiramea Chlorophyceae TH R VU 109 Dictyosphaeria cavernosa Chlorophyceae TH R VU 110 Boodlea composita Chlorophyceae TH R VU 111 Bryopsis indica Chlorophyceae TH R VU 112 Caulerpa cactoides Chlorophyceae TH R VU 113 Caulerpa peltata Chlorophyceae TH R VU 114 Caulerpa racemosa var.

clavifera Chlorophyceae TH R VU

115 Caulerpa racemosa var. occidentalis

Chlorophyceae TH R VU

116 Caulerpa racemosa var. turbinata


117 Caulerpa racemosa var. uvifera Chlorophyceae TH R VU 118 Caulerpa sealpelliformis Chlorophyceae TH R VU 119 Caulerpa sertularioides Chlorophyceae TH R VU

120 Caulerpa sertularioides fa. brevipes


121 Caulerpa taxifolia Chlorophyceae TH R VU 122 Halimeda discoidea Chlorophyceae TH R VU 123 Halimeda opuntia Chlorophyceae TH R VU 124 Acetabularia calyculus Chlorophyceae TH R VU 125 Codium geppei Chlorophyceae TH R VU 126 Xenococcus chaetomorphae Cyanophyceae TH E VU 127 Xenococcus cladophorae Cyanophyceae TH E VU 128 Aphanothece castagnei & A. Cyanophyceae TH E VU


05/10/2006 132

Habitat


National

Status

pallida. 129 Merismopedia glauca Cyanophyceae FC Floating VU 130 Ocillatoria amoena Cyanophyceae F E VU 131 Ocillatoria margaretifera Cyanophyceae F E VU 132 Ocillatoria martini Cyanophyceae F E VU 133 Ocillatoria subbrevis Cyanophyceae F E VU 134 Ocillatoria tenuis Cyanophyceae F E VU 135 Lyngbya allorgei Cyanophyceae F E VU 136 L. confervoides & L. contorta Cyanophyceae F E VU 137 L. hieronymusii Cyanophyceae F E VU 138 L. lutea Cyanophyceae F E VU 139 L. magnifica Cyanophyceae F E VU 140 Hydrocoleum cantharidosum Cyanophyceae F E VU 141 Microcoleus chthonoplastes Cyanophyceae F E VU 142 Plectonema wollei Cyanophyceae F E VU 143 Anabaena variabilis Cyanophyceae F E VU 144 Nostoc commune (?) Cyanophyceae TH E VU 145 Scytonema siculum Cyanophyceae TH E VU 146 Scytonema saleyeriense Cyanophyceae TH E VU 147 Calothrix confervicola Cyanophyceae TH E VU 148 Calothrix parasitica Cyanophyceae TH E VU 149 Calothrix crustacea Cyanophyceae TH E VU 150 Calothrix scopulorum Cyanophyceae TH E VU 151 Calothrix rarietina Cyanophyceae TH E VU 152 Halophila decipiens Hydrocharitaceae

153 Halodule pinifolia Cymodoceaceae

154 Halodule uninervis Cymodoceaceae

Notes: Habit: TH = Thalloid/micro- or macro thailus; F = Filamentous, microscopic Habit at: E = Epiphyte on other marine macro algae; R = On rocks/entangled with other seaweeds under sea water in the intertidal zone. National Status: VU = Vulnerable Source: 1) MoEF (2001b), Survey of Flora, National Conservation Strategy (NCS) Implementation Project-1. 2) Kamal, Dr Abu Hena M. “Sonadia and St Martin’s Islands Conservation Management Plans “. Email to Lee-Anne Molony, 28 August 2006.


05/10/2006 133

Annex 2: Angiospermic plant species recorded at St Martin’s Island

Sl No S pecies Name Local Name(s) Family Name Habit IUCN

Cat

National

status

1 Abelmoschus moschatus Kalokasturi Malvaceae H/S DD NE

2 Abrus precatorius Kunch Leguminosae C LR(cd) NE

3 Acacia tarnesiana Bilati babul Leguminosae T NE NE

4 Achyranthes aspera Apang Amaranthaceae H NE NE

5 Adenosma indianum Borokesuti Scrophulariaceae H NE NE

6 Aegiceras corniculatum Halse Myrsinaceae H NE NE

7 Ageratum conyzoides Fulkcuri Compositae H DD NE

8 Altemanthera paronychiodes Amaranthaceae H NE NE

9 Altemanthera sessilis Chanchi Amaranthaceae H DD NE

10 Alysicarpus vaginalis Pannata Papilionaceae H NE NE

11 Amaranthus gangeticus Amaranthaceae H NE NE

12 Amaranthus spinosus Kantanotey Amaranthaceae H NE NE

13 Amaranthus viridis Noteyshk Amaranthaceae H NE NE

14 Amiscophcellus axillaris Commelinaceae H NE NE 15 Ammania baccifera Dadmari Lythraceae H NE NE 16 Anisomeles indica Gobura Ladiatae H DD NE 17 Atylosia scarabaeoides Banukalai Leguminosae H/C DD NE

18 Bacopa monniera Brahmi shak Scrophulariaceae H DD NE 19 Bergia ammannioides Elatinaceae H DD NE

20 Bergia capensis lalkesuria Elatinaceae H DD NE 21 Blumea aurita Compositae H NE NE 22 Blumea laciniata Compositae H NE NE 23 Boetraavia repens Punarnava Nyctagi nacae H NE NE

24 Brachiaria distachya Gramineae H NE NE 25 Caesalpinia crista Letkanta Caesalpinoideas C DD NE

26 Calotropis gigantea Asclepiadaceac S NE NE 27 Calycopteris floribunda Akanda Asclepiadaceac S NE NE 28 Canna indica Goache lata Combretaceae H NE NE

29 Canscora diffusa kalabati Cannaceae H NE NE 30 Carissa carandas kanrancha Gentianaceae S NE NE 31 Cassia occidentalis Borokalkesunda Laguminosae H NE NE 32 Cassia tora Toraj Laguminosae H NE NE

33 Cassytha filiformis Akashbel Cassythaceae p NE NE


05/10/2006 134


Cat

National

status

34 Centella asiatica Thankuni Umberlliferae H NE NE 35 Ceriops decandra Goran Rhizophoraceae T NE NE 36 Chenopodium album Batuashak Chenopodiaceae H NE NE 37 Cleorodendrun inerme Bonjai verbenaceae H NE NE

38 Clerodendrun viscosum Bhant verbenaceae H NE NE 39 Coldenia procumbens Boraginaceae H DD NE

40 Commelina benghalensis Tripankhi Commelinacae H NE NE 41 Commelina diffusa Commelinacae H DD NE 42 Cotula hemispherica Babuni Compositae H NE NE 43 Crinum sp. Amaryllidaceae H DD NE

44 Crotalaria pallida Jhunjhuni Leguminosae H NE NE 45 Crotalaria sp. Leguminosae H NE NE 46 Croton bonplandianus Euphorbiaceae H NE NE

47 Cynometra ramiflora Singor Leguminosae H DD NE 48 Cyperus compressus chancha Cyperaceae H NE NE

49 Cyperus iria Bara chancha Cyperaceae H NE NE 50 Cyperus kyllinga Nirbishi Cyperaceae H NE NE 51 Cyperus sp. Cyperaceae H NE NE 52 Cyperus substramineus Cyperaceae H NE NE

53 Cyperus tenuispica Cyperaceac H NE NE 54 cyrtococcum accrescens Gramineac H NE NE

55 Dactyloctenium aegyptiacum Makra Gramineac O NE NE 56 Datura metel Duttara Solanaceae H DD NE 57 Dentella repens Bhuopat Rubiaceae H NE NE 58 Derris sp. Legumosae C NE NE

59 Desmodium triflorum Kulaliya Legumosae H NE NE 60 Desmodium umbellatum Legumosae T DD NE

61 Digitaria longiflora Gramineac H NE NE 62 Dimeria ornithopoda Gramineae H DD NE 63 Echinochloa colounm Shymaghas Gramineac H NE NE 64 Echinochloa colonum Kalokeshi Compositae H NE NE

65 Eleocharis congesta Baro keruti Cyperaceae H NE NE 66 Eleusine indica Malangakuri Gramineac H NE NE

67 Eragrostis coarctata Gramineac H NE NE 68 Eragrostis pooides Gramineac H NE NE 69 Eragrostis tenella koni Gramineac H NE NE


05/10/2006 135


Cat

National

status

70 Eriocaulon luzulaefolium Eriocaulaceae H NE NE 71 Eriocaulon sp. Eriocaulaceae H NE NE 72 Eriochloa procera Nalghas Gramineac H NE NE 73 Euphorbia hirta Ghaspata Euphorbiaceae H NE NE

74 Euphorbia thymifolia Dudhia Euphorbiaceae H NE NE 75 Ficus sp. Moraceae H NE NE

76 Fimbristylis acuminata Cyperaceae H NE NE 77 Fimbristylis miliacea Bara jabani Cyperaceac H NE NE 78 Flagellaria indica Banschand Flagellariaceae C DD NE 79 Glycine max Soabean Leguminosae H NE NE

80 Grangea herbaceum Karpas Malvaceae H NE NE 81 Grangea madaraspatana Nagphul Compositae H NE NE 82 Grewia sp. Tiliaceae S NE NE

83 Hedyotis corymbosa Khet papra Rubiaceae H NE 84 Hiliotropium indicum Hatishur Boraginaceae H NE

85 Hibiscus tiliaceus Bola Malvaceae T NE 86 Hydrocotyle sibthorpioides Umbrelliferae H DD NE 87 Hygrophila phlomoides Acanthaceae H NE NE 88 Hygrophila polysperma Acanthaceae H NE NE

89 Hygrophila quadrivalvis Acanthaceae H NE NE 90 Hyptis suaveolens Labiatae H NE NE

91 Ichnocarpus frutescens Apocynaceae C NE 92 Ipomaea mexicana Dudlata Convolvulaceae C DD NE 93 Ipomaea pes -caprae Convolvulaceae C NE NE 94 Ischacmun indicum Gramineae H NE NE

95 Jatropha curcas Euphorbiaceae S NE NE 96 Justicia genderussa Acanthaceae S NE NE

97 Lantana camara Verbebnaceae S NE NE 98 Launaea pinnaifida Compositae H DD NE 99 Leucas zeylanica Labiatae H DD NE

100 Limnophila repens Dondokalas Scrophulariaceae H DD NE

101 Lindernia antipoda Scrophulariaceae H NE NE 102 Lindernia rotundifolia Scrophulariaceae H NE NE

103 Lindernia sp. Scrophulariaceae H NE NE 104 Linum usitatissimum Linaceae T NE NE 105 Ludwigia hyssopifolia Onagraceae H NE NE


05/10/2006 136


Cat

National

status

106 Luffa cylindrica Dhundul Cucurbitaceae H NE NE 107 Lumnitzera racemosa Combretaceae S NE NE 108 Merremia umbellata Convolvulaceae C NE NE 109 Murdannia nudiflora Commelinaceae H NE NE

110 Najas graminea Najadaceae H DD NE 111 Operculina turpethum Convolvulaceae C DD NE

112 Oroxylum indicum Bignoniaceae T NE NE 113 Pandanus foetidus Pandanaceae H NE NE 114 Pandanus odoratissimus Pandanaceae T NE NE 115 Paspalum vaginatum Gramineae H NE NE

116 Phaulopsis dorsiflorus Acanthaceae H NE NE 117 Phragmites karka Gramineae S NE NE 118 Phyla nodiflora Verbebnaceae H NE NE

119 Phyllanthus distichus Euphorbiaceae S NE NE 120 Phyllanthus reticulatus Euphorbiaceae S NE NE

121 Physalis minima Solanaceae H NE NE 122 Pongamia pinnata Leguminosae T NE NE 123 Portulaca oleracea Portulacaceae H NE NE 124 Pouzolzia indica Urticaceae H NE NE

125 Psophocarpus tetragonolobus Leguminosae C NE NE 126 Ricinus communis Euphorbiaceae S NE NE

127 Rotala beccifera Lythraceae H NE NE 128 Rotala indica Lythraceae H NE NE 129 Rungia pectinata Acanthaceae H NE NE 130 Saccharum arundinaceum Gramineae H DD NE

131 Scirpus erectus Cyperaceae H NE NE 132 Scirpus supinus Cyperaceae H NE NE

133 Scirpus triqueter Cyperaceae H NE NE 134 Scoparia dulcis Scrophulariaceae H NE NE 135 Sesuvium protulacastrum Aizoaceae H DD NE 136 Side acuta Malvaceae H NE NE

137 Sida cordifolia Malvaceae H NE NE 138 Sida cordata Malvaceae H NE NE

139 Solanum torvum Solanaceae H NE NE 140 Sporobolus tremulus Gramineae H NE NE 141 Stictocardia tiliaefolia Convolvulaceae C DD NE


05/10/2006 137


Cat

National

status

142 Streblus asper Urticaceae T NE NE 143 Tephrosia purpurea Leguminosae H NE NE 144 Tetrastigma bracteolatum Bon nil Vitaceae C DD NE 145 Thespesia populnea Malvaceae S DD NE

146 Tinospora cordifolia Menispermaceae C DD NE 147 Triumfetta bracteata Tiliaceae H NE NE

148 Urena lobata Malvaceae H NE NE 149 Vemonia patula Kuksin Compositae H NE NE 150 Vitex negundo Verbenaceae T NE NE 151 Vitex trifolia Verbenaceae S NE NE

152 Vitex negundo Nishinda Vitaceae C NE NE 153 Wahlenbergia gracilis Companulaceae H DD NE 154 Wahlenbergia marginata Companulaceae H DD NE

155 Woodfordia fruticosa Lythraceae S DD NE 156 Xanthium indicum Dhai phul Compositae H NE NE

157 Zizphus mauitiana Kulaiya Rhamnaceae T NE NE

Notes Habit: H = Herb; S = Shrub; T = Tree; C = Climber

IUCN Categories /National Status: CR = Critically Endangered ; EN = Endangered; VU = Vulnerable; LR = Lower Risk ;

DD = Data Deficient; NE = Not Evaluated

Source: MoEF (2001b), Survey of Flora, National Conservation Strategy (NCS) Implementation Project-


05/10/2006 138

Annex 3: Cryptogamic plant species (other than marine algae) recorded at St Martin’s Island

Sl No Species Name Family Name Habit IUCN Category National status

1 Barvula leucodontoides Pottiaceae M NE NE 2 Bryum coronatum Bryaceae M NE NE 3 Bryum coronatum Bryaceae M NE NE 4 Bryum coronatum Bryaceae M NE NE 5 Bryum nitens Bryaceae M NE NE 6 Calyperes andamense Calymperaceae M NE NE 7 Calyperes andamense Calymperaceae M NE NE 8 Calyperes andamense Calymperaceae M NE NE 9 Calyperes burmense Calymperaceae M NE NE 10 Calyperes burmense Calymperaceae M NE NE 11 Calyperes kurzianum Calymperaceae M NE NE 12 Garckea phascoides Ditrichaceae M NE NE 13 Gymnostomiella orcuttii Splachnaceae M NE NE 14 Hyophila involuta Pottiaceae M NE NE 15 Philonotis mollis Batramiaceae M NE NE 16 Pleurocarpus moss M NE NE 17 Pleurocarpus moss M NE NE 18 Pleurocarpus moss M NE NE

Notews: Habit: M = Moss IUCN Categories /National Status: CR= Critically Endangered; EN = Endangered; VU = Vulnerable; LR = Lower Risk ; DD = Data Deficient; NE = Not Evaluated Source: MoEF (2001b), Survey of Flora, National Conservation Strategy (NCS) Implementation Project-


05/10/2006 139

Annex 4: Mammals recorded at St Martin’s Island

Sl. No.

Scientific name Common name Local name

ORDER: INSECTIVORA FAMILY: Soricidae

1 Suncus murinus Grey musk shrew, White tailed shrew Chikchiki, Chucho

ORDER: CHIROPTERA FAMILY: Pteropodidae

2 Pteropus giganteus Fruit bat, Flying fox Badur 3 Rousettus leschenaulti Fulvous Fruit bat Kola badur

FAMILY: Vespertilionidae 4 Pipistrellus coromandra Indian pipistrelle Chamchika 5 Pipistrellus mimus Indian Pigmy pipistrelle Cham

ORDER: CETACEA FAMILY: Balaenopteridae

6 Balaenopterus musculus Blue whale Nil timi 7 Megaptera novaeangliae 8 Sausa chinensis Indian humpback whale Hump back timi

FAMILY: Phocaenidae 9 Neophocaena phocaenoides Finless porpoise Shushuk

FAMILY: Delphinidae 10 Delphinus delphis Common dolphin 11 Orcaella brevirostris Irrawaddy dolphin, River dolphin Shishu, Shushuk 12 Peponocephala electra Broadbeaked dolphin Shishu, Shushuk 13 Tursiops truncatus Bottlenose dolphin 14 Stenella longirostris Spinner dolphin

ORDER : RODENTIA FAMILY: Muridae

15 Bandicota bengalensis Lesser bandicoot rat, Mole rat Dhari idur 16 Bandicota indica Large bandicoot rat Bara dhari idur 17 Mus musculus House mouse Nangti idur 18 Rattus norvegicus Brown rat Idur 19 Rattus rattus Black rat Kala idur 20 Vandeleuira oleracea Long tailed tree mouse Gecho idur

Source: 1. MoEF (2001b), Survey of Fauna, National Conservation Strategy (NCS) Implementation Project-1. 2. Islam, M.Z. (2001), Draft Final Report, St Martin Pilot Project, National Conservation Strategy Implementation Project-1.


05/10/2006 140

Annex 5: Birds recorded at St Martin’s Island

Sl. No.

Common name Scientific name Local name

PODICIPEDIFORMES: Podicipedidae 1 Little Grebe Tachybaptus ruficollis

PELECANIFORMES: Phalacrocoracidae 2 Great Cormorant Phalacrocorax carbo Bara panikowri 3 Little Cormorant Phalacrocorax niger Chotao pankowri

CICONIIFORMES: Ardeidae 4 Black Bittern Ixobrychus flavicollis 5 Black-crowned Night -Heron Nycticorax nycticorax Ratchora, Wak

6 Cattle Egret Bubulcus ibis Gobog 7 Cinnamon Bittern Ixobrychus cinnamomeus 8 Gray Heron Ardea cinerea Dushar ghag 9 Great Egret Ardea alba Bara bog 10 Indian Pond-Heron Ardeola grayii Kani bog, Korchey bok 11 Intermediate Egret Egretta intermedia Majhari bog 12 Litte Bittern Ixobrychus minutus 13 Little Egret Egretta garzetta Choto bog 14 Purple Heron Ardea purpurea Khairi ghag, Buguni bog 15 Yellow Bittern Ixobrychus sinensis

CICONIIFORMES: Ciconiidae 16 Asian Openbill Anastomus oscitans Shamukhol

CICONIIFORMES: Threskiornithidae 17 Black-headed Ibis Threskiornis melanocephalus Kachichora, Kastechora

ANSERIFORMES: Anatidae 18 Cotton Pygmy-goose Nettapus coromandelianus Bali hash 19 Fulvous Whistling-Duck Dendrocygna bicolor Sharali 20 Lesser Whistling-Duck Dendrocygna javanica Bara sharali 21 Ruddy Shelduck Tadorna ferruginea Chakha chokhi

FALCONIFORMES: Pandionidae 22 Osprey Pandion haliaetus

FALCONIFORMES: Accipitridae 23 Black Kite Milvus migrans Bhuban cheel 24 Brahminy Kite Haliastur indus Shankho cheel 25 Pied Harrier Circus melanoleucos Rakhalbhulani

FALCONIFORMES: Falconidae 26 Eurasian Kestrel Falco tinnunculus Turki baz

GRUIFORMES: Rallidae 27 Spotted Crake Porzana porzana Spotted crake 28 Watercock Gallicrex cinerea Jalmurag 29 White-breasted Waterhen Amaurornis phoenicurus Dahuk

CHARADRIIFORMES: Jacanidae 30 Bronze-winged Jacana Metopidius indicus

CHARADRIIFORMES: Rostratulidae 31 Greater Painted -snipe Rostratula benghalensis Rangila chah

CHARADRIIFORMES: Recurvirostridae 32 Pied Avocet Recurvirostra avosetta Baka chanchu

CHARADRIIFORMES: Burhinidae 33 Eurasian Thick-knee Burhinus oedicnemus Baka chanchu, Khorma


05/10/2006 141

Sl. No.


CHARADRIIFORMES: Charadriidae 34 Gray-headed Lapwing Vanellus cinereus Dhushar titi 35 Greater Sandplover Charadrius leschenaultii Bara bali chah 36 Lesser Sandplover Charadrius mongolus 37 Little Ringed Plover Charadrius dubius Mala batan, Chota batan 38 Pacific Golden-Plover Pluvialis fulva Pubali batan 39 Red-wattled Lapwing Vanellus indicus Hot -ti-t i 40 Snowy Plover Charadrius alexandrinus Batan

CHARADRIIFORMES: Scolopacidae 41 Broad-billed Sandpiper Limicola falcinellus Mota chanchu 42 Common Greenshank Tringa nebularia Shabuz pa 43 Common Redshank Tringa totanus Lal pa chah 44 Common Sandpiper Actitis hypoleucos Shadharon chah 45 Common Snipe Gallinago gallinago Satra lez batan, kada khocha 46 Eurasian Curlew Numenius arquata Baka chanchu, Khorma, Bara gulinda

47 Great Knot Calidris tenuirostris 48 Green Sandpiper Tringa ochropus Shabuz chah 49 Little Stint Calidris minuta Chota chah 50 Marsh Sandpiper Tringa stagnatilis 51 Pintail Snipe Gallinago stenura Sharulez batan 52 Ruddy Turnstone Arenaria interpres Ghuron chah 53 Ruff Philomachus pugnax 54 Spotted Redshank Tringa erythropus Futni chah 55 Temminck's Stint Calidris temminckii 56 Terek Sandpiper Xenus cinereus Terek chah 57 Whimbrel Numenius phaeopus Lamba chanchu 58 Wood Sandpiper Tringa glareola

CHARADRIIFORMES: Laridae 59 Black-headed Gull Larus ridibundus Gang kabutor 60 Great Black-headed Gull Larus ichthyaetus Gang kabutor

CHARADRIIFORMES: Sternidae 61 Black-bellied Tern Sterna acuticauda Gang cheel 62 Common Tern Sterna hirundo Shadaron Gang cheel 63 Gull-billed Tern Sterna nilotica 64 Little Tern Sterna albifrons Khudey gang cheel 65 River Tern Sterna aurantia Gang cheel, Mach khaikka 66 Whiskered Tern Chlidonias hybridus Gang cheel 67 White Tern Gygis alba Gang cheel 68 White-winged Tern Chlidonias leucopterus Petkala gang cheel

COLUMBIFORMES: Columbidae 69 Eurasian Collared-Dove Streptopelia decaocto Shada ghugu, Raj ghaghu 70 Rock Pigeon Columba livia Jalali kabutor 71 Spotted Dove Streptopelia chinensis Tila ghogu

PSITTACIFORMES: Psittacidae 72 Red-breasted Parakeet Psittacula alexandri Tota 73 Rose-ringed Parakeet Psittacula krameri Shabuj tia

CUCULIFORMES: Cuculidae 74 Asian Koel Eudynamys scolopacea Kokil 75 Common Hawk-Cuckoo Cuculus varius Bou -katha-kao


05/10/2006 142

Sl. No.


76 Greater Coucal Centropus sinensis Kanakukah STRIGIFORMES: Strigidae

77 Asian Barred Owlet Glaucidium cuculoides Potti pecha 78 Brown Hawk-Owl Ninox scutulata Baz pecha 79 Spotted Owlet Athene brama Futni pecha

APODIFORMES: Apodidae 80 Asian Palm-Swift Cypsiurus balasiensis Nakkati

CORACIIFORMES: Alcedinidae 81 Black-capped Kingfisher Halcyon pileata Machranga 82 Common Kingfisher Alcedo atthis Khudi machranga 83 White-throated Kingfisher Halcyon smyrnensis Chitra machranga

CORACIIFORMES: Meropidae 84 Chestnut -headed Bee-eater Merops leschenaulti Suichora

85 Green Bee-eater Merops orientalis Suichora CORACIIFORMES: Coraciidae

86 Indian Roller Coracias benghalensis Nilkantho CORACIIFORMES: Upupidae

87 Hoopoe Upupa epops Hudhud PICIFORMES: Capitonidae

88 Coppersmith Barbet Megalaima haemacephala Choto basanta baori PICIFORMES: Picidae

89 Black-rumped Flameback Dinopium benghalense Sonali katthokra PASSERIFORMES: Alaudidae

90 Bengal Bushlark Mirafra assamica Jhop chatak 91 Oriental Skylark Alauda gulgula Chatok, Bharot Pakhi

PASSERIFORMES: Hirundinidae 92 Barn Swallow Hirundo rustica Ababil 93 Common House-Martin Delichon urbica Ababil

PASSERIFORMES: Motacillidae 94 Forest Wagtail Dendronanthus indicus Bon khanjan 95 Gray Wagtail Motacilla cinerea Khanjan 96 Oriental Pipit Anthus rufulus Chatak 97 White Wagtail Motacilla alba Khanjan 98 White-browed Wagtail Motacilla madaraspatensis Pakra Khanjan

PASSERIFORMES: Campephagidae 99 Black-winged Cuckoo-shrike Coracina melaschistos Sada koshai

PASSERIFORMES: Pycnonotidae 100 Red-vented Bulbul Pycnonotus cafer Kala bulbul, Bulbuli

PASSERIFORMES: Aegithinidae 101 Common Iora Aegithina tiphia Phuljhuri, Fatikjal

PASSERIFORMES: Turdidae 102 Blue Rock-Thrush Monticola solitarius

PASSERIFORMES: Sylviidae 103 Brown Bush-Warbler Bradypterus luteoventris 104 Common Tailorbird Orthotomus sutorius Tonatuni, Tuntuni

PASSERIFORMES: Muscicapidae 105 Oriental Magpie-Robin Copsychus saularis Doyel 106 Pied Bushchat Saxicola caprata 107 Red-breasted Flycatcher Ficedula parva Lal-buk chotok


05/10/2006 143

Sl. No.


108 White-tailed Stonechat Saxicola leucura PASSERIFORMES: Timaliidae

109 Jungle Babbler Turdoides striatus Sat bhai PASSERIFORMES: Nectariniidae

110 Purple Sunbird Cinnyris asiaticus Nil tuni, Madhuchuski 111 Purple-rumped Sunbird Leptocoma zeylonica Moutushi

PASSERIFORMES: Dicaeidae 112 Yellow -vented Flowerpecker Dicaeum chrysorrheum Fuljhuri

PASSERIFORMES: Oriolidae 113 Black-hooded Oriole Oriolus xanthornus Halud pakhi

PASSERIFORMES: Laniidae 114 Bay-backed Shrike Lanius vittatus Koshai pakhi 115 Brown Shrike Lanius cristatus Brown shrike

PASSERIFORMES: Dicruridae 116 Ashy Drongo Dicrurus leucophaeus Fingey 117 Black Drongo Dicrurus macrocercus Fingey 118 Bronzed Drongo Dicrurus aeneus Choto fingey

PASSERIFORMES: Artamidae 119 Ashy Woodswallow Artamus fuscus Latora

PASSERIFORMES: Corvidae 120 House Crow Corvus splendens Pati kak, Kaua 121 Large-billed Crow Corvus macrorhynchos Dar kak 122 Rufous Treepie Dendrocitta vagabunda Kut umpakhi, Harichacha

PASSERIFORMES: Sturnidae 123 Asian Pied Starling Gracupica contra Pakra shalik, Gubre shalik, Gu shalik 124 Chestnut -tailed Starling Sturnia malabarica Kat shalik 125 Common Myna Acridotheres tristis Lal shalik, Bath shalik 126 Jungle Myna Acridotheres fuscus Jhuti shalik 127 Spot-winged Starling Saroglossa spiloptera

PASSERIFORMES: Ploceidae 128 Baya Weaver Ploceus philippinus Babui

PASSERIFORMES: Estrildidae 129 Nutmeg Mannikin Lonchura punctulata Photni chumbul

PASSERIFORMES: Passeridae 130 House Sparrow Passer domesticus Charai

Source: MoEF (2001b), Survey of Fauna, National Conservation Strategy (NCS) Implementation Project-1.


05/10/2006 144

Annex 6: Reptiles recorded at St Martin’s Island

Sl. No.

Scientific name Common name Local name

ORDER: TESTUDINES FAMILY: Cheloniidae

1 Caretta caretta Loggerhead turtle Sagar kachim 2 Chelonia mydas Green turtle Sagar kachim 3 Eretmochelys imbricata Hawksbill turtle Sagar kachim 4 Lepidochelys olivacea Olive Ridley turtle Sagar kachim

FAMILY: Dermochelyidae 5 Dermochelys coriacea Leatherback turtle Sagar kachim

FAMILY: Bataguridae 6 Kachuga tecta Common roofed tortoise Kaitta

FAMILY: Trionychidae 7 Lissemys punctata Indian roofed flapshell turtle Sundi kachim

ORDER: LACERTILLA FAMILY: Gekkonidae

8 Hemidactylus brookii Common wall lizard Tiktiki FAMILY: Agamidae

9 Calotes versicolor Common garden lizard Rokto chosha FAMILY: Scincidae

10 Mabuya carinata Common skink Anjon 11 Mabuya dissimilis Striped skink Anjon

FAMILY: Varanidae 12 Varanus bengalensis Grey land monitor Kalo godi 13 Varanus salvator Ring lizard Guishap

ORDER: SERPENTES FAMILY: Colubridae

14 Amphiesma stolata Striped keelback water snake Dhora shap, Jal bora 15 Cerberus rynchops Dog-faced water snake Kukur mukhi 16 Coluber mucosus Rat snake Darash 17 Dendrelaphis pictus Painted bronzed back Sutanoli 18 Elaphe radiata Copperheaded trinket Arbeki 19 Enhydris enhydris Common smooth water snake Pani shap 20 Xenocrophis piscator Checkered keelback water snake Dhora

FAMILY: Elapidae 21 Bungarus fasciatus Banded krait Shankhini 22 Naja naja Common cobra Padma gokhra 23 Naja kaouthia Bengal cobra Kahya gokhra

FAMILY: Hydrophidae 24 Enhydrina schistosa Hook-nosed sea snake Samudra sap 25 Hydrophis cyanocinctus Annulated sea snake Samudra sap 26 Hydrophis fasciatus Banded sea snake Samudra sap 27 Hydrophis nigrocinctus Black-headed sea snake Samudra sap 28 Microcephalophis gracilis Common narrow-headed sea snake Rangila samudra sap



05/10/2006 145

Annex 7: List of fish recorded at St Martin’s Island

Family (Subfamily)

Genus & Species (Synonym)

Common Name (FAO Name) Local Name

Orectolobiformes (Lamniformes) 1. Orectolobidae 1. Stegostoma fasciatum Tiger Shark Bagha hangor 2. Rhincodontidae 2. Rhincodon typus Whale Shark Timi hangor Carcharhiniformes

3. Hemipristis elongata (Carcharhinus ellioti)

Snaggletooth shark (Grey Shark)

Hangor

4. Rhizoprionodon acutus (Scoliodon walbeehmii)

Milk shark Nak-chokha hangor

3. Carcharhinidae

5. Scoliodon laticaudus (Scoliodon sorrakowah)

Spadenose shark Thutee hangor

4. Sphyrnidae 6. Eusphyra blochii (Sphyrna blochii)

Hammerheaded shark Haturimatha hangor

Rhinobatiformes 5. Rhinobatidae 7. Rhinobatos granulatus Shovelnose ray Pitambori Torpediniformes 6. Torpedinidae 8. Narcine brunnea Brown electric fish Badami biddut

machh Rajiformes

9. Dasyatis (Himantura) uarnak Coach whip ray Dora-leja housh

10. Dasyatis (Himantura) walga Housh pata 11. Taeniura lymma Blue spotted ray Sapla pata

7. Dasyatidae

12. Gymnura micrura Short-tail butterfly Padmamani Myliobatiformes 8. Myliobatidae 13. Aetobatus narinari Spotted eagle ray Chil mach 9. Rhinopteridae

14. Rhinoptera neglecta*

Australian cownose ray Chil mach

10. Mobulidae 15. Manta birostris Manta ray Deo mach Anguilliformes

16. Gymnothorax puntatus White spotted moray Bamosh 11. Muraenidae 17. Gymnothorax sp. Black spotted moray Bamosh

12. Congridae 18. Congresox telabonoides Indian pike -conger Kamilla mach Clupeiformes

19. Stolephorus commersoni Commerson's anchovy Hitchiri 20. Stolephorus indicus Indian anchovy Hitchiri 21. Thryssa dussumieri Dussumier's thryssa Pati phaissa 22. Thryssa hamiltoni Hamilton’s thryssa Ram phaissa 23. Thryssa setirostris Longjaw thryssa Datne phasya 24. Coilia dussumieri Gold-spotted anchovy Alua 25. Coilia neglecta Neglected grenadier

anchovy Alua

13. Engraulidae

26. Coilia ramcarati Ramcarat grenadier anchovy

Alua

27. Ilisha elongata Elongate ilisha Choikka 28. Ilisha megaloptera Bigeye ilisha Choikka 29. Ilisha melastoma Indian ilisha Choikka 30. Pellona ditchela Indian pellona Choikka

14. Pristigasteridae

31. Raconda russeliana Raconda Fatra phaissa 32. Chirocentrus dorab Dorab wolf herring Korati chella 15. Chirocentridae 33. Chirocentrus nudus Whitefin wolf-herring Korati chella


05/10/2006 146

Family (Subfamily)



34. Dussumieria acuta Rainbow sardine Naillah 35. Sardinella fimbriata Fringescale sardinella Chanda

16. Cluipeidae

36. Tenualosa ilisha Hilsa shad Ilish Siluriformes

17. Bagridae 37. Mystus gulio Catfish Guilla 38. Arius arius Threadfin sea catfish Kata mach 39. Arius dussumeiri Blacktip sea catfish Mos mach 40. Arius gagora Gagora catfish Guizza 41. Arius nenga Catfish Kata gagot 42. Arius thalassinus Giant sea catfish Guizza 43. Arius thunbergi

(Arius maculatus) Spotted catfish Mos mach

18. Ariidae

44. Arius parvipinnis Catfish Kata pini 19. Plotosidae 45. Plotosus canius Grey eel-catfish Kaun mach

Aulopiformes 46. Saurida tumbil Greater lizardfish Achila mach 47. Trachinocephalus myops Snakefish Bele

20. Synodontidae

48. Harpadon nehereus Bombay duck Loitta Mugiliformes

49. Liza parsia Gold-spot mullet Bata 50. Mugil cephalus Flathead mullet Kharul bata 51. Rhinomugil corsula Corsula mullet Khorsula

21. Mugilidae

52. Sicamugil cascasia Yellowtail mullet Bata Beloniformes

22. Hemiramphidae 53. Rhynchorhamphus georgii (Hemiramphus georgii)

Halfbeak Ek thuitta

23. Exocoetidae 54. Exocoetus volitans Tropical two-wing flyingfish

Ural mach

55. Ablennes hians Flat needlefish Thuitta mach 56. Tylosurus crocodilus Hound needlefish Thuitta mach

24. Belonidae

57. Strongylura strongylura (Tylosurus strongylurus)

Spottail needlefish Thuitta mach

Cyprinodontiformes 25. Aplocheilidae 58. Aplocheilus panchax Blue panchax Techoukka

Atheriniformes 26. Atherinidae 59. Atherinomorus lacunosus (Allanetta

forskali) Hardyhead silverside

Beryciform es 60. Myripristis vittata Whitetip soldierfish 27. Holocentridae 61. Sargocentron sp. Squirrel fish

Syngnathiformes 28. Syngnathidae 62. Hippocampus kuda Spotted seahorse Ghora mach

Scorpaeniformes 29. Scorpaenidae 63. Pterois russelii Plaintail turkeyfish Rongila 30. Tetrarogidae 64. Tetraroge niger

(Apistus niger)

31. Synanceiidae 65. Minous monodactylus Grey stingfish Butar mach 32. Platycephalidae 66. Grammoplites scaber Rough flathead Mur baila Perciformes (Percoidei)

33. Latidae 67. Lates calcarifer Barramundi Koral mach 68. Cephalopholis boenak Chocolate hind Chitra bole 34. Serranidae

35. (Epinephelinae) 69. Epinephelus hexagonatus Starspotted grouper


05/10/2006 147

Family (Subfamily)



70. Epinephelus lanceolatus Giant grouper Koral bole 71. Epinephelus quoyanus*

(Epinephelus megachir) Longfin grouper

72. Epinephelus polyphekadion Camouflage grouper

73. Plectropomus leopardus* Leopard coralgrouper 36. Priancanthidae 74. Priacanthus tayenus Purple-spotted bigeye

75. Apogon novemfasciatus Sevenstriped cardinalfish

76. Apogon septemstriatus Cardinalfish Gogla 77. Apogon sp 1 Cardinalfish

37. Apogonidae (Apogoninae)

78. Apogon sp 2 Cardinalfish 79. Sillaginopsis panijus

(Sillago domina) Flathead sillago Tulardandi 38. Sillaginidae

80. Sillago sihama Silver sillago Hundra 39. Malacanthidae 81. Malacanthus sp. Quakerfish 40. Lactaridae 82. Lactarius lactarius False trevally Sada mach 41. Echeneididae 83. Echeneis naucrates Live sharksucker Hangor chat 42. Rachycentridae 84. Rachycentron canadum Cobia Samudra gojar

85. Alepes melanoptera Blackfin scad Doramouri 86. Alectis indicus Indian threadfish Fakir mach 87. Carangoides malabaricus Malabar trevally Malabar mouri 88. Caranx ignobilis Giant travelly Boro mouri 89. Caranx melampygus Bluefin travelly Boga mouri 90. Megalaspis cordyla Torpedo scad Kawa mouri 91. Parastromateus niger Black pomfret Kala chanda 92. Scomberoides commersonnianus Talang queenfish Futi chapa 93. Selar boops Oxeye scad Sonali mouri 94. Selar crumenophthalmus

(Caranx crumenophthalmus) Bigeye scad Choukka mouri

43. Carangidae

95. Seriolina nigrofasciata (Zonichthys nigrofasciata)

Blackbanded trevally Bedo mach

44. Menidae 96. Mene maculata Moonfish Chan chanda 97. Gazza minuta Toothed ponyfish Deto chanda 98. Leiognathus bindus Orangefin ponyfish Kamala chanda

45. Leiognathidae

99. Leiognathus fasciatus Striped ponyfish Tek chanda 100. Lutjanus fulviflammus Dory snapper 101. Lutjanus johnii John’s snapper Ranga koi 102. Lutjanus malabaricus Malabar blood snapper Ranga koi 103. Lutjanus sanguineus Humphead snapper Ranga koi 104. Lutjanus vitta Brownstripe red

snapper

105. Lutjanus sp 1 (One spot snapper)

46. Lutjanidae

106. Lutjanus sp 2 (Yellow belly snapper) 47. Caesionidae 107. Caesio xanthonota Yellowback fusilier 48. Lobotidae 108. Lobotes surinamensis Tripletail Sagor koi

109. Gerres argyreus Common mojarra Dome mach 49. Gerreidae 110. Gerres filamentosus Whipfin silverbiddy Dome mach 111. Plectorhinchu sp 1 Sweetlips 112. Plectorhinchu sp 2 Sweetlips 113. Pomadasys argenteus

(Pomadasys hasta) Silver grunt Nak koral

50. Haemulidae

114. Pomadasys maculatus Saddle grunt Guti datina


05/10/2006 148

Family (Subfamily)



51. Sparidae 115. Argyrops spinifer King soldierbream Lal datina 116. Lethrinus erythracanthus Orange-spotted

emperor

117. Lethrinus olivaceus Longface emperor

52. Lethrinidae

118. Lethrinus ornatus Ornate emperor Lal mach 119. Nemipterus japonicus Japanese threadfin

bream Rupban

120. Scolopsis vosmeri Whitecheek monocle bream

Tolin mach

53. Nemipteridae

121. Scolopsis sp. Monocle bream Tolin mach 122. Eleutheronema tetradactylum Fourfinger threadfin Tailla 123. Leptomelanosoma indicum Indian threadfin Lakhua

54. Polynemidae

124. Polydactylus plebeius Striped threadfin Choto lakhua 125. Johnius argentatus** Silver croaker Lal poa 126. Johnius belangerii Belanger’s croaker Rupali poa 127. Johnius amblycephalus

(Johnius dussumieri) Bearded croaker Poa

128. Otolithoides pama (Pama pama)

Pama croaker Poa

129. Panna microdon Panna croaker Lambu poa 130. Protonibea diacanthus Blackspotted croaker Tila poa

55. Sciaenidae

131. Pterotolithus maculatus Blotched tiger-toothed croaker

Bilai poa

132. Upeneus sulphureus Sulphur goatfish Sonali bata 133. Parupeneus sp 1 Goatfish

56. Mullidae

134. Parupeneus sp 2 Goatfish 57. Monodactylidae 135. Monodactylus argenteus Silver moony Polish chanda 58. Drepanidae 136. Drepane punctata Spotted sicklefish Pan mach

137. Chaetodon collare (Chaetodon collaris)

Redtail butterflyfish

138. Chaetodon decussatus Indian vagabond butterflyfish

139. Chaetodon octofasciatus Eightbanded butterflyfish

140. Chaetodon vagabundus Vagabond butterflyfish 141. Heniochus acuminatus Longfin bannerfish

59. Chaetodontidae

142. Heniochus singularis Singular bannerfish 60. Pomacanthidae 143. Pomacanthus annularis Blueringed angelfish

144. Kyphosus cinerascens Blue seachub 61. Kyphosidae 145. Kyphosus vaigiensis Brassy chub 146. Terapon jarbua Jarbus terapon Gogo 147. Terapon theraps Largescaled terapon Xirpai

62. Terapontidae

148. Terapon sp. 63. Cirrhitidae 149. Cirrhitichthys sp. Hawkfish Perciformes (Labroidei)

150. Oreochromis mossambicus Mozambique tilapia Tilapia 64. Cichlidae 151. Oreochromis niloticus Nile tilapia Tilapia 152. Abudefduf bengalensis Bengal sergeant 153. Abudefduf sexfasciatus Scissortail sergeant 154. Abudefduf sordidus Blackspot sergeant 155. Chrysiptera brownriggii

(Chrysiptera leucompa) Surge damselfish

65. Pomacentridae

156. Chrysiptera unimaculata Onespot demoiselle


05/10/2006 149

Family (Subfamily)



157. Dascyllus sp. Dascyllus 158. Neopomacentrus azysron Yellow-tail demoiselle 159. Pomacentrus caeruleus Caerulean damsel 160. Pomacentrus coelestis Neon damselfish 161. Neopomacentrus cyanomos

(Pomacentrus cyanomos) Regal demoiselle

162. Pomacentrus vaiuli Ocellate damselfish

163. Stegastes fasciolatus Pacific gregory 164. Bodianus sp 1 Hogfish 165. Bodianus sp 2 Hogfish 166. Cheilinus sp Wrasse 167. Coris gaimard Yellowtail coris 168. Coris sp. Coris 169. Halichoeres sp. 1 Wrasse 170. Halichoeres sp. 2 Wrasse 171. Labroidis dimidiatus Bluestreak cleaner

wrasse

172. Thalassoma lunare Moon wrasse 173. Thalassoma sp 1 Wrasse

66. Labridae

174. Thalassoma sp 2 Wrasse 175. Bolbometopon muricatum Green humphead

parrotfish

176. Callydon sperullum Sundari mach 177. Scarus sp 1 Parrotfish 178. Scarus sp 2 Parrotfish

67. Scaridae

179. Scarus sp 3 Parrotfish Perciformes (Blennioidei)

68. Tripterygiidae 180. Helcogramma sp. Triplefin 181. Cirripectes castaneus

(Cirripectes astaneus) Chestnut eyelash-blenny

182. Ecsenius bicolor Bicolor blenny

69. Blennidae

183. Salaries fasciatus Jewelled blenny Perciformes (Gobioidei)

70. Eleotridae 184. Eleotris fusca Dusky sleeper 185. Trypauchen vagina Burrowing goby Lal chewa 71. Gobidae:

(Amblyopinae) 186. Odontam blyopus rubicundus Eel goby Lal chewa 187. Acentrogobius viridipunctatus Green-spotted goby Fool baila 188. Amblyeleotris sp. 189. Amblyeleotris steinitzi Steinitz' prawn-goby 190. Cryptocentrus cinctus Yellow-prawn goby

72. Gobidae: (Gobiinae)

191. Glossogobius giuris Tank goby Baila 192. Apocryptes bato Chiring 73. Gobidae:

(Oxudercinae) 193. Pseudapocryptes elongates (Pseudapocryptes lanceolatus)

Sada chewa

194. Awaous grammepomus Scribbled goby 74. Gobidae: (Gobionellinae) 195. Awaous guamensis

(Awaous stamineus)

Perciformes (Kurtoidei) 75. Kurtidae 196. Kurtus indicus Indian hump head Perciformes (Acanthuroidei)

197. Ephippus orbis Spadefish Hatirkan 76. Ephippidae 198. Platax teira Spotbelly batfish


05/10/2006 150

Family (Subfamily)



77. Scatophagidae 199. Scatophagus argus Spotted scat Bishtara 78. Siganidae 200. Siganus stellatus Brownspotted

spinefoot Bishkatali

201. Acanthurus lineatus Lined surgeonfish 79. Acanthuridae 202. Acanthurus xanthopterus Yellowfin surgeonfish

Perciformes (Scombroidei) 203. Sphyraena forsteri Bigeye barracuda Darkoral 204. Sphyraena qenie

(Sphyraena genie) Blackfin barracuda

80. Sphyraenidae

205. Sphyraena obtusata Obtuse barracuda Savalani hairtail Churi mach 81. Trichiuridae 206. Lepturacanthus savala

207. Trichurus lepturus Largehead hairtail Churi mach Indian mackerel Champa 82. Scombridae 208. Rastrelliger kanagurta

209. Scomberomorus guttatus (Scomberomorus kuhlii)

Indo-Pacific king mackerel

Maitta

Perciformes: (Stromateoidei) 210. Pampus argenteus Silver pomfret Folichanda 83. Stromateidae 211. Pampus chinensis Chinese silver pomfret Rupchanda

84. Psettodidae 212. Psettodes erumei Indian spiny turbot Pata mach Pleuronectiformes

85. Bothidae 213. Pseudorhombus malayanus Malayan flounder Gola lool 214. Cynoglossus bilineatus Fourlined tonguesole Bilini shol 215. Cynoglossus cynoglossus Bengal tonguesole Kukurjib 216. Cynoglossus lingua Long tongue sole Lamba pata

86. Cynoglossidae

217. Cynoglossus kopsii (Cynoglossus versicolor)

Shortheaded tonguesole

Badami soli

218. Aesopia cornuta Unicorn sole Pata mach 219. Brachirus orientalis Oriental sole Pata mach

87. Soleidae

220. Zebrias altipinnis Dora soli Tetraodontiformes

221. Arothron stellatus 222. Chelonodon patoca

(Tetraodon patoca) Milkspotted puffer Potka

223. Lagocephalus lunaris (Gastrophysus lunaris)

Green rough-backed puffer

Rupali potka

88. Tetraodontidae

224. Takifugu oblongus (Torquigener oblongus)

Lattice blaasop Dora potka

89. Diodontidae 225. Diodon histrix Spot-fin porcupinefish Sajaru mach Notes * Distribution of these species in Bangladesh coastal water is questionable; probably they are misidentifications: Rhinoptera neglecta (Rhinopteridae) may be misidentification for the species Rhinoptera javanica or Rhinoptera adspersa; Epinephelus quoyanus/Epinephelus megachir (Serranidae) may be misidentification for Epinephelus hexagonatus or Epinephelus coioides. ** Name not existing in the Fishbase (www.fishbase.org). NCSIP (2001) in cludes the following freshwater fishes in St Martin Island- Mystus cavasius, Mystus tengara, Mystus vittatus, Clarius batrachus and Anabas testudineus.

Source: § MoEF (2001b), Survey of Fauna, National Conservation Strategy (NCS) Implementation Project -1.

§ Carpenter, K.E.; Niem, V.H. (eds) 1998. FAO species identification guide for fishery purposes. The living marine resources of the Western Central Pacific. Volume 2. Cephalopods, crustaceans, holothurians and sharks. Rome, FAO. 1998. pp. 687-1396.

§ Carpenter, K.E.; Niem, V.H. (eds) 1999a. FAO species identification guide for fishery purposes. The living marine resources of the Western Central Pacific. Volume 3. Batoid fishes, chimaeras and bony fishes part 1 (Elopidae to Linophrynidae). Rome, FAO. 1999. pp. 1397-2068.


05/10/2006 151

§ Carpenter, K.E.; Niem, V.H. (eds) 1999b. FAO species identification guide for fishery purposes. The living marine resources of the Western Central Pacific. Volume 4. Bony fishes part 2 (Mugilidae to Carangidae). Rome, FAO. 1999. pp. 2069-2790.

§ Carpenter, K.E.; Niem, V.H. (eds) 2001a. FAO species identification guide for fishery purposes. The living marine resources of the Western Central Pacific. Volume 5. Bony fishes part 3 (Menidae to Pomacentridae). Rome, FAO. 2001. pp. 2791-3380.

§ Carpenter, K.E.; Niem, V.H. (eds) 2001b. FAO species identification guide for fishery purposes. The living marine resources of the Western Central Pacific. Volume 6. Bony fishes part 4 (Labridae to Latimeriidae), estuarine crocodiles, sea turtles, sea snakes and marine mammals. Rome, FAO. 2001. pp. 3381-4218.


05/10/2006 152

Annex 8: Reef-building corals recorded at St Martin’s Island and their relative abundance

Sl No Family Species Name Common Name

Phylum: Cnidaria, Class: Anthozoa, Order: Scleractinia 1. Acroporidae Acropora aceleus 2. Acropora austrea 3. Acropora glauca 4. Acropora latistella 5. Acropora multiacuta 6. Acropora rudis 7. Acropora vaughani 8. Montipora angulata 9. Montipora hispida

10. Montipora informis 11. Montipora spongodes 12. Montipora turtlensis 13. Montipora verucosa 14. Agaricidae Pavona decusata Cactus coral 15. Astrocoeniidae Stylocoeniella armata 16. Dendrophylliidae Dendrophyllia sp. 17. Turbinaria frondens 18. Turbinaria peltata 19. Turbinaria reniformes 20. Turbinaria stellulata 21. Faviidae Cyphastrea chalcidicum 22. Cyphastrea serailia 23. Cyphastrea sp. 24. Favia favus Head coral 25. Favia pallida 26. Favia speciosa 27. Favites abdita 28. Favites chinensis 29. Favites flexuosa 30. Favites halicora 31. Favites sp 1 32. Favites sp 2 33. Goniastrea aspera 34. Goniastrea edwardsi 35. Goniastrea palanensis 36. Goniastrea pendulus 37. Goniastrea retiformis 38. Goniastrea pruinosa 39. Leptastrea purpurea 40. Leptastrea transversa 41. Monastrea curta 42. Monastrea magnistellata 43. Oulophyllia bennettae 44. Platygyra daedalea Brain coral 45. Platygyra pini 46. Platygyra sinensis 47. Merulinidae Hydrophora exesa Merulina coral


05/10/2006 153

Sl No Family Species Name Common Name

Phylum: Cnidaria, Class: Anthozoa, Order: Scleractinia 48. Hydrophora microconos 49. Hydrophora pilosa 50. Hydrophora sp 51. Mussidae Acanthostrea echinata 52. Acanthostrea hillae 53. Oculinidae Galaxea astreata 54. Galaxea fascicularis 55. Galaxea sp 56. Poritidae Goniopora columna 57. Goniopora djiboutiensis 58. Goniopora stokesi 59. Goniopora stutchburyi 60. Goniopora tenuidens 61. Porites lobata 62. Porites lutea 63. Porites murrayensis 64. Porites solida 65. Siderastreidae Coscinaraea columna 66. Psammocora haimeana 67. Psammocora profundacella 68. Pseudosiderastrea tayami



05/10/2006 154

Annex 9: Molluscs recorded at St Martin’s Island Sl No

Order (Suborder)

Family (Subfamily)

Genus & Species (Previous Name)

Common Name (FAO Name)

Class: Bivalvia 1. Arca avellana Hazelnut ark 2.

Arcidae Scapharca sp. Ark

3.

Arcoidea

Glycymeridae Glycymeris sp. Bittersweet clam 4. Perna sp 1 Green mussel 5. Perna sp 2 Green mussel 6. Septifer excisees Box mussel 7.

Mytiloida Mytilidae

Septifer sp. Box mussel 8. Pteriidae Pinctada mazatlanica Pearl oyster 9.

Pterioida Spondylidae Spondylus sp. Thorny oyster

10. Crassostrea sp. Cupped oyster 11. Saccostrea cuculata Hooded oyster 12.

Ostroida Ostreidae

Saccostrea sp. Hooded oyster 13. Chama echinata Jewel box 14. Chama pacifica

(Chama reflexa) Reflexed jewel box

15.

Chamidae (Jewel box shells )

Chama sp. Jewel box 16. Trachycardium

asiaticum Cockle

17.

Cardiidae (Cockles)

Trachycardium sp. Cockle 18. Mactridae Mactra sp. Trough shell 19. Gastrana polygona Tellin 20.

Tellinidae Gastrana sp. Tellin

21. Donacidae Donax sp. Donax clam 22. Dosinia sp. 23. Gafrarium tumidum Tumid venus 24. Ruditeps sp. Carpet shell 25. Sunetta effosa Sunetta 26. Sunneta excavata Sunetta 27.

Veneroida

Veneridae

Venus sp. Class: Gastropoda 28. Archaeogastropoda Fissurellidae Scutus unguis 29. Patellidae Cellana ornata Limpet 30. Monilea belcheri 31. Monodonta australis Monodont 32. Monododonta labio Labio monodont 33. Trochus niloticus Commercial top 34. Trochus maculatus Maculated top 35. Trochus radiatus Radiated top 36.

Trochidae

Umbonium sp. Button top 37. Astraea brevispina 38. Astraea buschii 39. Astraea semicostata 40. Liotina peronii 41. Turbo bruneus Brown Pacific turban 42. Turbo cinereus Smooth moon turban 43.

Turbinidae

Turbo marmoratus Green turban 44. Nerita albicilla Oxpalate nerite 45.

Neritidae Nerita chamaeleon Chameleon ner ite


05/10/2006 155

Sl No

Order (Suborder)

Family (Subfamily)



46. Nerita fulgurans 47. Nerita lineata 48. Nerita polita Polished nerite 49. Nerita ziczac 50. Nerita sp. 51.

Neritina smithi 52. Mesogastropoda Littorinidae Littorina melanstoma Periwinkle 53. Tectarius coronatus Coronate prickly-winkle 54. Cerithium sp. Cerith 55. Clypeomorus

batillariaeformis (Clypeomorus moniliferus)

Necklace cerith

56. Clypeomorus sp. Cerith 57.

Cerithiidae

Rhinoclavis sinensis Obelisk vertagus 58. Cerithidea sp. Horn shell 59.

Potamididae Telescopium sp. Telescope snail

60. Strombus aurisdianae (Euprotomus aurisdianae)

Diana conch

61. Strombus canarium Dog conch 62. Strombus labiatum Plicate conch 63. Strombus marginatus Marginate conch 64. Strombus mutabilis Mutable conch 65. Strombus sp 1 Conch 66.

Strombidae

Strombus sp 2 Conch 67. Cypraea arabica Arabian cowrie 68. Cyprea asellus Little-Donkey Cowrie 69. Cypraea chinensis Chinese Cowrie 70. Cypraea cicercula Chick-pea Cowrie 71. Cypraea erosa Eroded cowrie 72. Cypraea gracilis Marked Graceful Cowrie 73. Cypraea hirundo Swallow Cowrie 74. Cypraea nucleus 75. Cypraea subviridis 76. Cypraea tessellata 77. Cypraea xanthodon 78. Cypraea sp 1 79. Cypraea sp 2 80. Cypraea sp 3 81. Cypraea sp 4 82. Cypraea sp 5 83. Cypraea sp 6 84. Cypraea sp 7 85. Cypraea sp 8 86. Cypraea annulus

(Monetaria annulus) Gold ring cowrie

87.

Cypraeidae

Cypraea moneta (Monetaria moneta)

Money cowrie

88. Natica elenae 89.

Naticidae Natica lineata Lined moon snail


05/10/2006 156

Sl No

Order (Suborder)

Family (Subfamily)



90. Natica tigrina Tiger moon snail 91. Natica sp. 92. Polinices didyma Bladder moon snail 93. Polinices mammilla

(Polinices tumidus) Pear-shaped moon snail

94.

Polinices sp. Moon snail 95. Ficidae Ficus sp. Fig shell 96. Phalium areola Checkerboard bonnet 97.

Cassidae Phalium sp. Bonnet

98. Argobuccinum australasiae

99. Cymatium pileare Common hairy triton 100.

Ranellidae (= Cymatidae)

Cyrineum natator 101. Personidae Distorsio reticularis

(Distorsio reticulata) Reticulate distorsio

102. Bursidae Bursa sp. Frog shell 103. Acteonidae Solidula sp. Small buble shell 104. Planaxid ae Planaxis sp. Cluster wink 105. Neogastropoda Chicoreus brunneus Adusta murex 106. Chicoreus sp. Murex 107. Murex sp. Murex 108.

Muricidae

Naquetia sp. 109. Morula granulata 110. Morula margariticola 111. Morula marginalba 112. Repena rapiformes Turnish shaped rapa 113. Thais alounia Alou rock shell 114. Thais bufo Toad purpura 115. Thais hipocastanum 116. Thais mancinella 117. Thais tissoti 118. Thais sp. 1 119.

Thaididae

Thais sp. 2 120. Babylonia formosae Ivory whelk 121. Babylonia spirata Ivory whelk 122. Cantharus undosus Waved goblet 123.

Buccinidae

Cantharus sp. Goblet 124. Columbellidae Anachis miser 125. Buillia vittatum 126.

Nassaridae Nassarius sp. Nassa

127. Pugilina cochlidium Spiral melongena 128. Pugilina colosseus Colossal melongena 129.

Melongenidae

Pugilina sp. Melongena 130. Fusinus rostratus 131. Latrius polygonus Many-angled spindle 132. Latrius sp. 133.

Fasciolaridae

Pleuroploca filamentosa

Filamentous horse conch

134. Harpidae Harpa major Major harp 135. Turbinellidae Turbinella pyrum 136. Olividae Agaronia nebulosa


05/10/2006 157

Sl No

Order (Suborder)

Family (Subfamily)



137. Amalda ampala 138. Oliva gibbosa 139. Oliva hirasei 140. Oliva oliva Common olive 141. Oliva vidua Black olive 142. Oliva sp. 1 143. Oliva sp. 2 144. Oliva sp. 3 145. Oliva sp. 4 146. Oliva sp. 5 147. Oliva sp. 6 148. Oliva sp. 7 149. Oliva sp. 8 150. Oliva sp. 9 151. Oliva sp. 10 152.

Olivancillaria sp. 153. Marginella angustata 154.

Marginellidae Marginella sp.

155. Mitra ambigua 156. Mitra barbadensis 157. Mitra coronata 158. Mitra hindsii 159. Mitra punctostriata 160. Mitra ticaonica 161. Mitra variabilis 162. Mitra sp. 163.

Mitridae

Pusia porphyretica 164. Vexillum

cerebriliratum

165.

Costellariidae

Zierliana sp. 166. Conus catus 167. Conus erythraeensis 168. Conus geographus 169. Conus inseriptus 170. Conus striatus 171. Conus textile Textile cone 172.

Conidae

Conus sp. 173. Gemmula speciosa 174. Lophitoma indica Indian turrid 175. Surcula javana 176. Turris crispa 177.

Turridae

Turiculla tornata 178. Terebridae Terebra affinis Auger shell 179. Architectonicidae Architectonica sp. Sundial shell 180. Basommatophora Siphonaria javanica

(Siphonaria siphon) Javanese false limpet

181.

Siphonariidae

Sophonaria sp. False limpet 182. Doridacea Dorididae Doris sp. 183. Kentrodorididae Jornua funebris 184. Chromodoridae Chromodoris sp.


05/10/2006 158

Sl No

Order (Suborder)

Family (Subfamily)



185. Glossodoris atromarginata

Class: Amphineura 186. Polyplacophora Ischnochitonidae Ischnochiton

boniensis

187. Chitonidae Chiton granoradius Source: MoEF (2001b), Survey of Fauna, National Conservation Strategy (NCS) Implementation Project-1.


05/10/2006 159

Annex 10: Other invertebrates recorded at St Martin’s Island CRABS (Class: Crustacea)

Order (Suborder)

Family (Subfamily)

Species Name (Synonym)

Common Name

Xanthidae 1. Atergatis integerrimus Red Egg Crab 2. Matuta lunaris Moon Crab Calappidae 3. Matuta planipes Flower moon crab 4. Charybdis feriatus Crucifix crab 5. Portunus pelagicus Flower crab 6. Portunus sanguinolentus Three-spot swimming crab 7. Scylla serrata Giant mud crab

Portunidae

8. Thalamita crenata Crenate swimming crab 9. Dotilla myctiroides Soldier crab

Decapoda (Infraorder: Brachyura)

Ocypodidae 10. Ocypode ceratophthalma Horned ghost crab ECHINODERMS (Crinoids, Stars, Sea Urchins and Sea Cucumbers)

Class (Sub Class)

Order (suborder)

Family (subfamily)

Species Name Common name

Colobometridae 1. Cenometra bella Feather stars Mariametridae 2. Stephanometra indica Feather stars

(Subphylum: Crinozoa) Crinoida

Comatulida

Tropiometridae 3. Tropiometra afra Feather stars

(Subphylum: Asterozoa) Stellaroida

Valvatida Oreasteridae 4. Protoreaster sp. Horned sea star

5. Echinometra mathaei Matha's Sea Urchin Echinometridae 6. Echinostrephus

aciculatus Needle Spined Sea Urchin

(Subphylum: Echinozoa) Echinoidea

Echinoida

Diadematidae 7. Echinortrix calamaris Banded Sea Urchin Holothuroidea

Aspidochirotida Holothuriidae 8. Holothuria atra Sea cucumber

Source: MoEF (2001b), Survey of Fauna, National Conservation Strategy (NCS) Implementation Project-


05/10/2006 160

Annex 11: Stakeholder Analysis

Extracted from POUSH (2006d) – for more information see full report.

PAPD: The Island consists only one Mauza and the whole Island is ECA. There are 7 paras in the mauza, viz:

1. Dail para 2. Purba para 3. Nazrul para 4. Majer para 5. Paschim para 6. Kona para 7. Daskhin para

The PAPD for St. Martin’s Island was conducted from 24 to 26 January 2006 at Majer Para Cyclone Center. There were 60 participants from almost every para. The following stakeholder groups participated:

Boat owner: 05 Businessman: 13 Farmer: 01 Service Holder: 02 Fisher: 18 Housewife: 21

For the PAPD they were segregated on the following 3 groups based on their status:

1. Fishers 2. Businessmen 3. Women

Ranking of problems identified

Obtained scores per group Sl No.

Problems

Fishers Businessmen

Women

Total scores

Group weight

Grand Total

Rank

1 Tourism related problem 8 29 8 45 3 135 1 2 Lack of sanitary latrines 8 5 12 25 3 75 2 3 Lack of fresh water supply

and water logging 6 8 10 24 3 72 3

4 Lack of fishes in the sea 10 6 4 20 3 60 4 5 Lack of trees in the area - 12 13 25 2 50 5 6 Decrease of animals in the

island 6 2 5 13 3 39 6

7 Problems in livestock and poultry rearing

- 8 8 16 2 32 7

8 Problems in the cultivation 2 3 5 10 3 30 8 9 Problems of transportation in

the rainy season - 10 5 15 2 30 9

10 Less production in vegetable 2 3 5 10 3 30 10 11 Presence of stones beneath

the agricultural land - 6 5 11 2 22 11


05/10/2006 161

Obtained scores per group

12 Land sliding caused by the sea

8 - 2 10 2 20 12

13 Decrease of Pezla in the sea - 15 - 15 1 15 13 14 Decrease of coral in the

island - 12 - 12 1 12 14

15 The crisis of animal food - 12 - 12 1 12 15 16 Trawling in the shallow sea 4 1 - 5 2 10 16 17 Lack of medical treatment in

the island - - 9 9 1 9 17

18 Crisis of money - 2 2 4 2 8 18 19 Population problem - - 5 5 1 5 19 20 Lack of roads in the island - 3 - 3 1 3 20 21 Problem in business - 3 - 3 1 3 21 22 Dowry problem - - 1 1 1 1 22 23 Lack of educational facilities - - - - - - 23 24 Lack of safe Ghat and

collection of excess toll at Ghat

- - - - - - 24

25 The attack of robbers in the sea

- - - - - - 25

Stakeholder analysis Problem Crisis of the drinking

water Tourism related problem Sanitation

problem Solution Deep tube well

and ring well should be setup in the area by Govt. initiatives

Arranging at least 1 safe transport from Teknaf to St. Martin during the summer and rainy season

To arrange loan facilities to the local entrepreneurs to build boarding of medium class for the tourists

Ring slab in the local area should be distributed as a Govt. donation or arranging loan for the purpose

Stakeholders Fishermen +,+,+ +,+,+ +,+,+ +,+,+ Fishery Businessmen +,+,+ +,+,+ +,+,+ +,+,+ Hotel management +,+,+ +,+,+ +,+,+ +,+,+ Tourist boat owner +,+,+ +,=,+ +,+,+ +,+,+ Local Govt. members +,+,+ +,+,+ +,+,+ +,+,+ Upazilla social service officer

+,+,+ +,+,+ +,+,+ +,+,+

Religious leaders +,+,+ +,+,+ +,+,+ +,+,+ Non fishing businessmen +,+,+ +,+,+ +,+,+ +,+,+ Notes: + means if the solutions are implemented, the stakeholders will be always benefited - means if the solutions are implemented, the stakeholders will always will face loss = means if the solutions are implemented, the stakeholders will be neither benefited nor looser + (-) means if the solutions are implemented, the stakeholders will be initially benefited but looser in the long run - (+) means if the solutions are implemented, the stakeholders will be initially looser but benefited in the long run


05/10/2006 162

Annex 12: Compilation of new rules identified for St Martin’s Island ECA

Current regulation/new rule Justification

A. Natural forest and tree felling and harvesting

1. Restrict cutting of Pandanus to branches only Removal of whole plant destabilises sand dunes and beach sediments

2. Extend to include restriction on collection of fruits to 75% of fruits

Collection of fruit is limiting natural regeneration

3. No mangrove cutting (natural or planted) While natural forest is protected under regulations, planted forest is not

4. Extend to include collection of marine algae for commercial trade

Important for sand dune formation

5. Restrict collection of marine algae for research purposes

Food source for Green Turtles; habitat for marine fauna

B. Wildlife or game killing

1. Seasonal or complete ban on specific fishing gear in cetacean habitat

High rate of by-catch

2. Allow killing of stray dogs Raid turtle nests and eat eggs; kill nesting turtles

3. Allow killing of house crow and other alien predatory birds

Predate native bird eggs; reduce habitat available for native bird species

4. Ban use of air gun/sling shots Used to kill birds for fun

5. Include hunting and trapping of birds Birds not specifically included

6. No killing of sea cucumbers Not specifically included

C. Catching or collection of corals, bivalves, turtles and other wild life

1. No turtle egg collection Egg collection equally, if not more, damaging

2. Include hunting and trapping of birds Birds not specifically mentioned

3. Extend to include sale and purchase of coral

4. Include no collection of crustaceans, shells or echinoderms for curio businesses

Not specifically included currently

D. Destruction or alteration of habitats for flora and fauna

1. No use of seine nets restricted in marine algal communities

Important habitat

2. No anchoring in coral areas Damages coral

3. No boulder removal from intertidal rocky zone or rocky land habitat

Affects habitat and species directly

4. No infrastructure development within 15-20 m of dune areas (to be clarified

Adversely affects dune structure

5. No infrastructure development in rocky land habitat Adversely affect habitat and species

6. No conversion of mudflat for any purpose Only mudflat habitat in whole site.


05/10/2006 163

Current regulation/new rule Justification

E. Any activities that relate to the destruction of the natural characteristics of land and water

1. No untreated sewerage disposal into marine environment

Water pollution

2. No planting of invasive alien species Adversely affects native species biodiversity

3. No clearing of dunes for any purpose Essential for protection

F. Establishment of industries that might pollute the land, water, air and make sound pollution

1. Include controls on existing industries e.g. fish drying

Marine water pollution of offal from fish dressing/washing

G. Any activity that might harm fish and other aquatic lives

1. No boat discharges outside general use zone Water pollution

2. No solid waste disposal into marine environment Water pollution 3. Use of TED-equipped shrimp and fish trawl nets Minimise turtle trapping

4. No use of ESBN, MSBN and drifting gill nets with 2 km of beach during turtle nesting season

Minimise turtle trapping

5. Ban on harvesting juvenile/sub-adult coral fish Adversely affects age structure/recruitment

6. Breeding season ban on use of fine-meshed nets in coral community areas

Minimise juvenile by-catch

7. Restrictions on fishing during intensive breeding seasons

Adversely affects recruitment

8. Restrictions on the use of gill nets including mesh-size

Adversely affects recruitment, and cetacean and turtle by-catch

9. Ban on oil and gas exploration and extraction within 20km of the site

Adversely affects marine biodiversity

10. Ban on the use of rock-weighted gill nets over coral beds

Adversely affects coral

11. Ban on harvesting crabs in intensive breeding season of June-July

Adversely affects age structure/recruitment

12. Rule on safe release of turtles, cetaceans and jelly fish by-catch

Non-safe release is tantamount to killing

13. Ban on the collection, sale and purchase of ornamental fish

Adversely affects coral-associated species diversity

14. No untreated sewerage released into marine environment

Marine pollution

Additional regulations 1. All tourism providers to be certified under eco-certification program

Eco-certification program being developed as part of tourism management at the site to ensure ecotourism standards are met by tourism providers

2. All infrastructure development at the site to be subject to EIA and approved by DoE

To manage unplanned development at the site


05/10/2006 164

Annex 13: Awareness Raising The following outlines the scope of awareness raising required with respect to human impacts on species, habitat and community conservation at the site. There is scope within the CWBMP to utilise professional assistance for awareness raising activities, which should be drawn upon for these activities. The experience and lessons learnt from awareness-raising conducted under ECFCP and SEMP should also be drawn upon. • Raise awareness at the site about ECA regulations (listed below) and of DoE’s intention to

enforce these regulations via a combination of direct and community-based enforcement:

1. Natural forest and tree felling and harvesting 2. Wildlife or game killing 3. Catching or collection of corals, bivalves, turtles and other wild life 4. Destruction or alteration of habitats for flora and fauna 5. Any activities that relate to the destruction of the natural characteristics of land and

water 6. Establishment of industries that might pollute the land, water, air and make sound

pollution 7. Any activity that might harm fish and other aquatic lives

• Raise awareness of proposed extensions to ECA regulations to be promulgated under the

CWBMP (compiled in Annex 12) and of DoE’s intention to enforce these regulations via a combination of direct and community-based enforcement.

• Raise awareness among the relevant user groups about the impact of their activities on habitats,

communities and species:

Activity Habitat/community/species affected Relevant ECA regulation(s)*

Pandanus clearing Pandanus (abundance and distribution), sand dunes (destabilisation), beach (erosion)

1, 4, 5

Seaweed collection Sand dunes (limits formation), beach (erosion) 5 Fishing Coral fishes, marine algae (destruction), cetaceans, turtles

and jelly fish (by-catch), coral (destruction), crustaceans (juvenile by-catch).

3, 4, 7

Fish dressing/ washing Marine algae (growth), marine water (pollution) 5, 6, 7 Turtle egg collection Marine turtles (abundance) 3 Bird hunting/ trapping Birds (abundance/diversity) 2,3 Coral collection Coral (species abundance, diversity; coral habitat

destruction); coral fishes and spiny lobster (habitat destruction)

3, 4, 7

Shell/echinoderm collection

Beach (erosion), molluscs (diversity and abundance), echinoderms (diversity and abundance)

3, 4, 5, 7

Sea cucumber killing Sea cucumber (abundance) 3, 7 Boulder removal Intertidal rocky habitat (destruction), molluscs and

echinoderms (habitat destruction); marine algae (destruction)

4, 5, 7

Infrastructure development on/adjacent to dunes

Sand dunes (destabilisation, destruction), dune vegetation (diversity and abundance)

4, 5


05/10/2006 165

Activity Habitat/community/species affected Relevant ECA regulation(s)*

Conversion of land to cultivation

Rocky land habitat (destruction/degradation), terrestrial species

4, 5

* From list of 1-7 above • Raise awareness among the local community and property developers of the importance of

Pandanus for both coastal and livelihood protection, and the possibility of limited use by the local community of Pandanus for fuelwood via the cutting of branches only.

• Raise awareness among the local community about the significance of the indigenous onion species and the risk it faces in being replaced by other species.

• Raise awareness among fishermen of the impact of the use of seine nets on marine algae communities.

• Raise awareness of near- and off-shore fishermen at the site on the safe release of turtles and cetaceans caught in fishing gear, reducing turtle and cetacean by-catch and superstitions regarding turtles.

• Implement an awareness raising campaign among shrimp trawl owners and operators to initiate the installation of TEDs in shrimp/fish trawling nets.

• Raise awareness of responsible/sustainable fishing methods, including minimising by-catch, use of environmentally-friendly and non-destructive (positive) gears, innovative site-specific fishing techniques and hygienic post-harvest technologies (e.g. HACCP).

• Raise awareness among farmers of the effect of pesticide use on bird habitat and integrated pest management methods, including the judicious use of pesticides.

• Raise awareness among fishermen of the importance of coral-associated fishes, the unique and significant nature of the Island’s coral and its dependent fish species and the impacts of their actions on coral fish biodiversity.

• Raise awareness of both the local community and tourists nation-wide of the importance and significance of coral at the Island, both nationally and internationally, including editing and preparing a commentary in Bangla for the underwater video taken by Tomascik (1997), to be broadcast nationally on TV.

• Raise awareness among fishermen of improved fishing gear (lobster pots with escape routes). • Raise awareness among the local community of the impacts of their activities on the fragile

dune habitat and dune dependent species, including the provision of dune stewardship fact sheets in words and pictures.

• Raise awareness of the significance of the remaining mudflat area, particularly for birds given the declining habitat for birds at other parts of the Island.

• Raise awareness about invasive alien species occurring at the site, their impact on biodiversity and the necessity for both managing those species and avoiding any further introductions.

• Raise awareness among the local community of the importance of not selling land to outsiders for short term gain. Longer term gains can be made by keeping land and conserving it.


05/10/2006 166

Annex 14: Ecotourism Development Plan (DRAFT) Tourist/Visitor Information Program: Identify a suitable location for and establish an Information/Visitors Centre(s), to serve as a focal point for tourism at the site. All ecotourism program information and registered/certified local guides will be available from the Centre(s). All of the guided ecotourism program will start and conclude from the Centre(s). The Centre(s) will be equipped with a map of the site, explaining the site’s zones, habitats and species, location of attractions, location of tourism facilities, infrastructure etc. Brochures containing much the same information as the map will provide a portable version of the map for tourists to refer to during their time at the site and to take home. A list of ecotourism programs with their costs will be available at the Centre(s). The Centre will be manned by several staff (from local community) that will be available to answer questions, provide necessary information regarding attractions and ecotourism best-practices, and arrange guides and other support for the ecotourism program options. The Centre(s) will be contactable directly by hotel and tour operators on the mainland, to refer customer bookings and make travel arrangements etc. The Centre will also sell refreshments, and souvenirs prepared by the local community. The limited availability of materials at the site for making souvenirs will need to be addressed first by CWBMP via provision of start-up costs, but should become self -sustaining. Natural materials at the site should not be used for making souvenirs. The Centre should also include toilet and washing facilities. The Centre(s) may also be associated with tourism monitoring and surveillance. Registered/Certified local guide development program: A number of local people will be selected for a guide training program. The guide training program will be developed according to ecotourism principles. Upon successful completion of training guides will be registered for work as guides on the Island and will be available through the Information Centre(s). The guides will conduct tours, provide interpretive inf ormation, answer tourists’ questions, explain best-practice tourism guidelines and monitor tourist behaviour. Guides will also report species/habitat information to ECA managers, e.g. species sightings, observation of any damage etc. Local cultural progra ms: One or more groups will be formed with the participation of local people (VCG members) to entertain tourists with local songs and puthi. These groups will be available through the Information Centre(s) via a booking system. Turtle watching program Guided turtle watching programs at the western beach (Zones 2 and 3 as identified in Section 3.2) will be developed. These programs, which will only be run during the nesting season, will provide the opportunity for tourists to observe the hatchery program, turtle nests and where possible turtles emerging from the shore to nest. A small information centre at the hatchery(s) will provide information on turtle breeding and nesting habits, migration etc. and pictures of turtles, nesting turtles, nests and their eggs, hatchlings and hatchlings being released into the sea. Two types of programs will be available – a) A day-return trip to visit the hatchery and turtle nesting site, and b) an overnight stay to visit the hatchery and observe turtles emerging to nest. The programs will be 100% guided; group sizes are to be determined. Guided walks: Guided walks will be developed to help tourists get a better understanding of the Island, its biodiversity, habitats, local lifestyle etc. Three types of guided walks are proposed at this point – i) a half-day walk through the villages and other interesting places in Zones 3 and 4 (north to


05/10/2006 167

Golachipa); ii) a full-day walk to include sections of walk (i) and places south of Golachipa (in Zones 3, 5 and 6); and iii) a half-day walk/boat trip to the places south of Golachipa (Zones 3, 5 & 6). The number of people per group and the number of groups visiting Zones 3, 5 and 6 daily will be fixed. This will be regulated via entry points for example at Golachipa and South Para ghat. Fishing tour/Dolphin watching tour: Opportunities also exist for programs related to the observation of local near-/off-shore fishing activities which will also include opportunities for dolphin observation. Coral Appreciation Coral appreciation programs via snorkelling, SCUBA diving and the use of a glass -bottomed boat are options for the coral lagoon site off-shore from zone 3.

draft st martin island cmp040906

Documents